Home

OSAS Resource Manager User Guide

1. TEN User Defined Fields fo es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2 gt xu mna mo 2e 008 o Application PA 4 Payroll File PAEGx 4 Line Prompt Type Len Mask Q2 Last COLA Date 10 a 03 fe is Q4 Training Done Yeso 3 z 05 Orientation Yes No 3 06 Diversity Yes No 3 lo7 Conflict Mgmt Yes No 3 8 09 Citizenship String 20 10 Visa Exp Date Date 10 11 12 13 14 B 15 E 16 E Enteredit l Move l Swap Header Company H 1172772007 Terminai T000 INS Inquiry 2 Select the application for which you want to set up user defined fields You can add user defined fields to Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Payroll and Job Cost Consult your reseller for information on adding user defined fields to other applications Resource Manager 2 59 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration User Defined Field Setup 2 60 3 You can add user defined fields to these files ARCUx APVEx PAEGx and JOBSx Select one of these files in the File field Consult your reseller for information on adding user defined fields to other files Select the line you want to edit and either double click the line or press Enter The Edit User Defined Field screen appears EN Edit User Defined Field c a Commands Edit Modes Other Help 1 2 X te amp a 8 OK Abandon Prompt Training Done Type 0514 Ye
2. Ell Append Attachment fo 7 Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xX Bealmal amp e fak Abandon File Name C OSAS76 data Onpqq79x005 TXT 1 Enter the File Name of the file you want to attach to the e mail or click the browse button to navigate to the file 2 Usethe Proceed OK command to add the attachment to the e mail and return to the E Mail Information Screen Resource Manager Reports Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Commands Use the following commands when a report appears on the screen Key Operation PgUp PgDn Home End F7 Left Right Tab Up Down Moves to the previous page of the report Moves to the next page of the report Moves directly to the top of a group of pages Moves directly to the bottom of a group of pages Exits to the menu from any point in the report Moves left one character Moves right one character Toggles between the left and right halves of a report Moves a line up and down the screen to line up information when you toggle between halves of a report Using Report Pick Screen Criteria You can save the pick criteria from any report screen to make it easier to run reports without redefining the criteria each time The RM option to Use Report Defaults must be set to Yes to use this functionality After you choose to print a report the Save Report Criteria screen appears El Save Report Criteria fo Es Commands Edit M
3. 12 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 3 20 PM Options and Interfaces List For Accounts Receivable Option Number Description Value 001 Interface to General Ledger YES 002 Interface to Inventory YES 005 Interface to Job Cost YES 015 Interface to Bank Reconciliation YES 010 Use Transaction Batching YES 020 System Generated Batch Numbers YES 011 Use Additional Descriptions YES 021 Copy Additional Descriptions from Inventory YES 007 Keep Detail Sales History YES 022 Keep Additional Description History YES 017 Keep Summary Sales History YES 018 Display Unit Cost During Line Item Entry YES 028 Allow Customer Level Change in Transaction Entry YES 029 Allow Expired Credit Card in Payment Entry YES 030 Display Quantities and Quantity Breaks During Line Entry YES 013 Print Online Invoices YES 023 Use Plain Paper Invoices YES 025 Invoice Form Type Standard 027 Use Prenumbered Invoice Forms NO 047 Allow E Mail Invoices to Customers YES 049 Create User Document Link for E Mailed Invoices YES 024 Use Plain Paper Statements YES 026 Statement Form Type Standard 046 Allow E Mail Statements to Customers YES 048 Create User Document Link for E Mailed Statements YES 016 Print Company Information on Plain Paper Forms YES 008 Post Without Printing Reports YES 012 Post Detail to General Ledger YES 009 Use Online Aging YES 019 Apply Credits to Oldest Items YES 036 Customer Credit Card Number Display Last 4 End of Report
4. 3 Customer level already exists for this item TICE Enter edit Append l Goto Company H 1172772007 Terminal Toon OVR Select the Application for which you want to view edit or add messages Line numbers and messages for that application appear If no messages are set up the System Message screen appears where you can enter a new message Use the commands to work with messages Press Enter to edit the selected message When the System Message screen appears edit the message text and use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the System Messages screen Press A to add a message to the end of the list When the System Message screen appears enter the message text and use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the System Messages screen Press G to go to a specific message This command is available only if there 1s more than one screen of messages Purge Post Codes o M Use the Purge Post Codes function to remove general ledger post codes from the OSAS system As with all OSAS functions that remove information from data files be sure that you back up the RMDR file before you run this function The backup allows you to restore data if necessary Follow these steps to purge post codes 1 Select Purge Post Codes from the System File Utilities menu The Purge Post Codes screen appears T Purge Post Codes Eno Commands Ed
5. Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes then enter another company ID or form type to work with or press F7 to return to the menu Form Printers o MI Use the Form Printers function to define the printers and workstations from which to print forms If you have set up a form code for the form use this function to specify which printer should print the copies of the form To work with form printers select Form Printers from the Company Setup menu The Form Printers screen appears H For Printer a a foja E Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help xt5 a mal e ee 5 Form Company Workstation Printer Device Type 1D 1D 1D Name INV H T000 Print Dialog Wide Carriage Dot Matrix Ej APCHK H T000 PDD Print Dialog Dot Matrix a PAW 2 H T000 LPW System Default Printer Wide Carriage 2 POFORM H T000 LPD System Default Printer Dot Matrix aem iem AAA AAA E Line 000001 of 000004 Enter edit Append Goto Company 11 27 2007 Terminal Toon ovn Use the commands to add or edit form printer lines Press Enter to edit the selected form printer line See Adding or Editing a Form Printer on page 3 38 for more information e Press A to add a form printer line to the end of the list See Adding or Editing a Form Printer on page 3 38 for more information 3 37 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Form Printers e Press G
6. Comments A 36 Documents A 39 History A 38 Information A 35 Inquiry F2 application options A 32 button 1 23 commands 1 32 flag 1 27 IX 6 general information A 29 Global Inquiry window list 7 55 Global Inquiry windows 7 27 7 35 A 19 inventory lookup 1 33 Inventory Lookups menu A 13 report history 14 7 14 9 search mode 1 31 sort mode 1 31 window definitions 7 23 7 26 window definitions list 7 54 installation checklist 1 8 of Resource Manager 1 8 Installation and Configuration 2 1 overview 2 1 installing applications 2 3 reinstalling applications 2 5 removing applications 2 75 updates 2 6 inventory lookup 1 33 A 13 inventory price calculator A 25 A 31 K Keyboard 4 23 4 24 L launching e mail from OSAS 4 7 file attachments 4 18 OSAS in other operating systems 1 11 OSAS in Windows 1 11 web browser from OSAS 4 7 levels tax 5 6 lists Application Information 7 52 Company Information 3 45 Country Codes 7 57 Field 7 58 Field Definitions 12 5 Functions 12 7 Global Inquiry Window 7 55 Help Screens 7 53 Resource Manager Inquiry Window Definition 7 54 Laser Label Setup 7 51 Menu 7 51 Options and Interfaces 3 47 printing 3 43 12 2 Screen Definitions 12 3 Setup Definitions List 12 9 Tables 3 48 Tax Groups 5 17 Tax Locations 5 17 View File Contents 6 4 locations tax See Tax Locations login activity 4 3 4 4 logs Change Fields 6 14 Error 7 59
7. Payroll with Direct Deposit an Purchase Order Install Install Path progAP Line No 006 of 014 System Sample Data Online Productivity Graphical Programs Files Data Dict Doc Reports Screens K Ener TagUntag Goo al IM f Done Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Use the commands at the bottom of the screen to select applications Resource Manager Install Applications Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Press Enter to tag the selected application for installation If an application is tagged but you do not want to install it press Enter again to untag the application After you press Enter the system jumps to the directory path field at the bottom of the screen Change the directory in which the application will be installed if necessary then press Page Down to return to the application listing e Press Gto jump to a specific application This command is available only if there is more than one screen of applications e Press A to tag all applications for installation When you use this command OSAS installs applications in default directories e Press N to untag all applications e Press D when you finish to begin the install 5 After selecting the applications to install press D to begin the installation process OSAS copies and extracts files as necessary and restarts when the installation process c
8. E Accounting Periods Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt mealmal lee OK Period Begin Date 01 01 2010 FH End Date 01 31 2010 EX Applications Locked Bank Reconciliation Y Bills of Materials Kitting Y Payroll with Direct Deposit Fixed Assets General Ledger l nventory Job Cost CII Gb Enter Tag Lock Flag Header Done Company H 08 19 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Editthe Begin Date and End Date for the period as needed 2 Inthe Applications scroll area highlight the application you want to lock for the period and press Enter The Locked tag will appear for that application No entry or editing of data is allowed for that application for a locked accounting period 3 Press H to further edit the dates in the header or press D to return to the Accounting Periods function Quarterly If you use a quarterly with an accounting period of one week or any other non Systems calendar year system you will need to edit the beginning and ending dates at the end of each quarter after you ve closed the books so that the system uses the correct accounting periods 3 23 Data File Creation CE Use the Data File Creation function to create the data files you need to process information for a company Except for the ODBC and General Report Writer applications OSAS applications do not appear on a company s main
9. FILES Each file name excluding the company ID Lines 600 699 are used to check that each application you need for the function is installed Otherwise the function returns an error in the EIVAL file Lines 899 989 hold the EIS IOLists Do not change the code unless you really want to modify how EIS works Lines 990 999 are used to place the IOLists the function needs from applications other than EIS Resource Manager Function Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Lines 1000 1399 are used to read through the company ranges in the setup record and place a list of valid companies in the variable CO This variable calls lines 5000 5199 to cycle through each company open its files and run a particular routine When the routine is done the company IDs are cycled through until all the company IDs have been used The function lines 4000 4199 then writes its results to the EIVAL file and exits Do not modify this area Lines 2000 3999 hold the code that uses a From Thru range from the setup file and calculates data from records in that range For example if the function is designed to total a range of GL accounts this section of code would read the GLMAxxx or GLJ Rxxx file for each From Thru range given It would then keep a running total in the array TOTS VALUES Each element in the array can contain different types of totals BUDGETED ACTUAL and so forth When the From Thru range has been completed this section ends a
10. Insert Quick Allow Exit Copyrights Live Data Verify PgDn Resource Manager If you want the computer to beep during verification of commands such as Exit F7 Abandon F5 and Proceed OK enter A if not enter I If you want to confirm the Exit F7 and Abandon F5 commands by issuing the commands a second time enter A if not enter I If you want the character you type to appear before to the left of the cursor by default enter A If you want the character you type to replace the one the cursor is on enter I In some applications quick entry lets you skip nonessential fields on a screen If you want the cursor to stop only at fields that require new data enter A If you need to change a nonessential field when quick entry is active use the up arrow key to move back to the field after you pass it or click on the field in graphical mode If you want the cursor to stop at every field you can change on the screen enter the normal mode Press Ctrl F to toggle quick entry on and off during data entry If you want to exit from OSAS and run other programs enter A the normal setting If you want to prevent this workstation from exiting OSAS enter l If you want the OSAS copyrights to appear each time you start OSAS in text mode enter A if not enter I You can view copyrights in graphical mode by using the About command on the Help pull down menu If you want to use OSAS with live data files
11. The last batch number transferred to the bank for direct deposit appears Accept this batch number or enter the number of the first batch you want to transfer to the bank if you are transferring several batches posted on different days In the Print Field on ACH File field enter F to include your company s federal tax ID number in the ACH file you produce R to include your company s routing code or B to include the federal reserve bank routing code If your bank is a federal reserve bank enter the Federal Reserve Routing Code Enter the identifying code your bank requires for direct deposit records in the Company Identifier Type Number field e Enter 1 if the bank requires your federal tax employer ID number e Enter 3 if the bank requires your DUNS number Enter 9 if the bank requires a different number of the bank s choosing After you enter the code enter the corresponding number If your bank requires the 627 record to be included in your direct deposit media files select the box or enter Y if not clear the box or enter N If your bank expects your ACH file to begin with a security code enter the Security Code for File Transfer in the field at the bottom of the screen If your bank does not require a security code leave this field blank Enter the required length of the security code for your bank If your code is shorter than required the system appends the required number of characters to your security code The
12. customer or vendor information that is used in a function and that appears in a field Refer to page 9 11 for more information on setups and how to use them Functions retrieve data from OSAS data files based on the range defined in the setup definitions assigned to the function process that data then display the data or the results in a field as directed by field definitions Refer to page 9 17 for more information on functions and how to use them A number of fields setups and functions are pre defined in OSAS for your use By combining the existing fields with different setups and functions you can access and display nearly any information You can also create or modify fields and setups if necessary Because functions are essentially programs that run within the OSAS environment you cannot create new ones without specialized programming knowledge However the pre defined functions available in OSAS are designed to address a wide variety of needs Research the functions carefully you ll likely find that one returns the values you need If you would like to build your own functions see page 9 21 for tips on how to get started Resource Manager 8 3 CHAPTER 8 Executive Information Summary Working with Dashboards Types of Dashboards 8 4 EIS dashboards are available in both graphical and text mode However each mode requires a separate file for the dashboard OSAS cannot access one dashboard file for both graphical a
13. e Topic Number e File Name File Number e Inclusion Mask Begin and Length e Exclusion Mask Begin and Length 7 24 Inquiry Window Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 If you are entering a new window enter the topic number and file name of the data file to use for this window then enter the channel index number on which the file will be opened by the functions in the File Number field 5 Edit the window s Title if necessary then enter or edit the Key Number for the file that you want to use to sort the data in the inquiry window 6 The starting column and row indicate where the window will appear on the screen when it opens The total columns and rows refer to the total number of columns and rows that will appear in the inquiry window Edit these values if necessary The starting column plus the number of screen columns you enter in the Total Col field must be less than 80 The length of the window plus the starting row that you enter in the Total Row field must be less than 25 7 Inthe Return No field enter the number of the data name you want to return to the calling program or leave this value as is Press Enter to move to the first column defined for the window 8 Ifyou are editing an existing window edit the descriptive name for the data field in the Data Name field and the number of the first column to use to display the field data in the Col field Do not change the Typ Fmt Fld Beg and Len fields
14. sample log 6 14 Change File Size 6 5 6 6 checklists installation 1 8 setup 1 8 classes tax See Tax Classes Clear Sales Tax 5 15 5 16 codes country codes 7 39 Country Codes list 7 57 EIS field error 9 9 EIS roles 9 25 9 27 fields changing 6 11 IX 1 INDEX form 3 35 Print Manager 14 8 sorting 1 36 state 7 37 Colors 4 21 4 22 commands changing hot keys 4 23 Comments A 36 dashboards 13 3 Documents A 39 EIS 8 10 flags 1 27 History A 38 hot keys 1 27 Inquiry F2 1 31 1 33 list of B 1 B 13 mkrecover 6 7 osas parameters 1 11 Proceed OK 1 2 Windows start 4 18 comments customer vendor employee job A 36 common ratios 8 6 Company Information 3 3 3 6 default values 3 5 editing 3 4 list 3 45 overview 3 3 Company Information List 3 45 Company Setup 3 1 7 37 Company Information 3 3 3 6 Country Codes 7 39 7 40 Data File Conversion 3 27 3 29 Data File Creation 3 25 3 26 Options and Interfaces 3 31 3 33 overview 3 1 Roles 2 19 State Codes 7 37 Company Summary 13 5 config bbx common components 2 26 creating via RMSET program 2 48 editing 2 23 2 24 overview 2 23 sample Linux UNIX file 2 44 2 45 IX 2 sample Novell file 2 46 2 48 sample Windows file 2 42 2 43 conversion OSAS file CJC files D 2 converting data files 3 27 Country Codes list 7 57 masks 7 40 overview 7 39 D Daily Statistics 13 9 dashboards AP Analysis 13 13 AR Anal
15. 1 23 IX 7 INDEX O Options and Interfaces list 3 47 Resource Manager settings 3 33 Options and Interfaces List 3 47 OSAPPL DOS 7 15 OSAPPL UNX 7 15 OSAS command parameters 1 11 commands B 1 B 13 directories 2 51 MDI menu 1 17 menus A 1 modes 1 15 1 28 graphical 1 15 1 22 text 1 24 1 28 starting in other operating systems 1 11 starting in Windows 1 11 OSCL 4 21 OSCODE 2 19 OSCOMP 3 3 OSEL 2 71 2 73 OSERx 7 59 OSFRM 3 35 OSINFO DOS 2 51 OSINFO UNX 2 51 OSKY 4 23 OSMNx 7 11 Other Commands F4 menu A 17 A 31 output device e mail 1 40 file 1 39 preview 1 38 printer 1 37 screen 1 39 P parameters company ID 1 12 file types 4 18 osas command 1 11 OSAS shortcut 1 11 Print Manager 14 11 IX 8 shortcut 1 11 terminal ID 1 12 paths data server 2 56 entering 2 55 relative and UNC 2 55 pdf viewer path 4 13 Period Setup overview 3 21 quarterly systems 3 23 phone masks 7 40 plotters 2 39 Pop Up Calendar A 26 price calculator A 25 A 31 Print Manager Active Report Control A 31 archive directory 14 11 Archive Report Control 14 3 automatic file names 14 11 codes 14 8 File Maintenance 14 13 overview 14 1 Parameters 14 11 Purge Report History 14 13 Report History Inquiry 14 7 14 9 report types 14 8 searching reports 14 5 printers dev comx devices 2 30 dev lptx devices 2 30 dev prn devices 2 30 aligning laser forms 2 35 2 37 form printer
16. 5 Update the fontconfig cache usr bin fc cache 6 Verify by using either xfontsel or fc list to make sure the fonts are now available usr bin fc list Resource Manager E 5 A Active Report Control A 31 Address Lookup 1 23 1 28 2 65 Address Mapping search terms 2 65 variables 2 65 address mapping 1 23 1 28 2 65 addresses 1 28 aligning laser forms 2 35 2 37 alignment marks 2 38 3 36 AP Analysis 13 13 Application Information 7 15 7 17 Application Setup 5 1 Clear Sales Tax 5 15 5 16 overview 5 1 Period Setup 3 21 3 23 Sales Tax Report 5 13 5 14 Tax Classes 5 3 5 4 Tax Groups 5 9 5 12 Tax Locations 5 5 5 8 Application Tables 3 39 3 40 applications base 7 16 directories 2 51 help screens 7 19 information list 7 52 installing 2 3 installing updates 2 6 list 7 52 maintaining information 7 15 options inquiry A 32 reinstalling 2 5 removing 2 75 tables 3 39 tables list 3 48 AR Analysis 13 11 archive directory 14 11 Resource Manager Archive Report Control 14 3 searching reports 14 5 attachments 4 17 A 39 authorities tax 5 6 automatic file names 14 11 Bank Accounts List 3 46 base applications 7 16 Browse 1 23 building functions modifying generic code 9 22 planning 9 22 C calculator inventory price A 25 A 31 text A 20 A 23 calendar A 26 Cash Requirements Forecast 13 7 Change Fields overview 6 11
17. 7 40 Change Field Definitions o M Use the Change Field Definitions function to add new fields or modify existing fields used throughout OSAS applications Once a field is defined use the Change Fields function to change the field s values throughout your OSAS data files This function is especially useful if you have third party vertical applications or have made modifications to OSAS applications and want to define those custom files or fields within OSAS You will need detailed information about the field Follow these steps to work with field definitions 1 Select Field Definitions from the System File Utilities menu The Field Definitions screen appears 7 41 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Change Field Definitions 7 42 2 Enter the Field ID you want to add or change If you select an existing field information for that field appears in the top half of the screen Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Field ID AP VENDOR ID 4 Description AP Vendor ID Application ID AP Master File APVEx File Description AP Vendor File Numeric Field Field Number 1 Field Start 1 Field Length 6 Window ID APVIQ W1 a SELVAL File Name File Description Fld Num Fld Start Flid Len APCHx AP Checks File 3 1 6 APCHx AP Checks File 3 7 6j 2 APHCx AP Check History File 2 1 Bla APHIx AP Purchase History File 2 1 6 APHSx AP Summary History File 1 1 6 APINx AP Open Invoice File 1 1 6 APRHx
18. 8 E Commands Edit Modes Other Help xm ue muj ejee LOK Abendon Suggestion 0002 4 Status Not printed Last Modified 09 27 2007 Application RM Version 7 50 Your Email Webmaster builders_supply com Menu Item Preferences Description Consider adding support for handheld scanners as well as PDAs as input devices Print Suggestion Company H 09 27 2007 Terminal Tooo ovn Inquiry 1 OSAS automatically assigns an identification number starting at 0001 to the suggestion To enter a new suggestion press Enter To recall a previously entered suggestion use the Inquiry F2 command or enter the identification number you want to view A 28 Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A 2 Enter the Application Version and Menu Item for which you want to enter a suggestion then enter the suggestion in the Description area Each line can hold 50 characters press Enter to start a new line 3 Use the Product Suggestions Report function page 9 5 on the Resource Manager Reports and Inquiry menu to print product suggestions 4 After you print suggestions select the suggestion s identification number and change the Status to Printed You cannot change this status for new suggestions General Information Inquiry Use the General Information Inquiry function to view information from the Accounts Receivable Accounts Payable Sales Order Purchase Order and Payroll applications Depending on which applications are
19. Device Mode Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Description Printer On Printer Off Print File Right Margin Setup Slave On Slave Off Standard Cols Standard Print Termination Timeout Resource Manager Enter the codes that initialize the printer before a print job Enter the codes that reset the printer when print jobs finish If you entered the system device name FILE you must enter the name of the default file for output to the disk If you use BBj enter the amount of offset you want for the left margin This option has no effect if you use PRO S For sysprint devices the default is blank If you change the default the new setting overrides the Windows default If you use Windows select the box or enter YES in text mode to open a dialog box when you print reports to select the amount of copies per page printer choices print formats and page layout the options available depend on your printer driver Clear the box or enter NO to make print jobs use default Windows printer settings Slave printers are attached to one terminal and can be used from other workstations This feature is not available with some operating systems To communicate with slave printers the system may need to send hexadecimal codes before and after the text Enter the hexadecimal codes to send before the text Enter the hexadecimal codes to send after the text Enter the number of columns that can be prin
20. E Mail 000002 of 000003 User ID scottm To jeff builderssupply com cc Subject Check History Report Attachment Idata Q0000H0lhke49003 TXT Company H Menu Check History Report Enter Tag All l None Edit Process Tagged l View Attachment Refresh Header Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 3 49 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup E Mail Queue 3 50 1 Enter the User ID whose e mail queue you want to review or press Enter to review the queue for all users Any e mails queued for review will appear in the E mail Queue line item area 2 Highlight the e mail with which you would like to work Below the list the e mail s User ID To recipient CC recipient Subject name Attachment name Company name and originating Menu name appear Use these commands to work with the highlighted e mail Press Enter to tag the highlighted e mail for processing e Press A to tag all e mails in the queue for processing e Press N to untag all e mails in the queue e Press E to edit the highlighted e mail information See E Mail Information Screen on page 3 51 e Press P to process all tagged e mails sending them to their designated recipients e Press V to view the attachments of the highlighted e mail e Press R to refresh the e mail queue adding or removing e mails that have been changed by users since the e mail queue function was opened e The H to return to the e mail queue header and to choose a dif
21. GL Account Audit Report List The GL Account Audit Report List shows tables and data files with invalid or missing GL account numbers 09 26 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 4 08 PM GL Account Audit Report Application Description Interfaced to GL AP Accounts Payable Yes File File Description Record Description Field Name GL Account Reason APPYH Methods of Payment Pymt Method Code CH2 GL Account 400010 Not Found APPYH Methods of Payment Pymt Method Code CHK GL Account 100010 Not Found APVEH Vendors Vendor ID CLEOO1 GL Account Missing APVEH Vendors Vendor ID ELLOO1 GL Account Missing APVEH Vendors Vendor ID JONOO1 GL Account Missing APVEH Vendors Vendor ID TELOO1 GL Account Missing Application Description Interfaced to GL GL General Ledger Yes File File Description Record Description Field Name GL Account Reason GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001404 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001406 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001408 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001410 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001412 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001414 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001416 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001418 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journal Entries Unposted Entry 001420 GL Account 1010 Not Found GLJRH Journ
22. Press E to access the Edit menu then press D Alternately press F3 within an EIS field to delete it These commands delete fields immediately so use them with caution To save a dashboard press Page Down to access the command menus press F to access the File menu then press S If you modify an existing dashboard it s good practice to save the modifications under a new name to preserve the original dashboard for future use Resource Manager CHAPTER 10 Printing an EIS Report 10 2 Dashboard Report 10 5 Dashboard History Report 10 7 Field History Report 10 9 Resource Manager EIS Reports Use the functions on the EIS Reports submenu to generate reports listing dashboard field and historical information You can use these reports to determine when fields were last updated and how values changed between updates e The Dashboard Report prints current field values for a range of dashboards along with the date the fields were last updated e The Dashboard History Report contains the dashboard field values that you have saved using the Global Dashboard Update function You can view field values and changes from up to 4 dates in history e The Field History report lists values over a range of dates for the field you select The last two reports are available only if the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to YES in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 CHAPTER 10 EIS Re
23. Screen or Edit default control character or escape sequence key label and user label for each command appear in the list To change a key definition select the command for the definition you want to edit and press Enter An asterisk appears next to the key you are changing To change the key assigned to the command press the key you want to use The cursor moves to the User Label field and the label of the key you pressed appears You cannot reassign a key if that key is already in use for another command For example if you want to assign the Delete command to the F6 key you first need to change the key assigned to the Maintenance command then assign F6 to the Delete command To change the key s description enter the user label you want to appear when you are prompted for a command response in the User Label field and press Enter Press Enter if you do not want to change the default entry To change the definition for another key use the arrow keys to select the command you want to change and press Enter then repeat steps 6 and 7 Press W to write your changes to the keyboard definition file and return to the main menu To start over press F5 To close the screen without saving press F7 and enter N if the system prompts you to write changes Resource Manager Purge User Activity o M Use the Purge User Activity function to purge user activity from the OSAS system 1 Resource Manager Select Purge User Activity
24. Terminal TODO OVR Resource Manager 5 3 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Tax Classes Select a command Press Enter to edit the description for the selected You cannot delete a tax class however you can change its description e Press A to add a tax class and description You can have up to 99 tax classes e Press G to move to a specific tax class This command is available only if there is more than one page of tax classes Press F7 when you finish to save your changes and return to the main menu 5 4 Resource Manager Tax Locations o M Use the Tax Locations function to set up and maintain the authorities and percentages for which you accumulate sales and purchase tax for each tax class Set up tax classes before you set up tax locations To work with tax locations select Tax Locations from the Application Setup menu The Tax Locations screen appears EN Tax Locations X In E o Es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help x5 a mu ejee o Tax Location MNMPLS 4 Name Tax Level 2 Tax ID Authority MN Tax on Freigh Tax Liability Acct 4 Tax Refundable Acct 4 Class Description Sales Tax Purch Tax Tax Collected Tax Paid Consumer Goods 0 500 0 500 3 p Resale Sales 0 000 0 000 00 00 a 102 Exempt Sales 0 000 0 000 00 00 a 03 Ind Agr Prod 0 000 0 000 00 00 104 Interstate Comm 0 000 0 000 00 00 05 Motor Vehicles 0
25. Terminal Tooo ovR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 11 AP Analysis o M The Accounts Payable Analysis dashboard provides aging historical and other key information from Accounts Payable and Purchase Order Select AP Analysis from the Executive Information Summary menu The Accounts Payable Analysis dashboard appears and lists aging and purchase amounts for analysis TEN Accounts Payable Analysis Sle ea Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help 2 xs wa mn e oeo OX Abenden Aging Analysis Purchase History Period to Date Yearto Date Current Due Invoices 109 694 60 2 756 597 96 Balance 31 60 190 645 07 Freight 00 00 61 90 300 071 16 Tax 6 581 70 165 395 91 91 120 00 Misc 00 00 121 71 406 90 u 00 2 921 993 87 Total Due 934 801 53 Payment History Amt on Hold 374 094 87 Period to Date Year to Date Amt on Tmp Hold 00 Prepaids 00 165 779 70 Amt Released 560 706 66 Disc 00 802 82 Checks 00 2 565 662 85 Total Vendors 16 Disc 00 5 035 10 Inv on Hold 7 Inv on Tmp Hold 0 Total 00 2 405 721 07 Inv Released 16 Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands
26. calculated result to the active field in the OSAS program Use the calculator exactly as you would use the Windows calculator When you have the desired solution in the entry field click Return Total to send the result to the active field of the OSAS program you are currently using Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Inventory Price Calculator Use the Inventory Price Calculator to calculate prices for specific customers without entering an order or invoice Follow these steps to use the calculator 1 Select Inventory Price Calculator from the Other Commands menu The Price Calculator screen appears El Price Calculator Ele es Commands Edit Modes Other InventoryLookups Help a Price Calculator Location ID MNODO1 a tem ID 100 a Sale Units PKG s Price ID BUILD a Customer ID a Customer Level a Sale Date 12 28 2007 Fs Sale Quantity 1 0000 Quantity Information Pricing Information On Hand 19 0000 Calc Unit Price 0000 Committed Qty 1 0000 Calc Ext Price 00 In Use Qty 1 0000 Quantity Breaks Available Qty 17 0000 Quantity Unit Price On Order Qty 6 0000 Base 1 0000 0000 1 2 3 4 5 Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 ovr Inquiry 2 Enter values in the fields as prompted to calculate prices The Price ID Customer ID and Cust Level fields are optional 3 Press Page Down to continue OSAS performs the calculations and lists quantity cost pricing and price break information C
27. payments and other summarized information for the current period quarter and year and last year as well as historical credit information bbb If you want to work with the customer s sales and payment history check the box or enter Y if not uncheck the box or enter N i H 44 4 Line of Enter edit Append Header Copy from Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR Inquiry 2 Enter the Application ID and Help Key for which you want to view or edit text 7 19 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Help Screens 7 20 3 The Copy From field appears if you enter a new help key Enter the help key from which you want to copy help text or leave the field blank to continue Enter or edit the name of the field or the title of the help screen in the Field ID field Use brackets to make the text you enter appear in bold If you leave the field blank the Copy From screen appears Enter a similar field ID to copy help text to this help ID If you choose a field ID that appears in more than one program you must select the specific program from which you want to copy When you press Enter the field ID and the help text appear The help text for the field you selected appears in the scrolling region Use the commands to edit this text e Press Enter to edit the selected line When the Help Text screen appears edit the text as necessary an
28. 0 7 format with the specified number of decimal places Z format to display totals of zero when applicable Enter the field in the file Enter the starting position of the data within the field or press Enter to accept the starting position that appears Enter the length of the field Enter the row column where you want the field to be positioned Enter the name of the cross reference file whose data you want to access If the file is company specific put lowercase XXx after the name of the file Enter the position of the field in the record of the specified file For alphanumeric fields enter the first character position in the field that you want to appear Otherwise leave this field blank 7 31 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities 7 32 Global Inquiry Definitions Field Description Length For alphanumeric fields enter the length of the data For numeric fields enter the number of digits to the left of the decimal place that you want to appear For other field types leave this field blank Flds Enter the number of fields in the cross reference file Table Key If the field refers to a table for the appropriate value enter the coordinate of the record in the table you want to access if it does not leave it blank Test For a self join field enter an expression for the value needed to access the correct key For self join fields the number is always 1 For a cross reference by table field enter the row c
29. 3 22 1 Enter the Current Fiscal Year and the number of periods per year in the header section then use the Proceed OK command 2 Enter the Fiscal Year you want to work with If you use 13 periods you need to define the beginning and ending dates for periods 12 and 13 In this situation most people define period 13 as a single day for example you might define period 12 as 12 01 through 12 30 and period 13 as 12 31 to 12 31 for closing entries Typically period 13 is used to make closing entries for the fiscal year but you can define how your accounting department handles this period You can leave dates out of the Period Conversion table if necessary but you cannot overlap dates Use these commands to work with the accounting periods Press Enter to edit the beginning and ending dates for a highlighted period and to lock data entry for applications during that period See Accounting Periods dialog box on page 3 23 e Press A to automatically fill the begin and end dates for the fiscal year e Press W to write the changes and return to the header section e Press F to change the fiscal year e Press C to switch to the current fiscal year Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes or use the Exit F7 command to return to the main menu Accounting Periods Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Accounting Periods dialog box The Accounting Periods dialog box appears when you press Enter to edit a highlighted period
30. 3 47 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup File Lists Tables List The Tables List shows the tables that are in any application and the information they contain 12 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 2 3 22 PM Tables List Accounts Payable Table ID APPDH Description Fiscal Year Period Table No of Columns 3 Column Length 12 Type N PERIOD FISCAL YEAR PERIODS YEAR 12 00 2007 00 12 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 End of Report 3 48 E Mail Queue oo ooo M The E Mail Queue function allows you to see the emails pending for delivery in the e mail queue and to review and approve them before sending Note To use this function to approve emails for delivery you must set the Send E Mails Immediately option to No in Resource Manager Options and Interfaces To review the email queue select Email Queue from the Company Setup menu The E mail Queue screen appears El E Mail Queue Tele les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xe aelan ee Ok User ID 4 All Users E Mail Queue App To Subject user Send so sally builderssupply com AR Analysis Report Iscottm 7 B e jeff builderssupply com Check History Report scottm 2 SO ann builderssuply com Tax Audit Report scottm E s El
31. 44 Sample Linux UNIX Config bbx File stblen 10240 aliases 18 fcbs 100 cibs 100 handles 100 alias LP slp dhp4si s 2 gt dev null spooled printer CR SP 12 SPCOLS 80 CP 0F CPCOLS 132 alias P1 dev lpO shared direct printer CR SP 12 SPCOLS 80 CP 0F CPCOLS 132 LOCK tmp LOCKP1 alias T1 dev ttyl linux alias T2 dev tty2 ansico alias T3 dev tty3 term alias T4 dev tty4 vt100 if T1 alias PF FILE Print File FILE rem no graphics device PRINT 1 endif if T3 alias P2 dev ttyp0 local printer ttypo CR SP 12 SPCOLS 80 CP 0F CPCOLS 132 SLON 1B5B3569 SLOFF 1B5B3469 endif alias NO tcp 1 Shared direct and spooled printers appear before terminal definitions and slave or local printers are listed after the terminals are defined In this sample the alias LP printer definition is created using a d destination switch followed by the UNIX device name for the printer The Ipstat t command lists all of the UNIX and physical device names available for your printer Then redirect your BBx output to UNIX for example LP gt Ip dhp4si s 2 gt dev null spooled printer The s switch suppresses system messages on the terminal while 2 gt suppresses system messages on the console and then redirects those system messages to the device dev null Resource Manager Devices Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 To create a shared direct printer use a
32. 940 87 00 1 940 87 Week Ending 12 17 2003 599 874 17 128 706 10 471 168 07 Week Ending 12 24 2003 44 680 74 00 44 680 74 Week Ending 12 31 2003 11 155 84 13 939 00 2 783 16 Futures 165 529 78 00 165 529 78 Projected Ending Cash Balance 534 503 92 Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 7 Daily Statistics o M The Daily Statistics dashboard provides current data on sales purchases cash receipts and checks produced Select Daily Statistics from the Executive Information Summary menu The Daily Statistics dashboard appears and lists amounts resulting from today s transactions for Sales Order and Purchase Order Bl Daily Statistics Sos Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help 2xu na mu 20e 00 0k Abendon Sales Order Status Purchase Order Status New New 91 814 96 Picked 91 814 96 Printed 91 814 96 Shipped 91 814 96 Received 91 814 96 Backorders 91 814 96 Returns 91 814 96 Returns 91 814 96 Debit Memos 91 814 96 Total 91 814 96 Total 91 814 96 Quotes 91 814 96 Goods Revd Invoiced Today 91 814 96 Today 91 814 96 Invoiced PTD 91 314 96 Invoices Received Cash Receipts Today 91 814 96 Cash 91 81496 PTD 91 814 96 Checks 91 814 96 Credit Cards 91 814 96 Checks Written
33. 99 999 Inv on Tmp Hold 99 999 Total 999 999 999 999 999 999 Inv Released 99 999 oLDVO J10U UN HPO 00 JOoU 4 amp 0 N H N Fields Used Field ID Description Display Mask APAGE CU AP Aged Open Invoices Current Due 999 999 999 00 APHINPST AP Detail History Invoice Subtotal 999 999 999 00 APHINYST AP Detail History Invoice Subtotal 999 999 999 00 Resource Manager 12 3 Field Definitions List o M Use the Field Definitions List function to produce a list of fields that have been defined You can use the summary option to simply list each field ID and description or you can print the list in full detail to view the formula function and setup that each field uses Sample List 05 23 2007 3 46 PM Field ID APAGE 12 F1 5 Formula Function 1 APAGED Sub Type 1 222422222242 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Field ID Formula F1 2 Function 1 APAGED Sub Type 1 2 3 4 APAGE 30 Builders Supply Field Definition List AP Aged Open Invoices 121 Description AP Open Invoice File Aged Totals Description Current Due Balance 31 60 Balance 61 90 Balance 91 120 Balance Over 120 Total Due nvoice Count Vendor Count Active Vendor Count Past Due Vendor Count AP Aged Open Invoices 31 60 Description AP Open Invoice File Aged Totals Description Current Due Balance 31 60 Balance 61 90 Balance 91 120 Resource Manager Page Display Mask 999 999 999
34. Alternate Description Esc Opens a menu listing available commands F1 Esc H In text mode this command opens the help description for the selected application function You must be within an application menu to access this command In graphical mode this command opens a screen providing help on commonly used function keys and keyboard navigation F2 Esc W Toggles between the Favorites and main menus Shift F2 Esc l Opens a screen listing information about the applications you have installed F3 Esc D Switches between companies F4 Esc O Opens the User Functions menu containing functions to modify the workstation settings In text mode press this key or key combination twice to open the Other Commands menu See page A 6 for more information FS Esc X Switches between live and sample data Shift F5 Esc G Toggles between graphical MDI and text main menus F6 Esc F Opens the Workstation Date screen to change the workstation date Shift F6 Esc K Toggles between graphical and text function screens F7 Esc M Exits from OSAS F8 Esc L In text mode this command outputs the current screen to a printer print preview window or file F9 Esc U Changes to a different fiscal year when you are inside the General Ledger or Payroll menus Resource Manager B 3 APPENDIX B OSAS Commands Main Menu Commands Key Alternate Description F10 Ctrl Z On the main menu this command adds the selected application or function to the Fa
35. BBx device in the form of Pxxx then the system device of dev Ipx and the physical device name as in the alias P1 line in the sample The lock parameter prevents print jobs from printing at the same time OSAS allows only one print job to print to a shared printer at a time In creating a local or slave printer for a terminal the BBx name must be unique for each printer if it is outside an if endif loop otherwise it may be the same In UNIX Linux there are two ways to configure terminals tell the system everything you know about the terminal or supply a token and ask the operating system to supply terminal specific information In alias T2 OSAS is told the system devices are defined as ansico so that the software can make the best use of its capabilities colors or graphics for example In alias T3 OSAS is told the system devices are defined as term so that the software uses the terminal as defined by the operating system and the capabilities defined for it in the OSAS termcap file If the terminal definition is not in the termcap file you must edit it Follow the instructions in the BBx documentation that is included with Resource Manager Like ansico alias T1 and T4 are defined by particular system device names that allow OSAS to make the best use of terminal capabilities associated with those kinds of terminals 2 45 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Sample Novell Config bbx File stblen 10240 alia
36. Command 4 Y Recalc EIS Dashboard Recalc Command B v Setup EIS Dashboard Setup Command v View EIS Dashboard View Command v Hist EIS Dashboard History Command v Field EIS Dashboard Field Command Y Load Els Dashboard Load Command v Update EIS Dashboard Update Command APAGE 12 AP Aged Open Invoices 121 APAGE_30 AP Aged Open Invoices 31 60 4 APAGE_60 laP Aged Open Invoices 61 90 4 APAGE 90 IAP Aged Open Invoices 91 120 Lx 1 APAGE AV AP Aged Open Invoices Active Vendor Count s 7 APAGE CO AP Aged Open Invoices Vendor Count B Enter toggle All None l Go to Company H 10 12 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 Selectthe role that you want to assign to EIS commands and fields 3 The EIS commands and field names appear in the scrolling region Use the commands to grant or deny access to these commands and fields Press Enter to grant or deny access to the selected command or field for the role you specified e Press A to grant access to all commands and fields for the role e Press N to deny access to all commands and fields for the role e Press Gto go to a specific command or field in the list 4 Press F7 when you finish to save your changes and return to the menu Resource Manager EIS Roles EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Example How fields appear with roles In the example below we have denied access to the P
37. Description Setup types CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal TODO OVR 2 Enter the Function ID to add or edit 3 If you enter a new function ID the Copy From field appears Enter the function from which to copy information If you enter a new function ID without first creating the function program the WARNING Function program XXXX FNC not found message appears Defining the function here is not enough to enable it to work within OSAS you must also create the function program that processes data OSAS searches for function programs based on the ID you enter in step 2 but you can define the function here first and then create the program and save it with the appropriate ID in the progRM directory later 4 Enter or edit the function s Description 9 18 Resource Manager Function Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 5 The type of data numeric or alphanumeric returned by the function and its description appears in the scrolling region Use the commands to work with these returned value types Press Enter to edit the selected line The Edit Functions screen appears See Adding or Editing Returned Value Types for more information e Press Ato add a new line The Append Functions screen appears See Adding or Editing Returned Value Types for more information e Press Dto return to the Description field e Press S to work with the setup data types the function can use The Append Setup Types s
38. Files Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Reader AcroRd32 exe Web Browser C Program Files Internet Explorer IEXPLORE EXE m E Mail Client C Program Files Outlook Express msimn exe E Mail Defaults E Mail From info osas com Company 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Enter the full path and application extension when applicable for each directory listed then enter your e mail address in the E Mail From field Refer to the field definitions for more information on a specific field il Note If you use OSAS on BBj in an enterprise environment keep in mind that the Browse button lists directories and their contents on the application server not on a client workstation If you are entering default directory paths for a client workstation you need to enter the full paths to the exe files on the client for these applications manually Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the User Setup menu 4 12 Resource Manager Preferences User Setup CHAPTER 4 Field Definitions Field Name Description Print File Sort File Acroread Path Web Browser Resource Manager Enter the subdirectory where you want the reports you print to a file to be stored This directory does not necessarily need to be inside the OSAS directory system Enter the subdirectory where you want sort files created by OSAS to be stored This directory can be outside the OSAS directory system If you want to access the
39. ID Bank Accounts Company Setup CHAPTER 3 4 Enter the date of the last statement you received for the bank account in the Last Statement Date box The last statement date is updated each time you use the Cleared Transactions function for the bank account ID 5 Enter the GL period of the last statement you received for the bank account in the Last Statement Period box 6 Enter or select the Reconciliation File Format to use with this bank Credit Card Type Account Bank account IDs may be flagged as Credit Card type accounts which restricts the types of transactions that can be made in Bank Reconciliation Only adjustment transactions will be permitted for credit card bank accounts Regular bank accounts carry an asset GL account number the balance of which is used to reconcile against bank statements Credit card bank accounts carry a vendor ID instead this vendor ID in turn carries a liability GL account number the balance of which is used to reconcile against credit card statements Vendors associated with credit cards should be used only for the purpose of entering transactions for payments on the credit card and for cutting checks against those transactions Credit Card Charges In AP charges occur when AP invoices are paid using a credit card The charges are treated in all respects in BR as check disbursements are today They can be stopped or voided and are cleared during the reconciliation process in BR Instea
40. ID amount of taxable and nontaxable sales tax collected for each location and GL account that sales taxes are posted to from other applications The User Comments file contains the comments you enter in the User Comments function The User ID stores user ID descriptions for use by the User Comments function Resource Manager File Descriptions APPENDIX C SUGGEST The Suggestions file stores the suggestions you enter through the Product Suggestions function page A 31 Suggestions include product enhancements that you would like to see Resource Manager C 9 APPENDIX D Resource Manager Data File Conversion If you are upgrading OSAS from an older version you must install the current Resource Manager version on a different path from the one in which any older versions were installed You must then convert data files from the old path to the new path See chapter 3 for RM installation instructions Before you convert an application s files verify the version number from which you are converting If you are upgrading to OSAS version 7 0 you can convert data from version 3 2 3 3 4 0x 4 1x 4 5x 4 6 5 0x 5 1x 5 2 or 6 x If you want to convert from a version earlier than 3 2 contact a client support representative The Data File Conversion function page 3 27 cannot convert the information from those versions When you are ready to convert files use the Data File Conversion function on the Company Setup menu Be
41. ID defaults e Set the user defined unit of weight and masks for numeric values e Change the company s web site or e mail addresses The information you enter in this function is stored in the OSCOMP file The numeric masks you set up in this function are used in most of the OSAS applications By entering the number of decimals you want for each mask type you define the way they appear in other applications Note however that some applications have fields that override the numeric masks you assign in this function 3 3 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Company Information To enter or edit company information select Company Information from the Company Setup menu The Company Information screen appears n Company Information fo es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2XxE Ba ma 0 0909 ok Abandon Company ID H 4 Name Builders Supply Address 1 4301 Dean Lakes Blvd Address 2 J City Shakopee ul der S State MN a Zip 55379 upp y Country us faj U S A Site 999999 Phone 952 496 2465 Fax 952 496 2495 Logo File SAMPLOGO GIF la E mail Address Webmaster builders_supply com Web Site www builders_supply com Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Enter the Company ID IDs can be three characters long and can include both letters and numbers You can use the Delete F3 command to delete a company from the system only if there are no data files for it The remaining fi
42. Inquiry Window Definitions on page 7 23 for more about applying inquiry translations once you have created them using this function Follow these steps to set up an inquiry code translations 1 Select Inquiry Translation from the System File Utilities menu The Inquiry Translation screen appears EN inquiry Translation fla Es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt aalmal e OK Application ID SO a Translation ID SOTHTrans 4 Description SOTH Translation Maximum Length 10 Data File Value Translated Value El 2 Picked R 3 Verified 4 Returned s 5 Invoiced 6 Backorder 8 Quote Entry 001 of 007 Enter edit Append Goto New ID Preparing scratch 7 61 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Inquiry Translation 7 62 Select the Application ID for which you would like to make an inquiry code translation definition Enter or choose the Translation ID you want to work with Enter or edit the Description for the inquiry code translation Enter or edit the Maximum Length for the translated values For new definitions the Edit Append dialog box will open See Edit Append Dialog Box on page 7 63 for more The grid area in the bottom half of the screen lists the data file values in the Data File Value column and the values to which you want to translate the corresponding value in the Translated Value column This grid is
43. Messages 0 00 00 eee 7 47 Purge Post Codes 00 0000 E 7 49 File Lists icut oh es ahs SE RESET 7 51 Inquiry Translation 0000 7 61 mary Chapter 8 Executive Information Summary 8 1 Working with Dashboards 8 3 EIS Dashboard Display 004 8 9 Chapter 9 EIS File Maintenance 9 1 EIS Field Definitions 0 00000 9 3 Setup Definitions 0 0005 9 11 Function Definitions 00 9 17 EIS Roles sc e eos ota Seva ales 9 25 Dashboard Editor 00 0000 0 0005 9 29 Chapter 10 EIS Reports 10 1 Dashboard Report eese 10 5 Dashboard History Report 10 7 Field History Report 00 10 9 Chapter 11 EIS Periodic Maintenance 11 1 Global Dashboard Update o oo oooooo o 11 3 Purge Dashboard History ooooooooooo o o 11 5 Chapter 12 EIS Master File Lists 12 1 Screen Definitions LiSt ooooo 12 3 CONTENTS vi Field Definitions LiSt oooooooo 12 5 Functions List oooooooooooo 12 7 Setup Definitions List ooooooooooooo 12 9 Chapter 13 Executive Information Summary 13 1 Working with Dashboards 13 3 Company Summary 004 13 5 Cash Requirements Forecast 13 7 Daily Statistics llle 13 9 AR Analys
44. Report 7 56 Purge E Mail History 2 73 User Login Activity 4 3 4 4 Resource Manager data files 1 7 C 1 C 9 directories 2 51 installing 1 8 list of data files C 1 C 9 menus 1 5 options and interfaces 3 33 overview 1 5 setting up 1 8 return values functions 9 17 9 19 right click menu See shortcut menu 1 21 RMRHxxx 14 7 RMSET program 2 48 Roles EIS 9 25 9 27 overview 2 19 setting up 2 20 S sales tax accumulated totals 5 7 calculating tax on tax 5 12 clearing totals 5 15 percentages 5 8 periodic processing 5 7 Sales Tax Report 5 13 tax authorities 5 6 Tax Classes 5 3 Tax Groups 5 9 tax levels 5 6 Tax Locations 5 5 tax on tax 5 9 Sales Tax Report 5 13 5 14 sample data 2 6 2 51 IX 9 INDEX directory 2 51 screens changing text screen colors 4 21 EIS definitions list 12 3 graphical function 1 18 graphical main menu 1 16 help 7 19 MDI menu 1 17 navigating graphical 1 18 navigating text function 1 26 text function 1 26 text main menu 1 24 setting up the Bank Reconciliation Balance system 3 14 Setup data types 9 20 in EIS field definitions 9 5 list 12 9 overview 9 11 ranges 9 11 entering 9 15 using multiple 9 15 setup checklist 1 8 Shift F2 menu A 35 shortcut properties 1 11 Windows parameters 1 11 shortcut menu 1 21 starting e mail from OSAS 4 7 OSAS in other operating systems 1 11 in Windows 1 11 web browser from OSAS 4 7 State Codes 7 3
45. Reporting Clear Sales Tax Follow these steps to clear sales tax 1 Select Clear Sales Tax from the Application Setup menu The Clear Sales Tax screen appears EN Clear Sales Tax tela Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xtlmalmal lee ok Abandon Have You Printed the Sales Tax Report Pick Tax Authority From Thru Tax Location From CA a Thu mHous a Company 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 ovn 2 If you have printed the Sales Tax Report select the check box or enter Y in text mode If you have not exit the function and do so before continuing Inquiry 3 Enter the range of tax authorities or tax locations for which to clear sales tax 4 Use the Proceed OK command to begin processing OSAS returns you to the main menu after clearing the sales tax file 5 16 Resource Manager File Lists Tax Groups List The Tax Groups List shows the tax groups that are on your system 11 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 4 48 PM Tax Groups List Tax Reporting Tax on Tax on Levels Tax on Levels Tax on Levels Group Description Method Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 3 1 2 Level 4 1 2 3 Level 5 1 2 3 4 CA California Combined CA MD Maryland Combined MD MN Minnesota Combined MN MNMPLS Minneapolis MN Combined MN MNMPLS NO TX Texas Combined TX TXHOUS Houston TX Combined TX TXHOUS NO End of report Tax Locations List The Tax Locations List shows the tax locations and tax authorities that
46. Reps oe ea Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help gt xu na mu e 00 ok _ Abandon Name YTD Sales 1 Garry P Deacon 1 912 522 91 2 Donna M Mendelsohn 821 577 40 3 James A Hovland 696 228 41 4 Patrick R Thomassen 323 809 71 5 00 6 00 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 ovR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 19 Top 10 Vendors EMEN M The Top 10 Vendors dashboard provided a list of the top 10 vendors ranked by year to date purchases Select Top 10 Vendors from the Executive Information Summary menu The Top 10 Vendors dashboard appears and lists the vendors from which you purchase most often EN Top 10 Vendors Elia Commands Edit Modes Other ElS Functions Help 2xelae mal e ee OK Abandon Vendor Name Purchases YTD 1 810 964 90 2 ELLIS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 796 451 56 3 THOMPSON HEATING _ 707 810 24 4 CLEVELAND INTERIORS INC 199 908 74 5 BORIS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 161 903 87 6 TIMBERLAND WINDOWS INC 77 434 24 7 JOHNSON DOOR COMPANY INC 52 539 09 8 PLASTICS METAL FABRICATORS 18 208 15 9 MILLWORK LUMBER _CABINETS 11 203 14 10 HENNEPIN MUNICIPAL UTILITIES 5 830 00 CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal tooo ovn Use the commands to refresh the
47. Short El Lot Serial File Short v Lx Open Order Header File Shot M E Open Order Detail File Short g Restart File Short m Line No 000001 of 000001 Begin code change Importfield list Header FieldID Years Switch to tag Enter edit Append Clear values Go to Company H 08 11 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 6 11 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities Change Fields 6 12 The screen contains three sections In the top Header section select the field ID you want to change values for and whether to print the log In the lower left Values section build a list of the values you want to change by specifying the old and new values In the lower right File Description section select the files in which you want to change the selected field s value from the list Follow these steps to change fields from one value to another 1 In the Header section enter the Field ID you want to change You can change only Resource Manager fields from the Resource Manager menu To change IDs and codes from other applications run the Change Fields function in the respective application 2 Select the Print Log check box or enter Y in text mode to print a list of the files that are changed 3 Use the Proceed OK command to switch to the Values section to enter the field values to change 4 To edit or add original new values in the Values section press Enter to edit the current line or press A to add a new va
48. To Change General Information Summary Fields Data Columns Global Inquiry Links Is S S E CompanyH 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 OVR 7 27 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Global Inquiry Definitions Select the Global Inquiry Window ID that you want to view or edit To create a new global inquiry window enter a new ID The remaining fields on this screen are available only after you enter the window ID If you entered a new ID the Copy From field appears Enter the global inquiry window from which you want to copy information The title for the window you selected appears Enter or edit this title if necessary Select the type of information you want to view or edit using the check boxes or Yes No selection fields in text mode When you use the Proceed OK command to continue the screens you selected appear General Information Screen 7 28 The Global Inquiry Definition General Information screen lists the Report Writer topic number channel index number of fields per record key number and key length the window uses It also lists the window ID title description and the file from which the global inquiry screen pulls information BS Global Inquiry Definitions jala Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmal 7 l ee OK _ Abandon Page 1 of 4 General Information Window ID APHISCHK Title Check History File Name APHIx File 8 Flds 18 Key 8 Key Len 23 Record Selection Inclusion Mask E
49. Users 13 14 15 16 Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 When you add a new user the Do you want your config bbx modified automatically message appears after you complete entering information on the Add User ID screen Click Yes or enter Y to add the new terminal information to the config bbx configuration file click No or enter N if you want to manually add this information to the file If you add new terminals you must add these terminal IDs to the config bbx file for OSAS to function correctly To edit an existing user record select the record to edit and press Enter Other than the title this screen is identical to the Append User screen When the Edit User screen appears edit the user information as needed Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Users screen When you finish entering values for the user you will be asked whether you want to add a terminal device to CONFIG BBX If you choose Yes the Devices Terminals screen opens See Devices Terminals Screen on page 2 27 for more information Close the screen to save your changes and return to the menu 2 17 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Users Append User Role dialog box EN Append User Role leales Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX te bea ma 209 00 ok Abandon Company ID H la Role ID Order Entry 3 Description Order Entry Inquiry 1 Select
50. Views Tools Favorites Other User Help 52 E E 5 Bi Select a menu to access the command you need For more detailed information on these menus refer to OSAS Menus on page A 1 e The File menu lets you toggle between live and sample data change the workstation date or exit from OSAS e The Views menu lets you toggle between graphical and text function screens and scale graphical screens to enlarge them if needed e The Tools menu opens the OSAS calculator e The Favorites menu toggles between the Favorites and main menu The Favorites menu is a menu you can customize to contain the functions you use most often See Favorites Menu on page A 15 for more information The Other menu gives you access to additional OSAS commands not directly related to the function you re using See Other Commands Menu on page A 17 for more information Resource Manager 1 19 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS Function Drop down Menus 1 20 e The User menu gives you shortcut access to several setup functions found in the User Setup menu of Resource Manager including Preferences Favorites File Types Colors and Keyboard e The Help menu gives you information about function keys and keyboard navigation or copyright information about the OSAS applications you have installed The menu bar for function screens is shown below Not all menus appear on every function screen some menus appear only when appropriate for
51. When the Info flag appears press Shift F2 to access the Information menu to view additional information about a customer vendor item job bill of material or employee See Information Menu on page A 35 e When the Maint flag appears press F6 to open the appropriate File Maintenance function to edit a master file record or enter a new one on the fly When you finish press F7 to return to the task you were working on e When the Inquiry flag appears press F2 to use the Inquiry command to look up information and select valid entries for the field you are in e The Verify flag reminds you that verification is turned on When verification is on you must verify the command when you press Page Down or use the Proceed OK command Press Ctrl V to toggle verification on and off Resource Manager 1 27 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS 1 28 Command Bar The command bar appears at the bottom of function screens and gives you access to commands that allow you to add or edit information change selected line settings or select output devices Press the highlighted key to use a command The commands that are available depend upon the function you are using and are analogous to the command buttons available on graphical screens Consult your application guides for information on available function commands Messages Messages appear at the bottom of the screen when a command is unavailable or when OSAS needs informatio
52. Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window File Lists Country Codes List 05 22 2007 2 19 PM Country Name ANTIGUA ANGUILLA NL ANTILLES ANGOLA ARGENTINA AUSTRIA AUSTRALIA ARUBA BARBADOS BANGLADESH BELGIUM BURKINO FASO BULGARIA BAHRAIN BURUNDI BENIN BERMUDA BOLIVIA BRAZIL BAHAMAS BOTSWANA BELIZE CANADA CENT AFR REP Builders Supply Country Codes List By Country Code System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 The Country Codes List shows the country codes that are on your system and their associated names 7 57 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities File Lists Field Definitions List Use the Field Definitions List to view field ID codes and their definitions The field codes control how fields are changed when you use the Change Fields function 05 22 2007 Builders Supply 2 21 PM Field List Field ID Description Master File File Description File Name File Description Field Number Field Start Field Length AP Batch ID AP Batch Control File AP Transaction Control File 3 AP Lot Serialized File Transaction Detail File Transaction Headers IN Detail History Control File Control Record Lot Serial Invoiced File Lot Serial Received File Lot Serial File Open Order Header File Open Order Detail File Restart FIle Goods Received File Invoiced Received Fi Invoice Totals File o 0000000000000 OO 7 58 File Lists Error Log
53. Workstation ID or press W To return to the Default Start field click Header or press H To jump to a specific file type in the list click Goto or press G This command is available only when there is more than one screen of file types 4 19 CHAPTER 4 User Setup File Types 12 When you finish adding or editing file type entries use the Exit F7 command to return to the main menu 4 20 Resource Manager Colors o M Use the Colors function on the User Setup menu to customize the colors at specific terminals for each type of text screen and text window in OSAS The changes you make are stored in the OSCL file in the sysfil directory Your monitor type determines the color combinations that are available This function is not available if you use the graphical mode for function screens The colors you choose affect only the character based OSAS screens The colors used in graphical mode are based on the default Windows color scheme you use You need to modify your Windows color scheme through the Windows Control Panel if you want to change the properties of OSAS graphical screens Follow these steps to change the colors used on text screens 1 Select Colors from the User Setup menu The Colors screen appears Settings Edit Print Help Group 1 Workstation T000 1111 Copy From 2222 2222 r Functions 3333 3333 4444 4444 Color Group 1 5555 5555 Text 2 6666 6666 Border 2 777 77731 Title 5
54. Xref INLD LAST PUR DATE Last Purch Date TEMP DESCRIPTION Description INLD LAST PUR RIN Last Purch Rtn Data Fields Name Formula Strt Len t 001 006 SHORT NAME 001 021 INVOICE NO 007 008 INVOICE DATE TEMP QTY PURCH HHHHHIO 0 006 TEMP EXT PRICE HHHHHHIO 00 007 7 55 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Global Inquiry Audit Report 7 56 10 54 AM 05 22 2007 Global Inquiry Window Audit Report File Lists The Global Inquiry Window Audit Report produces a list of window link inconsistencies associated with the Global Inquiry Window definitions Builders Supply Window ID Link No Link ID Anomaly APHIS ARCUOAR ARCU3HS ARHI1A ARHI7 ARINONEW ARSRO LCOMP LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN LJRN JOBSOM G G G G G G G G G G G G G G P1 P2 P3 PA P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 PA PB PC PD JOHI1LAB JOHI1MAT JOHI1M S JOHI10VH End of Report Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Unreferenced Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Window
55. accessible only after you enter the information in the top half of the screen Use these commands to work with the values listed in the grid area Press Enter to edit the selected file line See Edit Append Dialog Box on page 7 63 for more information e Press A to add a new file that includes the field to the end of the list See Edit Append Dialog Box on page 7 63 for more information e Press Gto go to a specific line in the list This command is available only when there is more than one screen of entries e Press N to save the inquiry translation information and return to the Application ID field to enter or edit another inquiry translation e Press F to return to the Field ID field at the top of the screen e Press Sto sort the file list in alphabetical order This command is useful if you have added new files to the end of the list Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the menu Inquiry Translation System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Edit Append Dialog Box To add or edit a data file value and its corresponding translated value for an inquiry code translation press Enter or A in the grid area on the Field Definitions screen The Edit or Append translation inquiry screen appears EN Edit Append Sie Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xe be mal 0 ok J Abandon Data File Value 3 Translated Value Verified 1 Enter the original file value
56. appears Enter the company from which you want to copy a role Use this field if you want to use the same role for multiple companies to avoid data entry errors Using the same code for multiple companies can reduce the number of codes users need to remember but also makes information for these companies more readily available 4 Enter a Description of the role 2 20 Resource Manager Roles Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 To assign access rights to an application s menu items for the role enter the Application and Menu ID then use the Proceed OK command to assign access rights to that menu s functions in the scrolling region To assign access rights to the main menu leave the Application field blank and enter MAIN in the Menu ID field Use these commands to grant access to the menus or functions listed in the scrolling region Press Enter to toggle access on and off to the selected item e Press A to grant access to all the listed items e Press N to deny access to all the listed items e Press W to save your changes When the confirmation message appears select Yes to save your changes to the OSCODE file or select No to exit to the main menu If you select Yes you are returned to the Application field for the role you defined in steps 2 and 4 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the other applications and functions to which you want to grant or deny access for this role To enter or
57. application you can automatically launch your web browser or e mail software if you entered paths to these applications in the Preferences function Launch these applications using one of these methods e On graphical screens select the command from the right click menu e On graphical screens select the command from the Commands menu e Press Shift F3 If you are on a Windows workstation and have not entered default paths to these applications OSAS uses the default Windows start command to launch the appropriate application See page 4 17 for more information on this command Note OSAS uses TCP IP protocol to send e mail messages When it experiences problems using TCP IP OSAS uses a backup executable on Windows machines or a Perl script on UNIX machines to send e mail If you have problems sending e mail through OSAS on UNIX machines download Perl at www Perl org Resource Manager 4 7 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Preferences Preferences Screen Workstation Preferences Select Preferences from the User Setup menu The first Preferences screen appears ES Preferences 2 o Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help xua e ma 272 09 0900 oK Abandon Workstation T000 a Copy To N Toggle Defaults Graphical Defaults Bell Active gt Compressed Active z GUI Functions Active 3 Verify Exit Active Online Help Inactive Menu Style Graphical X Insert Inactive Banner Page Inactive Quick Inactive v Favor
58. between applications For example if you perform tasks in several applications such as using the Transactions and Cash Receipts function in Accounts Receivable GL Account function in General Ledger and Price and Availability and Item Inquiry functions in Inventory you can set up a Favorites menu rather than moving between each application The Favorites menu for the graphical main menu is illustrated below avorites Menu T000 GL Journal SO Daily Work SO Cash Receipts SO Copy Recurring Orders IN Price and Availability IN Item Locations To set up and use the Favorites menu do the following e To add a function to the menu select the function you want to add to the menu and press F10 or use the right click menu in graphical mode Press F2 to switch to the Favorites menu to confirm that your selection was added Toremove a function from the menu select the function on the Favorites menu that you want to remove and press F10 or use the right click menu Touse a function on the Favorites menu double click a function name or select the function name and press Enter A 15 Other Commands Menu o M The Other Commands F4 menu gives you access to powerful commands that help you use other OSAS functionality that might not be directly related to the function you are using Use these commands to execute an operating system command or a Pro 5 or BBj program view information about your applications or drill throu
59. can access five other windows via the command buttons one that displays accounts payable invoices one that displays invoice history one that displays paid invoices one that displays accounts payable transactions and one that displays miscellaneous vendor information Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Within Global Inquiry you can use the Other Commands menu to access the Global Inquiry menu again or you can use the Inquiry F2 command to look up and select an inquiry window you accessed previously The sequence number and description that are listed represent the windows that you have previously accessed with the Global Inquiry command For example when you select Global Inquiry from the Other Commands menu and then select Inventory window A appears When you use a command at the bottom of window A window B appears When you use a command at the bottom of window B window C appears In this example you continue to use window commands until you reach window G please note that windows are not really lettered like this they are lettered in this example to simplify the model If you then want to return to one of the previous six windows you could select Global Inquiry again but a simpler route would be to use the Inquiry F2 command where you would find six sequence numbers 001001 001002 001003 001004 001005 001006 Each number would appear with a description of a window 001001 would be paired with the description
60. can have up to three data directories Enter the additional directories in the Data 2 and Data 3 paths If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment see Using Data Server Pathing on page 2 56 for information on using data servers in data paths OSAS graphical screens are stored in data files called Binary Resource Control BRC for VPRO 5 and ASCII Resource Control ARC for BBj files The Graphics path contains the directory that houses these screens so that the OSAS graphical mode functions correctly The Report Writer and Utilities paths are automatically updated with the appropriate directory paths when you install the Report Writer and Software Development Utilities applications The CplLstDir path listed in the Other Paths section lists the directory in which the PRO5CPL or bbjcpl programs are located You use one of these programs depending on the language you use for maintenance merges The RebuildDir path listed in the Other Paths section lists the directory in which the mkrecover program is located You use this program to rebuild data files The Documents directory listed in the Other Paths section lists the local directory on the application server or desktop as in C osas Document in which the OSAS PDF user s manuals XLS productivity report files and document attachments either yours or the OSAS sample attachments are stored The directory listed here refers to the local directory on the ap
61. can open more than one function screen at a time and move or minimize each screen as needed Keep in mind however that you cannot open two functions that lock the same data file at the same time File Views Tools Other User Window Help O 49 v f E Sy Company H Builders Supply OSAS Date 12 29 2010 User ID scottm ns 7 Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Information Help Information Inquiry Daily Work xX5 5 amp mm ejoo 2 Inventory Transactions Location Transfer 6 india Type Item Loc ID Quantity Units Date Stat Wil Transfers Journal c TX0001 6 0000 PKG 2 a Post Transactions 15 0000CS 2 B oL Adiustments Journal Adjustment 250 IMN0001 a 32 Post GL Adjustments Adjustment 250 TX0001 32 0000 CS 12 14 2010 2 4 Reorder Processing Purchase 350 CA0001 20000EA 12 14 2010 4 Reports Adjustment 700100 IMN0002 170 0000EA 12 14 2010 2 Analysis Reports Productivity Rpts Inventory Productivity Rpts Lot Serial 4 Periodic Processing Physical Inventory File Maintenance Code Maintenance Master File Lists Master Codes List fe xi la Km Line No 000001 of 000005 C Reconciliation C1 BOMKitting Goto Adjustment Sale Purchase DD FA GL GN IN JO CJ Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR You can move around the MDI menu these ways e To v
62. department or network specialist for assistance Resource Manager Address Mapping MM Use the Address Mapping function to enter the URL and search variables of the mapping website you use After you set up information about the website here you can use the Address Mapping command when it is available on any OSAS screen that contains an address to view a map of that address generated by the mapping website OSAS uses these variables to pass the address information on the screen to the mapping website to search for and generate the map You must include these variables including the brackets after the appropriate search terms that you enter on the Address Mapping screen Examine the mapping website s URL to identify these search terms examples include amp strt1 8zipc1 amp country and the like After you ve set up the mapping websites you use enter the default Map Lookup ID to use for the company in the Company Information function see page 3 3 You cannot use the Address Mapping command without both setting up mapping website information and specifying the Map Lookup ID to use for the company m When you use the Address Mapping command to view an address map OSAS launches your web browser and directs it the URL you enter here replacing the variables with the address you re looking up Resource Manager 2 65 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Address Mapping 2 66 Follow these steps to set up a ma
63. e mail reports to others The E mail History file stores the addresses of the sender and recipient the date and time the subject and the application ID and menu title of e mail messages you send through OSAS Print the E Mail History Report page 2 71 to view the contents of this file and the Purge E Mail History function page 2 73 to clear it The Error file contains information about BASIC errors that occur during normal operation Print the Error Log page 7 59 to view these errors Resource Manager C 5 APPENDIX C File Descriptions OSFD OSFH OSFRM OSFT OSINFO xxx OSKY OSLG OSMB C 6 The Change Fields Detail file stores detail file information about the files and fields that need to be changed in the Change Fields function page 6 11 The Change Fields Header file contains header information for the Change Fields function page 6 11 The Application Forms Type file contains information about the types of forms used in OSAS applications including the number of copies and copy names The File Types file stores the file associations you set up in the File Types function page 4 17 OSAS uses these file associations to automatically open the appropriate application when you open a file attached to a master file record The System Directories file store information that is unique to the entire OSAS system on a certain operating system including e installation backup devices e main program direc
64. each entry unless you include a decimal as part of the entry e Press F10 to exit from the calculator and copy the total into the field the cursor is in on the screen from which you accessed the calculator Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Example Making a calculation with the text based calculator Follow the same procedure for each of the calculator s four math functions and For example to add 32 and 99 follow these steps 1 Enter the first number in this case 32 to load the new subtotal into the calculator The number appears in the Entry field as you enter it and is transferred to the tape when you press Enter 2 Press the or key to enter that mathematical operator For example ifyou press the calculator enters the number you entered 32 followed by the plus sign at the bottom of the tape The calculator will insert a decimal point and the following zeros if you are working with round numbers The subtraction operator works the same as those on adding machines Press a number and 3 Enter the second number 99 in our example and press Enter The calculator performs the calculation and prints the total 131 00 followed by two asterisks at the bottom of the tape 4 Ifyou want to start a new tape press F1 or C to clear the tape before you start another calculation To make a string of consecutive calculations using the running total from each previous operati
65. enter A the normal setting You can still toggle to the sample data path by pressing F5 on the main menu If you want use OSAS with sample data only enter I the demo setting If you want to confirm the Proceed OK command by issuing the command a second time enter A if not enter I 4 9 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Field Name Preferences Description Compressed Online Help Banner Page Favorites Alt Sorts GUI Functions Menu Style Although these options are available for any terminal OSAS uses them only when Clipboard accessed from graphical workstations Lock Windows Output Type Inquiry Location ID Bank ID 4 10 If you want to be able to select compressed screen printing in text mode enter A If you use graphical mode only never use compressed print for screen printing or if your workstation does not support it enter I If you want the function keys and the functions they represent to appear at the bottom of the screen in text mode enter A if not enter I If you want to print a banner page that shows the pick screen of each report enter A if not enter I The banner page is useful when printing multiple selections for the same report If you want to start OSAS using the Favorites menu enter A if you want to start OSAS using the main menu enter I Press F2 to toggle between the two menus If you want to begin in Sort mode when using an Inquiry window e
66. enter the line number to which to move the line to and press Enter The other lines move up to fill the vacant space Press C to copy a line to a selected blank line When the Copy Line prompt appears enter the line number you want to copy to the blank line and press Enter You cannot use this command on a line that already contains an entry Press S to swap the selected line with another then enter the line number to swap with this one and press Enter Press U to enter a letter of the alphabet before each line item making each one unique This command lets you move through the menu faster by entering the letter of the item you want to select from the menu Press T to return to the Title field to change the title of the menu Press W to save your changes When the verification message appears enter Y to save your changes or N if you do not want to save Editing a Menu Item To edit a menu item select the line to edit on the Menus screen and press Enter The Edit Menu screen appears TEN Edit Menu iaa Commands Edit Modes Other Help 7 ox te maa l e ee OK Abandon Line 01 Description Bills of Materials Kitting Short Description BOM Kitting Type 1 3 Path Program BKMN Parameter 7 13 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Menus Edit the menu item s Description if necessary This description can be the name of the menu function or an informational line If you use the MDI menu enter a Short Desc
67. field s position in that file This region is available only after you enter the field s information in the top half of the screen Use the commands to work with the files listed in the scrolling region Press Enter to edit the selected file line See Adding or Editing a File on page 7 44 for more information Press A to add a new file that includes the field to the end of the list See Adding or Editing a File on page 7 44 for more information Press G to go to a specific line in the list This command is available only when there is more than one screen of entries Press D to delete the entire field definition When the confirmation message appears select Yes to delete the definition or No to return to the Field Definitions screen without deleting Press F to return to the Field ID field at the top of the screen Press S to sort the file list in alphabetical order This command is useful if you have added new files to the end of the list 5 Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the menu 7 43 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Change Field Definitions Adding or Editing a File 7 44 To add a file that includes the selected field ID to a field definition press A in the scrolling region on the Field Definitions screen To edit the selected file within a field definition press Enter The Add or Edit Screen Entry screen appears BD Edit Screen Entry esr acu Co
68. field appears if you enter a new device name Enter the name of the device whose settings you want to copy or skip this field Enter a System Device Name This name tells OSAS what system device to use when the device name is selected Use sysplot for plotters in Windows environments A message appears when you select this device name because the sysplot device is a logical device rather than a physical one Enter the Device Type to identify the plotter Use the Inquiry F2 command to select the device type from a list or enter your own Resource Manager 2 39 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices 2 40 After you have entered all values in the header section OSAS lists the characteristics available for the plotter in the scrolling region To edit the selected characteristic press Enter To return to the header section press H When you finish defining characteristics press D to return to the main Devices screen Depending on the type of printer you defined in the header section Resource Manager lists these options for plotters in the scrolling region Device Mode Driver Name Mode Font1 Font2 Font3 Slave On Slave Off Initialization Termination Description Enter the name of the device driver If your graphics device supports multiple modes of operation enter a mode number Enter the names of one to three files that contain fonts the device can use Font1 is the default Enter the h
69. field s caption for example press Tab or use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired location then enter the text and press Enter You can also press Delete to delete previous characters if necessary e To add an EIS field to the dashboard press Tab or use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired location and press Page Down to access the command menus Press E to access the Edit menu then press A Enter the field ID or use the Inquiry F2 command to select the field from a list The field appears at the location of the cursor and the Field ID appears at the bottom left corner of the screen To move an EIS field place the cursor within the field you want to move and press Page Down Press E to access the Edit menu then press M Move the cursor to the new location and then press Enter to move the field there Resource Manager 9 35 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Dashboard Editor Changing EIS Field IDs Deleting EIS Fields Saving Dashboards 9 36 To move text to a new location delete the current text move the cursor to the new location then re type the text that you want to appear To change a field ID place the cursor within the field you want to change and press Page Down Press E to access the Edit menu then press C Enter the new field ID or use the Inquiry F2 command to select it from a list To delete an EIS field place the cursor within the field you want to delete and press Page Down
70. files in this order skip the applications you do not use Resource Manager General Ledger Accounts Receivable and or Sales Order Accounts Payable and or Purchase Order Inventory Bill of Materials Kitting and then any other applications For instructions on converting see Data File Conversion on page 3 27 Resource Manager D 3 APPENDIX D Data File Conversion Converting Resource Manager System Files After you have converted the application data files you can either set up new Resource Manager system files or convert your old system files You can convert the system files that store workstation preferences and keyboard and color definitions forms reorder information application forms codes and printers and company information If you do not want to convert these files set up your system and data files as described in section I of the Resource Manager guide RMOSCNVT is a program which converts data files that are not converted with standard conversion programs such as company information form printers and workstation preferences To convert the system files follow these steps 1 In order to run this you need to first be using TEXT functions Enter RM choose Master File Lists and then Help Screens List When the text screen displays press F4 and select Call a BASIC program 2 Type in RMOSCNVT page down complete the necessary fields and press page down again to execute the program NOTE The function spe
71. financial ratios 8 6 flags in text mode 1 27 Form Codes 3 35 3 36 Form Printers 3 37 3 38 forms alignment marks 3 36 codes 3 35 pre printed 3 36 printers 3 37 printing multiple 3 35 formulas EIS 9 7 from thru ranges 1 35 Functions 9 17 9 23 building 9 21 creating 9 21 data types 9 17 9 20 in EIS field definitions 9 5 list 12 7 planning 9 22 return values 9 17 9 19 setup data types 9 17 9 20 subnumbers 9 17 value types 9 19 G General Information Inquiry A 29 General Ledger interfaced with Bank Reconciliation 3 14 3 18 GENERIC fnc 9 21 GL Account Audit Report 3 41 GL account balance 3 14 3 18 Global Dashboard Update 11 3 11 4 Global Inquiry accessing previous windows A 19 audit report 7 56 overview A 17 screens Data Columns 7 33 IX 5 INDEX General Information 7 28 Links 7 34 Summary Fields 7 30 sequence numbers A 19 window definitions 7 27 7 35 window list 7 55 graphical mode dashboards 8 4 9 31 drop down menus 1 19 1 21 function screens 1 18 graphical main menu 1 16 Inquiry button 1 23 Maintenance icon 1 24 MDI menu 1 17 shortcut menu 1 21 toolbars 1 22 groups tax See Tax Groups H help editing help text 7 19 editing text within functions 7 21 screens list 7 53 history command A 38 purging dashboard 11 5 11 6 purging e mail 2 73 purging report 14 13 hot keys 1 27 changing 4 23 list of B 1 B 13 Information menu A 35
72. first application beginning with that letter Continue to press the letter key or the down arrow until the application you want is highlighted then press Enter to select it Use the mouse to click an application to view that application s menu To move to the first application on the menu press Home To move to the last application on the menu press End On an application menu press Page Up to move to the menu immediately behind it If you are several levels away from the main menu you can return to the main menu by pressing Page Up repeatedly or by pressing Tab once To exit from OSAS press F7 1 25 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS 1 26 Function Screens Like the text menu OSAS text function screens can be used on all operating systems and in combination with graphical menus Settings Edit Print Help You can move around the screen these ways e Press Enter or the down arrow to move from field to field e To use a command listed in the command bar press the highlighted letter e Use commands to access information screens or to toggle commands on and off Refer to OSAS Commands on page B 1 for more information e Ifa screen contains more than one section press Page Down when prompted to move to the next section e Ifa menu appears prompting you for the kind of information to enter or maintain such as in the example select the option to use and press Enter e To exit the scr
73. for more information F6 Esc F Opens the appropriate File Maintenance function where you can view or update master file information This command is available when the Maintenance 33 button appears on the toolbar or when the Maint flag appears at the bottom of the screen Shift F6 Esc K Uses the lot number lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31 for more information F7 Esc M Exits from the function Shift F7 Esc N Uses the serial number lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31 for more information F8 Esc L Outputs the current screen to a printer print preview window or a file This command is only available in text mode Shift F8 Esc Q Uses the item description lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31 for more information F9 Esc U Clears the contents of the current field F10 Ctrl Z Deletes information to the end of the line This command is only available in text mode B 6 Resource Manager Function Commands Key Alternate OSAS Commands APPENDIX B Description Ctrl F Ctrl G Ctrl 0 Ctrl V Resource Manager Toggles quick entry on and off When this option is off the cursor stops at every field possible when you press Enter or Tab When this option is on as indicated by a check mark by the command on the Modes menu or by the Quick flag at the bottom of the screen the cursor stops only in required fiel
74. from the User Setup menu EN Purge User Activity f Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmal 7e l ee OK Abandon Have you backed up your data files Y Application From AP al Thru BR 3 User From brians a Thru dons 4 Remove Login Activity dated before 10 02 2007 El CompanyH 1014 2007 TerminalTooo ovr Status Bar Confirm that you have backed up your data files to proceed Select the range of Applications for which you would like to purge activity data or leave the fields blank to include all applications Select the range of Users for which you would like to purge activity data or leave the fields black to include all users Select a date in the Remove Login Activity dated before box To remove login activity from all dates leave the box blank 4 25 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Purge User Activity 6 Press enter to purge user activity The system will return you to the User Setup menu 4 26 Resource Manager Tax Classes Tax Locations Tax Groups Sales Tax Report Clear Sales Tax File Lists CHAPTER 5 5 13 5 15 5 17 Resource Manager Sales Tax Reporting Use the functions on the Sales Tax Reporting menu to set up your company s taxes fiscal periods and important reminders Use the three tax functions Tax Classes Tax Locations and Tax Groups to set up your company s tax structure to automatically calculate tax when appropriate After you set up this information you
75. function while F2 refers to the ARTRAN function The number in brackets behind the function variable the subnumber refers to a specific value returned by the function In the example on the previous page F1 1 refers to the first value returned by the SOORDERS function which is the total value of new orders entered To determine which values are returned by what subnumbers within a function print the Functions List page 12 7 or use the Functions function page 9 17 Follow these steps to build a math formula Resource Manager 9 7 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance EIS Field Definitions 1 Research the functions used in the field definition to determine which subnumbers return the values you want to use 2 Enter the function variables and their subnumbers along with the mathematical operators to use in the calculation in the Math Formula screen 3 Use the Proceed OK command to save your formula and return to the EIS Field Definitions screen If you have a simple field that displays a value exactly as it is returned by a function enter only the function variable and subnumber For example the pre defined APHDBMFR field displays only the seventh value Debit Memos Freight returned by the APHIDAY function it does not use that number in any calculations it merely displays it In this case the formula for that field is simply F1 7 9 8 Resource Manager EIS Field Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 F
76. given file type An example of this entry for Linux UNIX machines is the following usr bin runpgms DOC Resource Manager File Types 4 9 User Setup CHAPTER 4 Press Enter to exit the header If no file types are defined the Append File Types dialog box appears eei File Types iaa Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 Xt e m a 27 e OK j Abandon Ext DOW Program C Program Files Microsoft Office Office12 WINW ORD EXE DOC 10 11 Resource Manager Enter the file extension in the Ext field the application s executable file name followed by DOC in the Program field and the full file Path in which that executable is located Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes When you use the View command on the Documents screen to open and view document attachments OSAS determines the extension of the attached file then combines the information in the Path and Program fields for that extension with the attachment s file name to launch the appropriate application and open the document To add another file type click Append or press A To edit a file type entry select the entry and press Enter Edit the program name and path in the Edit File Type dialog box then use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the File Types screen To view information for the selected file type click View or press V To return to the Workstation ID field click
77. in the Search command where the search definition begins Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and continue to the next definition screen you selected If this is the last definition screen you selected the Global Inquiry Definition screen appears Enter another window ID to maintain or press F7 to return to the menu 7 29 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Global Inquiry Definitions Summary Fields Screen 7 30 The Global Inquiry Definition Summary Fields screen lists three types of information the data fields that appear in the global inquiry screen the heading format used on the screen and the actual definition for each data field This information is determined by the Record Selection section of the General Information screen E Global Inquiry Definitions tas Commands Edit Modes Other Help gt xau nemo 2e es Window APHISCHK Page 2 of 4 Fid Data Name Type Description Format Field Start Len Row Col 1 VEND ID 1 Vendor 002 001 006 01 01 2 LAST PURCHASE D B Last Purch 002 001 006 01 49 3 NAME 1 Name 010 02 03 4 PURCHASES YTD 2 Purch YTD 002 001 006 02 49 5 5 1 002 001 006 i Heading Output Appearance Summary Fields Vendor XXXXXX Last Purch MM DD YY Name Purch YTD iHHHHHHHHHE 00 Summary Field No 1 Data Name VEND ID Expression Label Vendor Data Type 1 Format Field 2 Start 1 Length 6 Row Col 101 User Mask Xref Field Start Length Flds Table Key Test Company H 117
78. in the Type field 4 Choose a Print Format Standard format is a regular print font while Compressed is a thin font designed to fit more characters in a line 5 Enter the Label Width in number of characters across 6 Enter the Label Height in number of lines 7 Enter number of Labels Across that fit onto a sheet 8 Enter the width in number of characters of the Gutter between labels 9 Enter the number of Labels Down the length of a label sheet 10 Enter the number of horizontal character Lines Between the labels on the sheet 11 Press F7 to save your changes or press F5 to abandon them Report Criteria o M Use the Report Criteria function to copy report criteria to other users and delete previously stored criteria Follow these steps to edit report criteria 1 Select Report Criteria from the System File Utilities menu The Report Criteria screen appears Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt malmal ee OK User ID scottm scottm Program Param Description Default POPRREQ August Purchase Requisition Report a B a s a 4 a a Ej El A A a a m a 8 Line 00000001 of 00000001 User ID Enter edit l View template l Remove user remove Program l Copy Goto Company H 08 19 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 1 Select the
79. installed you can view information about vendors customers and employees A 29 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu A 30 Select General Information Inquiry from the Other Commands menu The General Information Inquiry screen appears r General Informai inquiry les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2 x ts OK Abandon Search For Vendor Vendor ID Vendor Name Phone Number Contact ACE PLUMBING SUPPLY COMPA 321 BILL HUMPHREY E ATTOO1 ATLANTIS TELEPHONE CO 800 458 8585 GEORGE a BOR001 BORIS CONSTRUCTION COMPAN 612 458 2423 JULIE C a CLEO01 CLEVELAND INTERIORS INC 800 846 0333 CARL WLSON EDD001 EDDY APPLIANCE CO 219 459 8721 RALPH JOHNSON ELLOO1 ELLIS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 100 532 3789 CHARLENE S HENOO1 HENNEPIN MUNICIPAL UTILIT 612 483 9393 HARVEY y JOHO01 JOHNSON DOOR COMPANY INC 454 878 9989 BILL SMITH ij JONOO1 JONES REALTY COMPANY 888 854 5456 RANDY MARKS ACE PLUMBING SUPPLY COMPANY Fax No 309 555 5488 6769 GOLDEN GATE DRIVE Last Purchase 12 21 2007 Our Account Priority 0 1099 No SAN FRANCISCO CA 35454 5543 Terms AP0003 Status Bar Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Select what to view in the Search For field press V to view vendor information C to view customer information or E to view employee information Use the commands to move around the screen e Press Gto go to a specific line e Press V to toggle th
80. list of Resource Manager C 1 C 9 OSCL 4 21 OSCODE 2 19 OSCOMP 3 3 OSEL 2 71 2 73 OSERx 7 59 OSFRM 3 35 OSKY 4 23 OSMNx 7 11 overview 1 7 purging data records 6 9 Resource Manager INDEX purging e mail history 2 73 rebuilding damaged files 6 6 6 7 restoring corrupt files 3 26 RMRHxxx 14 7 sample data 2 51 verifying 6 7 viewing contents 6 3 XXHELP 7 19 data server pathing 2 56 data types functions 9 17 9 20 date fields 1 22 Defaults 4 7 4 14 A 7 directory and application paths 4 12 e mail executable path 4 14 pdf viewer path 4 13 web browser executable path 4 13 workstation defaults 4 8 definitions EIS field 9 3 9 9 field 7 41 Global Inquiry window 7 27 7 35 Inquiry window 7 23 7 26 Devices 2 23 2 49 adding 2 25 aligning laser forms 2 35 2 37 config bbx 2 23 common components 2 26 editing 2 24 sample files 2 41 2 48 deleting 2 25 editing 2 25 laser forms on ink jets 2 37 other devices 2 41 overview 2 23 Plotters 2 39 Printers 2 29 printing form feed marks 2 38 3 36 RMSET program 2 48 sysprint defaults 2 34 Terminals 2 27 digital dashboards See dashboards Directories 2 51 2 57 application paths 2 51 archive 14 11 data server pathing 2 56 IX 3 INDEX Documents directory 2 52 DocumentShare directory 2 53 2 57 entering directory paths 2 55 modifications directory 7 16 print file 4 13 sample data 2 51 sort file 4 13 to pdf view
81. lookup See Inquiry F2 main menu graphical 1 16 MDI 1 17 navigating graphical 1 16 navigating MDI 1 17 navigating text 1 25 text 1 24 toolbars 1 22 Maintenance F6 flag 1 27 icon 1 24 mapping 1 28 mapping addresses 1 23 2 65 masks 7 40 Master File Lists Application Information 7 52 Company Information 3 45 Country Codes 7 57 Field 7 58 Global Inquiry Window 7 55 Help Screens 7 53 Inquiry Window Definition 7 54 Laser Label Setup 7 51 Menu 7 51 Options and Interfaces 3 47 Resource Manager INDEX Tables 3 48 Tax Groups 5 17 Tax Locations 5 17 menus adding documents to the OSAS menu 7 11 Application Setup 5 1 Company Setup 3 1 customizing 7 11 Data File Maintenance 6 1 drop down menus 1 19 1 21 editing 7 11 editing items 7 13 Executive Information Summary 8 1 Favorites 4 15 A 15 graphical main menu 1 16 Information Shift F2 A 35 Installation and Configuration 2 1 item types 7 14 launching documents from OSAS 7 14 MDI 1 17 OSAS A 1 Other Commands A 17 A 31 Resource Manager 1 5 shortcut 1 21 submenus 4 16 System Setup 7 1 text main menu 1 24 messages in text mode 1 28 system 7 47 7 48 mkrecover program 6 7 modes graphical 1 15 1 22 text 1 24 1 28 modifications directory 7 16 N navigating graphical function screens 1 18 graphical main menu 1 16 MDI menu 1 17 text function screens 1 26 text main menu 1 25 to directories and files
82. menu until you have created or converted their data files You do not have to use this function if you are upgrading from an earlier version of OSAS Use the Data File Conversion function page 3 27 instead to convert your existing data files to the new version Creating Follow these steps to create data files Data Files 1 Select Data File Creation from the Company Setup menu The Data File Creation screen appears TEN Data File Creation Ele Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 X ta a m 28 ec ok Abandon Current Company H Select directory on which to create files lata Application ID a Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal TODO OVR 3 25 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Data File Creation Restoring Corrupt Files 3 26 2 The data file directories you established for the system appear in the list If more than one directory is listed select the data directory where you want the new files to be created 3 Enter the ID of each application for which you want data files created 4 Ifthe system finds data files for the application you enter in the data path the Data files exist Do you want this task to erase them message appears Select Yes to erase the existing files and create new ones or No to leave the existing files as they are and enter a different application ID If you select No only files that are missing or that don t exist for the application you selected are created Existing files a
83. mode only Key Button Description Home E Moves directly to the first item on file PgUp A Displays the previous page of the window Up 4 Moves up one item Down E Moves down one item PgDn E Displays the next page of the window End E Moves directly to the last item on file Ins Toggles between Search mode and Sort mode F7 Leaves the Inquiry window without selecting anything Enter Selects the item to which the cursor is pointing Esc Opens a window that shows Inquiry window commands and the Window ID The Esc key is available in text mode only In graphical mode select Command Help from the Help menu to view a list of commands available 1 32 Resource Manager Inquiry Inventory Lookup Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 If you use the Inventory application and the cursor is in an Item ID field on a function screen you can use any of the Inventory Lookup commands to search for information about items and select an item for entry in the field In graphical mode these commands are available on the Inquiry Lookup menu In text mode the IN Search flag appears at the bottom of the screen to alert you that these commands are available Command Hot Key Operation Alias Lookup Shift F3 Searches for items with a specified alias listed as an alternate item When you enter the alias you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Customer Shift F4 Searches for an item based on customer
84. numbered as noted in the running total at the bottom right corner of the screen You can use these subnumbers in field definitions to specify that their corresponding values as returned by the function should appear in a field or be used in a mathematical formula See Working with Formulas on page 9 7 for more information Print the Functions master list see page 12 7 for a complete list of the functions defined in OSAS the setup data types they use and the values they return for subnumbers Resource Manager 9 17 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Function Definitions Follow these steps to work with function definitions 1 Select Function Definitions from the EIS File Maintenance submenu The Functions screen appears E Function Definitions A Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help xm amp m e mnj eljee Function ID NVALUE 4 Description Inventory Valuation Totals Type Description Numeric Total Cost Numeric Total Quantity z Numeric On Order Quantity a Numeric Committed Quantity Numeric in Use Quantity Numeric PTD Sales Amount Numeric PTD Sales Quantity Numeric PTD Cost of Goods Sold Numeric PTD COGS Adjustment Numeric PTD Sales Profit Numeric YTD Sales Amount Numeric YTD Sales Quantity Numeric YTD Cost of Goods Sold y Numeric YTD COGS Adjustment y Numeric YTD Sales Profit Field of Enter Edit Append
85. of disk space You can include application specific files sample data files if you are using sample data live data from one of the three data paths if you are using live data or Report Writer data files Sample Report 11 27 2007 5 14 PM Filename Builders Supply Data File Allocation Report Description Filesize Used Shared Files for AP on Applications osas75 progRM RUdata APTOP AP Topic File 5 120 Shared Files for AP on Applications osas75 progRM data APTB AP Tables File 16 384 Shared Files for AR on Applications osas75 progRM RUdata ARTOP AR Topics 5 120 Shared Files for AR on Applications osas75 progRM data ARTB AR Tables File 17 920 Shared Files for BK on Applications osas75 progRM data BKTB 7 168 Shared Files for BR on Applications osas75 progRM data BRTB BR Tables file 4 096 Shared Files for DD on Applications osas75 progRM data DDTB Payroll Tables File 20 480 Shared Files for FA on Applications osas75 progRM data FATAX Depreciation Table Column Reco 1 737 728 FATB Fixed Assets Table File 8 192 Shared Files for GL on Applications osas75 progRM data GLAT GL Account Types File 18 432 GLBAT GL Batch Statement File 6 144 GLCFC GL Cash Flow Contents 6 144 GLMSK GL Account Mask File 7 168 GLSCF GL Statement Contents File 58 368 GLSLF GL Statement Layout File 70 656 GLTB GL Table File 10 240 Shared Files for GL on Applications osas75 progRM sysfil GLLHL
86. of window A 001002 would be paired with the description of window B and so on To move to the window you want to return to select the appropriate number and description and press Enter The sequence number s notation carries two pieces of information the number of times you selected Global Inquiry and the number of windows you accessed As explained above the number 001002 provides two details you have run the Global Inquiry function only once 001 and this window was the second window you accessed since you selected Global Inquiry Therefore 001002 indicates the second window you accessed during your first usage of the Global Inquiry function Had you selected Global Inquiry again to view the Payroll option in window 7 the sequence number of the window that appeared would be 002001 Every time you select Global Inquiry when no Global Inquiry windows are currently displayed the numbering starts at 001001 regardless of the sequence numbers the window had the last time you used it To exit from Global Inquiry at any point use the Exit F7 command APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu EIS Dashboard Display Use the EIS Dashboard Display function to open a generic EIS dashboard that you can customize This function also appears on the Executive Information Summary menu Refer to page 8 9 for more details Calculator Use the Calculator command to open a calculator for basic math calculations If you use the text versio
87. or enter Y 5 Ifyou want the conversion process to pause if a problem occurs select the check box or enter Y in text mode if not clear the check box or enter N The system considers file corruption or evidence of data not converting correctly a problem If you select this check box a message appears when OSAS encounters a problem during conversion When error messages appears you can elect to skip the error and continue or break to console mode to fix the problem before continuing If you cleared the check box error messages do not appear during conversion All error messages are also printed in the error log that OSAS produces after conversion completes regardless of whether you elected to pause when an error is found Inquiry 6 Enter the IDs and version numbers for the applications you want to convert If there are data files in the specified directory for that application the system asks whether you want to erase them Select Yes to erase those files during conversion If you select No the system returns you to the Appl field The order in which you convert applications can be very important depending on what version you are converting We recommend that you convert applications in this order GL AR SO AP PO IN BK and then other applications If you have applications that extend base applications Sales Order for example it extends the base Accounts Receivable application you only need to enter the ID for
88. referring to LPT1 but it can also refer to any other local port It can be used an unlimited number of times but must contain a value when using the nspool device e The QUEUE is the print queue to which the print job is sent and must be defined for the nspool device If you are going to capture the output from a port it is not necessary as you do the capture through Novell e The SERVER is the name of the file server that stores the print queue If you choose to capture a printer through the network use a dev Iptx device and then use the capture command and the parameters available to you through the network In Novell Windows terminals are defined as syswindow workstations TOO is an example of how a terminal with no local printers is defined alias TOO is the terminal definition and the sessions available are defined as T000 through T009 Multiple sessions are created as OSAS allows Windows workstations to have multiple sessions available to them When you define a local printer for a Windows workstation its definition appears similar to that of TO1 in the sample Typically you should use the logical sysprint print device for your printer as it tells OSAS to use the printer as defined in Windows software You can also define the printer using the dev Iptx device if you prefer see TO11 but it may conflict with the setup of the same printer in Windows 2 47 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices When def
89. select Parameters from the Print Manager File Maintenance submenu The Parameters screen appears EN Parameters fe a Commands Edit Modes Other Help xt amp emiml eeeo ok Abandon Next Archive Seq Number 00000001 FileType 9 Em File Name AO000H PDF Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR By default Print Manager stores the reports you archive in the directory specified as the Archive path in the Directories function page 2 51 The system can assign archive file names for you automatically Print Manager assigns file names with a sequential number followed by the current company ID Resource Manager 14 11 CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Parameters If you want to adjust the sequential number Print Manager uses for automatic archive file names enter the new number to use OSAS uses this number in the next file name when you print a report to a file and increments this number by one each report you print to a file afterwards You can also select the File Type file name extension to archive report queue files 14 12 Resource Manager Purge Report History MM Use the Purge Report History function to delete report history entries from the RMRHxxx file by date and type Remember that this function removes the history of a report from the file not the report itself To delete a report you must remove it manually using the Archive Report Control functions To purge report histo
90. single field over a range of dates You can specify that the report contain all the available history information about the field or only the information within a range of dates to eliminate the need for several history reports This report is not available if you have the Keep value files history for EIS option set to NO in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 Sample Report 06 09 2007 Builders Supply 3 46 PM Field History Report APAGE CU AP Aged Open Invoices Current Due Date Time Value 12 01 2003 09 45 23 32 790 79 01 09 2007 15 43 46 41 499 48 End of Report Resource Manager 10 9 CHAPTER 11 Global Dashboard Update 11 3 EIS Periodic Maintenance Purge Dashboard History Resource Manager 11 5 The functions on the EIS Periodic Maintenance submenu help you e Update all fields on all dashboards at once so that you have the most current information e Save the updated information to history e Purge dashboard history files when they get too large or when extra space is needed Because these functions affect all dashboards and your data files use them with caution Global Dashboard Update oo B Use the Global Dashboard Update function to recalculate all fields on all dashboards both graphical and text with current values If the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to YES in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 you can also save updated field val
91. stores the addresses of the sender and recipient the date and time the subject and the application ID and menu title of e mail messages sent through OSAS Follow these steps to clear this file 1 Select Purge E Mail History from the Reports menu 2 When the Purge E Mail History screen appears enter the date before which to purge e mail history All e mail messages saved in the history file with a date before the date you enter are purged 3 Use the Proceed OK command to begin processing Resource Manager 2 73 Remove Applications MY Use the Remove Applications function to remove any application except Resource Manager from the system Note This function removes the entire application from your system including your data files If you want to save your data files back them up copy them to a new directory or do not use this function to remove the application Follow these steps to remove an application 1 Select Remove Applications from the Installation menu The Remove Applications screen appears La Remove Applications Fere ess Commands Edit Modes Other Help gt xa nemo 2e es ok abandon Application ID a Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Inquiry 2 Enter the two character code for the application you want to remove and press Enter Resource Manager 2 75 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Remove Applications 3 Because removing application removes all data fi
92. t 2 c B In UNIX you can enter the parameters in any order and you can use any combination of the parameters You must leave a space between the parameter mark t or c and the parameter itself 1 12 Resource Manager Starting OSAS Logging In Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 After the system is set up including users the login screen appears when you start OSAS scottm MH Builders Supply OSAS version 7 6 Copyright 1982 2010 This program is protected by U S and International copyright laws To log in to OSAS enter your User ID and the Company ID you want to work with If you want to save your password so that you do not need to enter it again select the Save Password check box or enter Y in text mode to save your information This check box appears only if the Remember Password option is selected for your user ID in the Users function page 2 9 Check the Change Password box to change your password upon logging in You will be prompted to enter and confirm your new password Finally press Enter or click OK to log in In Windows you can set up your OSAS shortcut properties such that the user ID and company ID you use most frequently automatically appear on the login screen so that you can log in faster See page 1 11 for more information This screen appears only after you have set up the system including setting up users See Users on page 2 9 and Roles on page 2 19 fo
93. that you print a test sheet before processing labels Follow these steps to add or edit laser label types 1 Select Laser Label Setup from the System File Utilities menu The Laser Label Setup screen appears E Laser Label Setup Tela les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help RX lz ha aa 28 Ok Abandon Labels Label Label ID Description Across Down Width Height Address Labels 5 z Large Large Address Labels 2 2 25 10 2 El Enter edit Append Test page Go to CompanyH 10082007 Terminal tooo INS 2 Press A to add a label definition or highlight the label you want to edit and press Enter 3 Press T to print a test page to check the spacing of the label setup definition 7 3 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Laser Label Setup Edit Append Label dialog box The Edit Append Label dialog box appears if you press Enter or A to edit or append a label E Edit Label fo e Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xe a mal elee OK J Abandon Label ID Large q Description Large Address Labels Type Laser X Print Format Standard v Label Width 25 Label Height 10 Labels Across 2 Gutter 1 Labels Down 3 Lines Between Inquiry 1 Select or enter the Label ID you want to add or edit 2 Enter or edit a Description for the label ID 3 Choose Continuous or Laser
94. the Company ID for which the role has been set Inquiry 2 Select the Role ID you would like to assign to the user Mant L 3 Use the Proceed OK command to save your roles selection 2 18 Resource Manager Roles o M Roles control the rights groups of users have based on their similar job functions Use the Roles function to set up codes that grant and deny access to different menu choices All users must have at least one role and you must set up an administrative role that has unlimited access especially to Resource Manager A user can also have multiple roles if they perform several job functions in OSAS As an illustration you might create a role called ORDER ENTRY that grants access to functions that the group of users that processes orders might use on a regular basis You might then define another role called SALES MGR that grants access to task that the sales manager performs over and above the tasks included in the ORDER ENTRY role Then when you set up users you can assign the ORDER ENTRY role to the order processors and both the ORDER ENTRY role and the SALES MGR role to the sales manager All roles and their rights are stored in the OSCODE file in the data directory If you deny rights to a function in a role you can keep that function from appearing on the menus of users who have that role by setting the Hide menu entries when access is denied option to Yes in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 I
95. the number of pages the more memory required Enter the device name of the default printer such as LPL LP or PO You can also enter the printer name Enter the user ID that you want to associate with the terminal ID The user ID can be used as another identifier when adding forms printers or pop up calendar reminders Select the ID to use with the Address Mapping command to view maps of addresses generated by mapping websites Note You must set up information about the mapping websites you use in the Address Mapping function page 2 65 before you can select an ID here After you ve set up mapping websites and selected the Map Lookup ID to use for this workstation you can use the Address Mapping command when it is available on function screens to view maps of the addresses they contain See page 1 23 and page 1 28 for more information on this command CHAPTER 4 User Setup Preferences Preferences Screen Directory and Application Paths The second Preferences screen appears after you press Page Down on the first Preferences screen Press Page Up to return to the first Preferences screen Your changes are not saved until you use the Proceed OK command on this screen EN Defauits o Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmaa l 7 lee OK Abandon Workstation T000 Directory Defaults Print File C OSAS75BBJ Document Sort File C OSAS75BBJ Document Application Defaults Acrobat Reader C Program
96. the profit minus the amount invested in assets Return on investment ROI is the return on the investment you have in your company expressed as the profit minus the amount invested in assets and equity Resource Manager 8 7 EIS Dashboard Display Te Use the EIS Dashboard Display function to view any of the dashboards available in OSAS When you enter the function the dashboard selected in the Preferences function page 4 7 appears but you can use the commands to open a different dashboard Select EIS Dashboard Display from the Executive Information Summary menu to open a dashboard EIS Functions menu A Company Summary fo es Commands Edit Modes Other EIS FuN tions Help x ts pola El 280 lee OK Abandon Sales Daily Monthly Yearly Actual 45 577 69 9 648 015 97 3 Budget 26 153 86 810 769 65 10 524 454 23 Field Variance 7 585 03 765 191 96 876 438 26 Text Field Cross Profit Actual 15 839 28 20 743 14 4 310 240 51 Budget 11 083 28 343 581 54 4 581 033 90 Variance 4 756 00 322 838 40 270 793 39 Cash Balance 33 802 32 Inventory Value 1 263 034 34 AR Balance 790 768 05 AP Balance 499 326 93 Time Tickets 00 Actual Target Quick Ratio 1 05 1 2 20 1 Unshipped Orders 00 Current Ratio 5 05 1 10 00 1 Shipped Orders 123 567 83 Debt Equity 0 79 1 0 75 1 Returned Orders 00 CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Use the commands to move around the screen update and recalculate th
97. the right mouse button in an empty area of the dashboard and select Properties from the menu that appears The dashboard s Properties screen appears Type Field ID Text X Position Y Position Width Height To change the dashboard s title enter the text that you want to appear as the dashboard s title in the Text box To change the position in which the dashboard appears on the screen enter new X Position and Y Position values To change the size of the dashboard enter new Width and Height values Close the Properties screen when you finish to return to the dashboard To add a field to a dashboard use one of these methods To add an EIS field to the dashboard select Add EIS Field from the Edit EIS menu and then enter the field ID to add The field appears in the dashboard s upper left corner Drag the field to a new location if necessary To add a text field as an EIS field s caption for example to the dashboard select Add Text Field from the Edit EIS menu The field appears in the dashboard s upper left corner Drag the field to a new location if needed The system automatically labels text fields as Field XXXX where XXXX is a sequential number To rename the field so that the text or caption you want appears open the field s Properties screen See page 9 33 for details To move a field drag the field to a new location If you want to precisely place a field based on X and Y coordinat
98. the screen EN Change Orders Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Information Help Select a menu to access the command you need For more detailed information on these menus refer to Function Menus on page A 9 e The commands on the Commands menu help you move around the screen e The Edit menu contains the common Copy Paste and Undo commands that let you work with the contents of a field e The Modes menu contains options that control whether verification is needed before you can exit or abandon the function whether a bell sounds at an error or verification step whether you can use quick entry to skip field or stop at every field and whether verification is needed when you press Page Down or use the Proceed OK command The Other menu gives you access to additional OSAS commands not directly related to the function you re using See Other Commands Menu on page A 17 for more information The Scroll Commands menu appears only on screens with scroll regions and helps you move around in those regions Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Shortcut Menu e The Inventory Lookups menu appears if you use the Inventory application when you are on a screen that contains an Item ID field Use its commands to search for information about inventory items and enter an item into the field you are in See Inventory Lookup on page 1 33 for more information e The Information me
99. them to specific laser dot matrix and wide carriage printer types when you install Resource Manager 2 42 Resource Manager Devices Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 You can define local printers for Windows workstations as well Typically you should use the logical sysprint device for the printer as this tells OSAS to use the Windows software definition for this printer You can still define the printer using the dev Iptx device if your prefer but keep in mind that it may create a conflict with the setup of the same printer in Windows This line enables e mail capabilities in OSAS Terminals are defined as Windows workstations syswindow As an example the first terminal is defined as TOOO and each session available to that terminal are defined as alias TOOO through T009 Another terminal would be defined as T010 and its individual sessions as alias TO10 through T019 and so on Multiple session entries are created as OSAS allows Windows workstations to have multiple sessions available to them Accept the default syswindow device name for Windows terminals If you edit the terminal a This device type is unavailable message appears because syswindow refers to a logical device rather than a physical one Press Enter to dismiss the message and continue with the terminal definition These lines enable graphical capabilities in OSAS 2 43 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices 2
100. through the operating system on BB change to the bbj utils mkrecover directory and type the command for the operating system you use Please note that the first character in IREBUILD TXT is a lowercase L Remember to substitute the full directory path and file name of the file you want to rebuild for lt filename gt in these commands Windows mkrecover IREBUILD TXT lt filename gt UNIX Linux mkrecover IREBUILD TXT filename Follow these steps to rebuild or verify a file 1 Select File Rebuild Verify from the Database Utilities menu The File Rebuild Verify screen appears 2 Enter the name of the file you want to rebuild or verify and use the Proceed OK command to rebuild the file 6 7 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities File Rebuild Verify 3 When the rebuild is complete the Finished with Rebuild message appears and the screen lists information about the changes made to the file if any El File Rebuild verify Ferrer te Commands Edit Modes Other Help File to Rebuild Verify ARCUH Finished with rebuild Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal TODO OVR Click OK or press Enter to return to the Database Utilities menu Purge Data Records o M Use the Purge Data Records function to remove specific records from a data file Note Removing records from a file causes a loss of data that can in turn cause accounting problems in your data files Do not remove records from fil
101. to edit this information The Field History file stored field values and the dates and times the field was last updated If you elect to save dashboard history field values from those updates are saved here as well When you produce the Dashboard History Report page 10 7 the information on the report is retrieved from this file Resource Manager C 3 APPENDIX C File Descriptions EISCR EISTDTA EISTHDR EIVAL OSAPPL xxx OSBUF txt OSBUT txt C 4 The Screens file stores a list of EIS dashboard IDs and descriptions This information is updated when you build or save a dashboard s layout and is retrieved when you load a dashboard The field values from a dashboard are not stored here they are stored in the EIHIST file because the system does not distinguish between one field and a group of fields When you save a dashboard the field values are sent to the EIHIST file as though you had saved each field individually Only the dashboard s title and ID are stored in the EISCR file The Setup Data file stores the data retrieved from each setup ID when a field value is recalculated This data includes the type and From Thru information When you define a function you use setup IDs to specify the type of information you want returned and the range within those types for example a cash balance for one company or a range of companies The information is stored here and retrieved when you define a field The Setup Heade
102. to reconvert a company either reset your options after conversion or back up the xxTB files before converting Follow these instructions to convert data files 1 Select Data File Conversion from the Company Setup menu The Data File Conversion screen appears jn A Data File Conversion iL Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX HET m El lee l OK _ Abandon Select directory on which to create files lata Enter directory that contains the files to be converted C osas65 data Do you want source files erased after conversion Do you want conversion to pause if a problem is found E Appl Description Version Appl Description Version GL General Ledger 6 50 IN Inventory 6 50 JO Job Cost 6 50 BR Bank Reconciliation 6 50 RM a Resource Manager 6 50 CompanyH 11 8 2007 Terminal T000 ovR 2 The system lists all valid OSAS data paths If more than one directory is listed select the data directory where you want to store the converted files 3 Enter the path drive and directory that contains the files you want to convert You cannot enter the same path as the path you selected above 4 Ifyou want to erase source files after conversion select the check box or enter Y in text mode if not clear the box or enter N 3 28 Data File Conversion Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Note Erasing data files is always risky Be sure you have a backup copy of your data files before you select this check box
103. when you log on to OSAS because the system does not recognize the terminal as defined To add a new device to the system press Insert to place the new device at the selected line or press A to add a new line at the bottom of the file This screen appears TEN Devices a Ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help xa e mu e eeo o fanden Config bbx Line Type Terminal Printer Graphics Plotter Other Select the type of device you want to add and click OK or press Enter The screen for that device appears where you can enter information about the device you are adding See the corresponding screen description for details To write your changes to the config bbx file press W To delete a line in the file select the line you want to delete and press F3 When the confirmation message appears select Yes to delete the line or No to return to the Devices screen without deleting To exit the function without saving any changes press F7 2 25 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices 2 26 Common Config bbx Components The config bbx file contains entries that are common to all operating systems Command Description STBLEN ALIASES FCBS CIBS HANDLES The size in bytes of an internal list of all alias names and disk names The default is 10240 the maximum is approximately 30000 When you install OSAS this value is calculated and set automatically For networks we recomme
104. which to start and the length of the data in the Beg and Len fields e Enter the number of the first column to display the data in the Col field A brief sample of the window s appearance appears at the bottom of the screen Edit the headings if necessary Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes When the Test the Window message appears select Y to view the window with your changes or N to proceed without viewing the window Global Inquiry Definitions o o M A Global Inquiry window consolidates and lists information from other applications These windows are valuable if you are in the middle of an application and need information from a different application but do not want to exit the current screen to retrieve this data Use the Global Inquiry Definitions function to design edit or delete Global Inquiry windows Keep in mind that you will need in depth information about your data files and fields if you choose to create or edit these windows To produce a list of the information entered on the Global Inquiry Definitions screen print the Global Inquiry Window master file list To view create or edit these definitions select Global Inquiry Definitions from the System File Utilities menu This selection screen appears EX Global Inquiry Definitions E Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 xt emaul ejlee OK _ Abandon Global Inquiry Window ID APHISCHH 4 Window Title Check History Do You Want
105. you have questions about the account Bank Accounts Company Setup CHAPTER 3 8 Enter the E Mail Address for the contact and the Web Site of the vendor Account Information EN Bank Accounts Tela ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help gt xa nemo 2e es OK Abandon Bank Account ID MC001 Ace Plumbing Mastercard Type Credit Card Vendor ID ACE001 ACE PLUMBING SUPPLY COMPANY Account Information Cardholder Name BRUCE HUMPHREY Card Number 9999888899998888 Expiration 07 2009 Memo 101 Company H 08 29 2007 Terminal TODO OVR Enter the account information for the vendor s credit card in the Account Information screen Enter the Cardholder Name the Card Number the credit card s Expiration Date and Memo 3 17 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Bank Accounts Reconciliation Information n Bank Accounts tole Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help xtm5emul ejeso 0 6 Abandon Bank Account ID FNB002 First National Credit Card Type Credit Card Vendor ID MC0001 First National Credit Card Reconciliation Information GL Account 200000 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE TRADE GL Balance 607046 88 ES Last Statement Information Reconciliation File Format Balance 6548 00 Date 11 20 2010 r3 Period 11 2010 Last Payment Information Amount 454 00 Date 10 21 2010 E Invoice 6548431 Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR The Reconciliation Information screen is ava
106. 00 Setup ID Description COMP Company Ranges Type From Thru 01 Display Mask 999 999 999 00 Setup ID Description COMP Company Ranges Type From Thru 01 12 5 Functions List o M Use the Functions List function to produce a list of functions defined on the system their associated setup data types and the specific values they return This list is valuable if you are defining or editing functions and need a hard copy for comparison Sample List 05 23 2007 Builders Supply 3 47 PM Functions List Function Description APAGED AP Open Invoice File Aged Totals Setup Types Description Length Type 1 Company ID 3 3 Sub Type Description Numeric Current Due Numeric Balance 31 60 Numeric Balance 61 90 Numeric Balance 91 120 Numeric Balance Over 120 Numeric Total Due Numeric Invoice Count Numeric Vendor Count Numeric Active Vendor Count Numeric Past Due Vendor Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 8 9 0 H APCHECK AP Checks File Totals Setup Types Description Length Type 1 Company ID 3 3 Sub Type Description Numeric Regular Check Amount Numeric Discounts Taken Amount Numeric Discounts Lost Amount Numeric Prepaid Check Amount Resource Manager 12 7 Setup Definitions List oo M Use the Setup Definitions List function to produce a list of the setup definitions defined on the system This list is valuable if you want to change a setup ID and need a list for comparison Sample List 05 23 2007 B
107. 000 0 000 00 00 06 Food Products 0 000 0 000 00 00 07 Clothing 0 000 0 000 00 00 v 108 Gasoline 0 000 0 000 00 00 B 03 Senices 0 000 0 000 00 Total 00 00 Calculated 00 00 Over Short 00 00 Enter edit Tax Loc Eirst l Last Next l Prev View Header Go to Class CompanyH 11 27 2007 Terminal tooo ovR Enter this information in the header section of the screen Inquiry Enter the Tax Location you want to set up or edit then enter or edit the tax location Name Resource Manager 5 5 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Tax Locations 5 6 Enter an appropriate Tax Level 1 5 for this location For example this location may be subject to a state tax a county tax a city tax and so on National or state taxes are usually assigned level 1 city or counties are usually assigned higher levels 2 and above Note You must know in advance what your tax levels are before you can set up tax locations e Enter the Authority for this location Tax authorities are used to group locations into larger groups You can print the Sales Tax Report and clear tax amounts by tax authorities e Enter the Tax Liability Acct to which you want to post tax liability e Enter or edit the company s tax identification number for the authority e Select the Freight and Misc check boxes or enter Y in text mode if you want the system to calculate tax on freight or miscellaneous charges for any t
108. 000001 of 000001 Enter edit Append l Header Done Goto 1 If you select Comma Delimited or Comma Quote Delimited as the file type enter the field number in the Field box 2 If you select Fixed Field Width as the file type enter the starting position in the Start box and the length of the respective field in the Length box 3 To place a value into a field that exists in the ASCII file but may be null or blank in some of the records enter that value into the Default box 4 Check the Force Default box to force the field to carry your default value 7 9 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Import Definitions 7 10 In the Translate From Translate To scroll area press Enter or A if you would like to edit or add a data translation from the file into a value that OSAS recognizes for example account numbers The Append Edit Translation Information dialog box appears Fl Append Translation Information fo ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX te elman e OK Abandon Translate From 500 Translate To Enter the Translate From and Translate To values and click OK The transaltion value will be added to the field Press H to adjust the header of the Edit Field Information dialog box or press D save your changes to the field Menus oo M Use the Menus function to change the OSAS main menu or the menus for any application that is installed for the current company You can change t
109. 1 54 4 581 033 90 Variance 4 756 00 322 838 40 270 793 39 Cash Balance 33 802 32 Inventory Value 1 263 034 34 AR Balance 790 768 05 AP Balance 499 326 93 Time Tickets 00 Actual Target Quick Ratio 1 051 2 20 1 Unshipped Orders 00 Current Ratio 5 05 1 10 00 1 Shipped Orders 123 567 83 Debt Equity 0 79 1 0 75 1 Returned Orders 00 CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 5 Cash Requirements Forecast SO M The Cash Requirements Forecast dashboard displays cash flow projections Select Cash Requirements Forecast from the Executive Information Summary menu The Cash Requirements Forecast dashboard appears and lists cash balances and inflow and outflow projections a Cash Requirements Forecast oa Tea Commands Edit Modes Other ElS Functions Help 2xt malaol 7 lee OK Abandon Cash on Hand 110 00 Cash on Deposit 5 025 26 Beginning Cash Balance 5 135 26 Period to Date Posted 5 40 Period to Date Unposted 00 Current Cash Balance 5 140 66 Cash Flow Projections Cash Inflow Cash Outflow Net Due Today 11 19 2003 138 607 43 379 302 97 240 695 54 Week Ending 11 26 2003 17 118 76 1 855 00 15 263 76 Week Ending 12 03 2003 111 156 93 36 903 59 74 253 34 Week Ending 12 10 2003 1
110. 2 Installation and Configuration Users To set up users through OSAS see Setting up a User through OSAS on page 2 10 To set up a user using BBj Enterprise Manager see Setting up a User through BBj Enterprise Manager on page 2 14 Setting up a User through OSAS Follow these steps to set up user IDs through OSAS without using BBj Enterprise Manager validation 1 Select Users from the Installation and Configuration menu The Users screen appears and lists all user records Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt malmal2el e OK Abandon Enable BBj User Validation User ID Name rerm ID Save Password elizabethf elizabethf T060 a 2 frankb frankb T040 n kristinh ikristinh T050 E mikib mikib T020 a iscottm scottm T000 E Warrend warrend T010 E a j ja E m 4 z LJ 8 la Enter edit Append Goto Company H 08 11 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 Clear the Enable BBj User Validation check box or enter N in text mode If you have not set up any users the Append User screen appears over the Users screen so that you can enter the first user record Continue to the next step for information on adding a user 2 10 Resource Manager Users Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 To add a new user press A The Append User ID s
111. 2772007 Terminal taoo ovn Use the fields at the bottom of the screen to enter definitions for each field listed Press Ctrl J to jump from one definition to another or press Tab to scroll through each field in a definition before moving to the next one Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and continue to the next definition screen you selected If this is the last definition screen you selected the Global Inquiry Definition screen appears Enter another window ID to maintain or press F7 to return to the menu Global Inquiry Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Refer to the table below for individual field descriptions Field Description Data Name Expression Label Data Type User Mask Format Field Start Length Row Col Xref Field Start Enter a the name for the field or leave this field blank to enter a mathematical formula on the next line Enter a mathematical formula using the Global Inquiry shorthand method or by entering valid mathematical expressions Enter a label for the field Enter the field s data type alphanumeric values numeric values date values social security number values A amp o Mu Enter the user defined numeric mask to use for numeric fields Enter the format to use for numeric data Use any combination of these codes formatasa dollar amount defaults to two decimal places format with commas inserted where necessary
112. 3 When you finished adjusting the archive control settings for the reports in the menu press W to save your changes You are returned to the header of the Archive Control screen from which you can choose another application and menu to change or use the Exit F7 command to return to the Company Setup menu Edit Archive Control dialog box The Archive Control dialog box appears when you press Enter to edit a highlighted report from the menu list 1 The reports that you can archive appear in the list Scroll up and down to select the report for which you would like to change the archive settings and press Enter The Edit Archive Control dialog box appears E Edit Archive Control fe ites Commands Edit Modes Other Help 3 X ta laa 26 ox Abandon Line 06 File Prefix PHR Control Always X Type PDF The line of the report on the previous report list appears in the Line field 2 Ifyou want the names of the files containing the archived copies of the report to begin with a standard prefix enter it in the File Prefix field 3 Use the Control field to specify whether the report should always be archived Always should never be archived Never or whether the user should be prompted with the choice to archive it Prompt Archive Control Company Setup CHAPTER 3 4 Use the Type field to select the format for the archived report If you run OSAS on BBj you can choose either Text or PD
113. 6 5 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities Change File Size 6 6 Enter the name of the file Information about that file appears in the middle portion of the screen In the Actual File Information column the File Type should be Mkeyed or Highly Recoverable and the Number of Records should be Dynamic If different values appear for these fields consult your reseller or call Open Systems for technical support In the fields at the bottom of the screen change the values to use for the new file if necessary In the File Type field enter 6 to create an Mkeyed multikeyed file or 8 to create a Highly Recoverable file Most OSAS data files are Highly Recoverable files to aid recovery in case of data loss or a system crash e Inthe Number of Records field enter he number of records you want in the new file For a dynamically allocated Mkeyed or Highly Recoverable file enter 0 OSAS automatically sets this field to 0 to create a dynamically allocated file e Inthe Bytes Per Record field enter the number of bytes of memory to set aside for each record in the new file OSAS automatically sets this field to 1152 e Inthe Key Chain field enter the key chain number you want to use to select the data to copy from the old file to the new one or leave the default value as is A key chain represents a primary key used in the table to sort and organize data Refer to the OSAS file descriptions manuals for more information on key chains Use the Pro
114. 7 submenus creating 4 16 subnumbers functions 9 17 Support Information 2 69 2 70 A 31 sysprint devices defaults 2 34 illegible characters 2 32 System File Maintenance 7 35 Application Information 7 15 7 17 Global Inquiry Definitions 7 27 7 35 Help Screens 7 19 7 21 IX 10 Inquiry Window Definitions 7 23 7 26 System Messages 7 47 7 48 System Messages 7 47 7 48 System Setup 7 1 Directories 2 51 2 57 E Mail Setup 2 63 2 64 Favorites Menu 4 15 4 16 Form Codes 3 35 3 36 Form Printers 3 37 3 38 Menus 7 11 7 14 overview 7 1 Support Information 2 69 2 70 Web Setup 2 65 T tables list 3 48 tables application 3 39 tax authorities 5 6 Tax Classes 5 3 5 4 deleting from tax locations 5 8 editing percentages 5 8 Tax Groups 5 9 5 12 adding 5 11 calculating tax on tax 5 12 deleting 5 12 editing 5 11 list 5 17 overview 5 9 tax on tax 5 9 tax levels 5 6 Tax Locations 5 5 5 8 clearing totals 5 15 deleting tax classes 5 8 editing tax class percentages 5 8 list 5 17 periodic processing 5 7 tax authorities 5 6 tax levels 5 6 totals 5 7 tax on tax 5 9 calculating 5 12 terminal IDs in BBj 2 9 Resource Manager in PRO 5 2 9 text mode calculator A 20 A 23 colors changing 4 21 4 22 command line 1 28 commands 1 27 dashboards 8 4 9 34 flags 1 27 function screens 1 26 main menu 1 24 messages 1 28 screen colors changing 4 21 4 22 toolbar
115. ATIMETK field Although the field still appears on the Company Summary dashboard the value it contains appears as a string of Xs amp Company Summary Commands Modes Other EIS Functions Help 2xt mam ma e eeo Sales Actual Budget Variance Gross Profit Actual Budget Variance Cash Balance AR Balance Quick Ratio Current Ratio Debt Equity Daily 26 153 86 7 585 03 15 839 28 11 083 28 4 756 00 33 802 32 790 768 05 Actual Target 1 051 2201 5 05 1 10 00 1 0791 0751 Monthly 45 577 69 810 769 65 765 191 96 20 743 14 343 581 54 322 838 40 Inventory Value AP Balance Time Tickets Unshipped Orders Shipped Orders Retumed Orders Yearly 9 648 015 97 10 524 454 23 876 438 26 4 310 240 51 4 581 033 90 270 793 39 1 263 034 34 499 326 93 200000000 00 123 567 83 00 If a field displays messages other than a numerical value or XXXX it may indicate an error with the formula field definition setup interface or mask OSAS uses Company H 0803 2005 Terminal T000 ovr these messages to indicate EIS field errors Error indicates a problem with the math formula 22222 suggests and error with the setup definition used by the field Itt indicates a problem in the field definition te indicates an interface issue of some type e suggests an error with the mask either defined or overflow Information for this field appears as XXXX when acc
116. Accts Pay Payroll Writeofts 91 814 96 In Process 91 814 96 00 Other 00 Today 00 00 Received Today 00 PTD 00 00 Received PTD 00 Company H 120772007 Terminal TODO ovn Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 9 AR Analysis o 0 MM The Accounts Receivable Analysis dashboard provides aging historical and other key information from Accounts Receivable and Sales Order Select AR Analysis from the Executive Information Summary menu The Accounts Receivable Analysis dashboard appears and lists aging and sales amounts for analysis TEN Accounts Receivable Analysis Sc Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help xs a mn ejee ok Abenden Aging Analysis Sales History Period to Date Yearto Date Unpd Fin Chg HE sees 90 199 47 1 923 815 81 Curent Due 305 709 40 Returns 00 00 Balance 31 60 541 261 51 Sales Tax 68 79 412 72 61 90 133 085 45 Freight 00 00 91 120 74 619 56 Misc Chgs 00 00 121 35 388 60 Fin Chas 00 00 Unapplied Cr 00 Total 90 268 26 1 924 228 53 Total Due 1 090 064 52 Payments 00 4 240 728 22 Invoice Count 32 Discounts 00 26 141 20 Customer Count 1 Active Customers 12 Avg Days to Pay 45 40 Past Due Customers 10 Days Sales Outstanding 85 50 CompanyH 12 28 2007
117. Address Mapping Support Information E Mail History Report Purge E Mail History Remove Applications Resource Manager 2 3 2 9 2 19 2 23 2 51 2 59 2 63 2 65 2 69 2 71 2 73 2 75 Installation and Configuration Use the Installation and Configuration functions to customize and optimize OSAS for your network and network devices e Use the Install Applications function to install applications in your OSAS system e Use the Users function to set up users of the system and the terminals to associate with them e Use the Roles function to set up codes that grant and deny user access to different menu choices Use the Devices function to define the devices that can access OSAS such as other terminals printers or plotters e Use the Directories function to add and change the directories used by OSAS for installation media programs data files system files and so on e Use the User Defined Field Setup function to define display and enter user defined fields e Use the E Mail Setup function to enter details about the server login ID and password and address you use to send and receive e mail 2 1 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration 2 2 Use the Address Mapping function to enter the URL and search variables of the mapping website you use e se the Support Information function to enter all the relevant information for technical support Use the ODBC Configuration File function to create a
118. Application Menu MAIN Title Main Menu Line Description Type Program Param 01 Bills of Materials Kitting 1 BKMN z 02 Bank Reconciliation 1 BRMN 2 Q3 FixedAssets 1 FAMN n 04 General Ledger 1 GLMN 05 General Report Writer NEN 1 GNMN EN 06 Inventory 1 INMN 07 Job Cost 1 JOMN 08 Payroll with Direct Deposit 1 DDMN 09 Purchase Order 1 POMN 10 Resource Manager 1 RMMN 11 Sales Order 1 SOMN 12 1 APMN 13 1 ARMN v 14 1 PAMN Y 15 Y Enter edit Move Copy Swap Unique Title Write Company H 1127 2007 Terminal Toon ovr To work with an application menu enter the Application Enter OS to work with the Other Commands F4 menu To work with the main menu leave the Application field blank and press Enter OSAS automatically enters MAIN in the Menu field and moves you to the Title field If you selected an application above enter the Menu you want to customize or enter a new one If you entered OS above enter MAIN Enter or edit the Title if necessary and press Enter to move to the menu listing in the scrolling region The scrolling region is available only after you ve entered a title Menus 5 Use System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 the commands to work with the menu listings Press Enter to edit the selected line The Edit Menu screen appears See Editing a Menu Item on page 7 13 for more information Press M to move the selected line to a different line When the Move Line prompt appears
119. Copy From field appears if you enter a new device name Enter the Resource Manager 2 29 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices 2 30 Use the LPTx device name for printers attached directly to your machine in Windows NT 2000 and XP environments Use the dev prn dev Iptx and dev comx device names for printers attached directly to your workstation or captured in Windows 98 environments and all printers in UNIX and Linux environments Use the sysprint device name for printers accessed through the Windows Print Manager in any Windows environment A message appears when you select this device name because the sysprint device is a logical device rather than a physical one Enter the Device Type to identify the printer Use the Inquiry F2 command to select the device type from a list or enter your own After you have entered all values in the header section OSAS lists the characteristics available for the printer in the scrolling region To edit the selected characteristic press Enter To return to the header section press H When you finish defining characteristics press D to return to the main Devices screen Note BBj lacks the ability to add server as a device mode alias line If you use OSAS on BBj and you use server based printing you need to modify the config bbx file using a text editor to add this line Depending on the type of printer you defined in the header section Resource Manager lists these optio
120. DEF RMRAxxx RMRCxxx RMRHxxx RMRMxxx RMTDxxx RMTHxxx RMTXxxx RMUCxxx RMUIxxx C 8 The Driver Definitions file contains terminal and plotter driver file names that are used in inquiry windows during device maintenance The Tax Group file contains information about how the tax locations tie together The Global Inquiry Definitions file stores information and file names that are used in inquiry windows during global inquiries The Printer Definitions file stores the default printer definitions that are used in inquiry windows during device maintenance The Archive Report Control file contains information about the reports you archive through Print Manager The Active Report Control file contains information about the active reports you maintain through Print Manager The Report History file stores the history of reports you have printed from Print Manager This file is cleared when you use the Purge Report History function page 16 5 The Printer Maintenance file contains the parameter file name defaults for active and archive report printing through Print Manager You maintain these defaults through the Parameters function page 16 3 The Tax Location Detail file stores tax location detail information such as the percentage rates and tax expense account The Tax Location Header file stores tax location header information The Tax Locations file stores tax location information such as the tax authority tax
121. DI menu you need to close and reopen OSAS to see the changes e The Modifications Directory field allows you to separate your modified programs from base OSAS application programs so that your changes are not affected when you install updates When you store your modified programs in a separate location you can install the latest versions of OSAS base applications without overwriting your modifications You can then compare the updated base applications to your modified files to determine how the updates affect you If your programs have been modified store the modified programs in a separate directory then enter that location in the Modifications Directory field If the modifications change depending on the company involved add xxx to the end of the directory for example modARxxx Application Information System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 When you use this convention OSAS starts the selected application first in the directory corresponding to the company ID If that directory is not found OSAS attempts to start the application in the directory by dropping the company ID for example modAR If that directory is not found OSAS uses the default progXX directory for the application You can also use relative or UNC pathing see page 2 51 to enter directory paths If you want to use relative pathing you must store modifications in a subdirectory within the OSAS directory that is at the same level as the OSAS program directories f
122. DIX A The date reference and text that appear for each comment depend on the reference ID and end date you enter The comments are arranged by date the most recent date first then by reference ID Use these commands to work with the comments on the screen Press R to return to the Ref ID field to enter a new reference ID e Press Dto return to the End Date field and enter a new end date by which to sort comments Press I to return to the ID field and enter a new ID for which to view or enter comments e Press A to add a new comment The Append Comment screen appears e Press E to edit a selected comment The Edit Comment screen appears e Press F to view comments for the first ID on record e Press N to view comments for the next ID on record e Press P to view or edit comments for the previous ID on record e Press Lto view or edit comments for the last ID on record e Press Gto go to a specific comment This command is available only when there is more than one screen of comments A 37 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Information Menu History A 38 Adding or Editing Comments The Append Comment screen appears when you add a new comment The Edit Comments screen appears when you edit an existing comment Other than the title these screens are identical EN Edit Comment teja ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX ta e amp mu ej ee OK Abandon Date 01 20 2007 Ex 2 Reference 2 Comment PL
123. Dealer Web Site www phenombus com Dealer Site Number 999999 Note 1 Call Joe before calling Open Systems support Note 2 Customer Site Number 999999 Open Systems Technical Support United States 888 582 5000 Canada 888 582 5000 Web Site www osas com Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo NS When you finish viewing the information press any key to return to OSAS You can use the Support Information function page 2 69 on the Resource Manager Installation and Configuration menu to edit this information Applications Options Inquiry A 32 Use the Applications Options Inquiry utility to view the options and interfaces for any application You cannot use this command to change them To use this command select Applications Options Inquiry from the Other Commands menu After you enter the application ID the options and interfaces selected for the application appear When you finish viewing the information press F7 to return to OSAS Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Call a BASIC Program From any field you can call any BASIC program that does not require variables to be passed to it Follow these steps to call a BASIC program 1 Select Call a BASIC Program from the Other Commands menu 2 Enter the program you want to call 3 Enter the parameter if any for the program 4 Use the Proceed OK command to start the program 5 Press Enter to return to the field from which you accessed the Oth
124. Detail History 3 APSDHCON 4 Summary History 2 APVHS 5 Invoice History 3 APHINCON 6 Payment History 3 APHCICON APOZ Daily Work 1 Transactions 3 APENTINI A 2 Copy Recurring Entries s APPSR 3 Purchases Journal 3 APPRI A 4 Miscellaneous Debits Journal 3 APPRI B 5 Daily Sales Tax Report d APTAX 6 Change Batches 3 APCHGBAT 7 Batch Control 3 RMACB 8 Post Transactions 3 APPST End of Report 7 51 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Application Information List 7 52 File Lists The Application Information List shows the applications that are on your system and their installation information 05 22 2007 2 17 PM Information Description Base Application Version Installed Install Date Program Directory Last Maintenance Dat Description Base Application Version Installed Install Date Program Directory Last Maintenance Dat Description Base Application Version Installed Install Date Program Directory Builders Supply Application Information List Accounts Payable 6 51 YES 09 09 2003 D OSAS 651 progAP Nonex Accounts Receivable 6 51 YES 09 09 2003 D OSAS 651 progAR Nonex Bills of Materials Kitting 6 51 YES 12 05 2003 D OSAS 651 progBK Last Maintenance Dat 05 12 2006 File Lists Help Screens List 05 22 2007 System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 The Help Screens List shows the contents of an application s help file Use this list to plan cha
125. E Mail From field displays the originating e mail address Change it if you want the return e mail address to be different from the one set up in the E Mail Setup function in Resource Manager Resource Manager Reports un gt Resource Manager Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 In the To carbon copy CC and blind carbon copy BCC fields select Other and enter the e mail address or select Vendor Customer or Employee and choose from the e mail addresses on file for those respective categories depending upon installed applications or select None to leave the field blank you must choose at least one To CC or BCC address The name of the report appears in the Subject field Change the subject line 1f necessary Select Yes in the Attachment field to send the report as a text file attachment to the e mail message select No to send the report in the body of the e mail or select PDF to attach the report as a PDF file The E Mail Message dialog box appears EN E Mail Message oJ O es Commands Edit Modes Other Help xt amp emmum e eo Ok Jj Abandon Got your message Here s the report you requested Thanks Enter the message you would like included in the body of the e mail and use the Proceed OK command You are returned to the E Mail Information Screen Use one of the following commands in the Attachment File scroll region e Press Enter to edit the highlighted attachme
126. EASE NOTIFY JANE OF ANY SHORT SHIPMENTS Follow these steps to add a comment 1 If you are working with a new comment the system date appears otherwise the date entered for the comment you are editing appears Accept this date or enter a different date 2 The current terminal ID appears in the Reference field Edit this reference 1f necessary 3 Enter or edit the comment then press Enter to save the comment record When available the History command gives you access to customer history in a manner similar to Inquiry functions Select the customer for which you want to view detail information enter a date from which to view information if desired then press Enter to view invoice or payment information Use the commands at the bottom of the screen to switch between or change customers view totals or select the line item to view Use the Exit F7 command to return to the function screen from which you accessed the History command Information Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Documents The Documents command lets you view or open documents attached to certain master file records You cannot use this command to attach a document to a record instead use the appropriate File Maintenance function to attach documents Note Before you can open documents you need to have the appropriate file associations set up in the File Types function on the Resource Manager User Setup menu The entries you make in this function help OSAS
127. Edit Modes Other Help 2xaaemol e e o Ok Abandon Backed Up Yot Purge History Through 11 30 2007 Se 12 00 fa CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Resource Manager 11 5 CHAPTER 11 EIS Periodic Maintenance Purge Dashboard History 3 Select the check box if you have backed up your data files If you have not backed up your data files exit the function and do so before continuing Inquiry 4 Enter the date and time before which to purge history You can also use the Inquiry F2 command to look up the dates you have saved to history 5 Use the Proceed OK command to begin processing The system returns you to the menu when processing completes 11 6 Resource Manager CHAPTER 12 Screen Definitions List 12 3 Field Definitions List 12 5 Functions List 12 7 Setup Definitions List 12 9 Resource Manager EIS Master File Lists Use the functions on the EIS Master File Lists menu to print lists of master dashboard information These lists are excellent references for the fields functions and setups you have defined and can help you research and determine the changes you need to make to build custom dashboards Printing a Master File List You produce all EIS master file lists in the same way Use the instructions on the next page to print a master file list modifying the procedure as necessary for the list you are printing For example if the screen for the list you want to print does not contai
128. Edit Modes Other Help xt emupgees LOK Abandon Company ID Defaults Masks Location ID MN0001 D Date Mask 0 USA mm dd yyyy Bank ID FNB001 s Time Mask 0 12 Hour hh mm AM PM OSAS Web Inactive X Reg Dollars 2 9999999999 99 OSAS Web Batch ID IN Costs 4 99999999 9999 OSAS Web Order Prefix IN Prices 4 99999999 9999 IN Qtys 4 99999999 9999 Weight Unit LBS Rates 3 999999999 999 Hours 3 999999999 999 Map Lookup ID GOOGLE a Cr Limits 0 9999999999999 Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 3 5 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Company Information 3 6 Enter the default Location ID and Bank ID to use for these fields If you want to use certain data files for this company with the OSAS Web application making them available for Internet access enter Active in the OSAS Web field otherwise enter Inactive If you use the OSAS Web application Enter the Sales Order batch ID the OSAS Web application uses when posting sales orders received from customers on the Internet in the OSAS Web Batch ID field Next enter a one character to two character prefix to add to order numbers for sales orders entered through the Internet in the OSAS Web Order Prefix field This prefix identifies orders entered through the web so that you can quickly differentiate them from orders entered through Sales Order The remaining seven or six digits in the order number are incremented normally The Weight Unit applies to all item weights you enter i
129. F format 5 Use the Proceed OK command when you finish entering information into the Edit Archive Control dialog box You are returned to the Archive Control screen Override Path dialog box The Override Path dialog box appears when you press O to enter a path for output of the highlighted report from the menu list EN Override Path EFC Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xa ne mu 20e 008 ok Abandon Override Path C JOSAS76 SO_Reports Override Share Path C OSAS76 SO_Reports_Share as 1 Enter the path to which you want to write this report when you archive it in the Override Path field 2 Enter the shared path to which you want to write this report when you archive it in the Override Path field 3 Use the Proceed OK command to return to the Archive Control screen 3 57 CHAPTER 4 User Activity Inquiry User Activity Report Preferences Favorites Menu File Types Colors Keyboard Purge User Activity Resource Manager 4 3 4 7 4 15 4 17 4 21 4 23 4 25 User Setup Use the functions in the User Setup menu to set workstation preferences and manage information about user activity 4 1 User Activity Inquiry o MM If you elected to track user login activity in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 use the User Login Activity function to view OSAS activity for all workstations You can see whether users have multiple sessions open which functio
130. INES 63 SPCOLS 80 CPC alias PDL sysprint Print Dialog Laser LINES 63 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 TM alias LPD sysprint System Default Printer Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 8 alias PDD sysprint Print Dialog Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 1 alias LPW sysprint System Default Printer Wide Carriage LINES 66 SPCOL alias PDW sysprint Print Dialog Wide Carriage Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCO alias NO tcp alias TODO syswindow INVISIBLE alias XO sysgui ANTIALIASED OFF alias X1 sysgui ANTIALIASED OFF alias TOO SYSWINDOW INVISIBLE y alias T010 syswindow INVISIBLE E alias T030 syswindow INVISIBLE zj Enter edit l Append l Write Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 Resource Manager Devices 3 Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Use this screen to edit a line in the devices file add a new device to the system or write your changes to the devices file To edit a line in the devices file select the line you want to edit and press Enter The appropriate screen for that device appears where you can make changes to the device information See the corresponding screen description for more details Note If you misspell something in the config bbx file OSAS ignores that line For example if you spell the word alias incorrectly in a terminal line the screen may display incorrectly
131. If any fields contain sensitive information to which you need to limit employee access you can assign the OSAS roles you already use to EIS fields and commands When an employee does not have access to a field a string of Xs appears as that field s value See EIS Roles on page 9 25 for more information Common Ratios 8 6 Financial ratios are indications of the business s performance They demonstrate liquidity solvency and profitability Liquidity indicates the ability to pay bills as they fall due Solvency indicates the ability to pay off all obligations if you would sell out Profitability is a simple term but it can be misleading You can make a profit from earnings generated in your normal course of business or from actions that you cannot expect to repeat such as the sale of irreplaceable assets Resource Manager Working with Dashboards Executive Information Summary CHAPTER 8 The goal is to establish ratios that show whether the profits you receive are being maximized or whether other investments could yield a better return with less risk With good ratios you can identify adjustments needed to survive financially in difficult times and to succeed when your business is on good economic ground You can produce the following ratios in EIS Working capital is a measure of the liquid assets at your disposal expressed as the difference between your current assets and current liabilities For example a working capit
132. Information Customer Comments Customer History Customer Documents Item Information Item Comments Item Documents The Information menu appears on some function screens in certain applications The functions on the menu are determined by the applications installed The Information menu also gives you access to documents attached to customer vendor employee invoice or other records When the Information menu appears select the appropriate Documents command to open the Documents screen where you can view document information or open attached documents See Information Menu on page A 35 for more information Commands Edit Modes Other Information About OSAS RX te Command Help Help F1 Online Doc Shift F1 Command Description About OSAS Opens the About OSAS dialog box Command Help Opens the OSAS Key Help screen Help Lists information about the field the cursor is in Online Doc Launches your PDF file viewer and opens the docu mentation for the appropriate OSAS application Favorites Menu MM The Favorites menu operates in any of the menu formats and gives you quick and easy access to the OSAS functions you use most allowing you to add selections for entire menus or particular functions After you ve set up the menu you can access its functions either by pressing F2 or by clicking the Favorites icon on the toolbar With the Favorites menu you save time by eliminating the need to switch
133. O00 Copy To Description Type Default Key Label User Label 2 Help Screen Esc H Fl Fl Inquiry Screen Esc W F2 F2 Delete Screen Esc D F3 F3 Other Commands Screen Esc 0 FA FA Abandon Screen Esc X FS F5 Maintenance Screen Esc F F6 F6 Exit Screen Esc M Ty T7 List Screen Esc L F8 F8 Undo Edit Esc U F9 F9 Delete to EOL Edit Ctrl Z Flo F10 Unmapped Key Screen Esc A SHIFT Fl Shft Fl Information Screen Esc I SHIFT F2 Shft F2 Unnapped Key Screen Esc B SHIFT F3 Shft F3 Unmapped Key Screen Esc SHIFT F4 Shft F4 Enter edit Write Company Rn verity Inquiry 2 Enter the workstation ID for which you want to edit the keyboard definition Resource Manager 4 23 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Keyboard 4 24 The Copy From field appears if you enter a new workstation ID To copy the keyboard definition from another workstation enter that workstation ID If you have a multiuser system save time when you set up workstations with similar keyboards by copying a keyboard definition to other workstations Enter the workstation ID to which you want to copy the current keyboard definition in the Copy To field and press Enter To copy the keyboard definitions to all workstations enter ALL and press Enter If you are changing keys on one workstation only press Enter to skip this field To save time copy keyboard definitions to all workstations then edit the few workstations that need differing definitions later The command description type
134. OMPA setup to display only information from company A the COMPAB setup to display information from both companies and B and so on However this method can also be time consuming When you create a new setup to use with a specific dashboard you also need to modify all the field definitions on a dashboard to use the new setup which takes time Use this method if you plan to customize several dashboards and add them to the menu For example you could have a set of dashboards for company A a different set for company B and then add each set to the menu for quick access later without the need for extra modification Resource Manager Setup Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Follow these steps to work with setup definitions 1 Resource Manager Select Setup Definitions from the EIS File Maintenance submenu The Setup Definitions screen appears a EEE e c les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xulae mnl e ee Setup ID BANKACCT s Function ID GLMYTD 4 Description All Bank Accounts Type From Thru Company ID GL Accounts Pe Enter edit Description Append Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal To00 ovR Select the Setup ID to work with or enter a new one If you enter an existing setup ID its Function ID and Description appear If you entered a new setup ID the Copy From field appears Ent
135. P Statement Layout Help File 3 072 Shared Files for IN on Applications osas75 progRM data INHZ Hazardous Waste Codes 489 472 INTB IN Tables 10 240 Shared Files for JO on Applications osas75 progRM data JOTB JO Tables 6 144 Action Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Page Active Keys 15 19 15 16 25 1 408 103 17 322 224 10 2 216 1 6 19 CHAPTER 7 Laser Label Setup 7 3 Report Criteria 7 5 Import Definitions 7 7 Menus 7 11 Application Information 7 15 Help Screens 7 19 Inquiry Window Definitions 7 23 Global Inquiry Definitions 7 27 State Codes 7 37 Country Codes 7 39 Change Field Definitions 7 41 System Messages 7 47 Purge Post Codes 7 49 File Lists 7 51 Inquiry Translation 7 61 System File Utilities Because you can customize OSAS to best fit you and your business many of the functions on the System File Utilities menu help you quickly change how OSAS works without needing any special programming knowledge For example use the Menus and Favorites Menus to customize OSAS menus to reflect your workflow 7 1 Laser Label Setup oo M Use the Laser Label Setup function to set defined label types which can be used for customers and vendors It is highly recommended
136. Press P to print the selected report e Press B to print all tagged files at once e Press G to go to a specific report line This command is available only when there is more than one screen of reports 14 4 Resource Manager Archive Report Control Print Manager CHAPTER 14 Searching Reports for Text You can search all archived reports except PDF files for specific text For example you could search all reports for a specific vendor or item ID You can also use partial text searches to locate terms that have similar beginnings or endings Follow these steps to search all active reports for specific text 1 Resource Manager If you want to search for the text in multiple reports tag the reports to include in the search on the Archive Report Control screen To search only one report select that report Press X on the Archive Report Control screen The Search for Text screen appears E Search for Text eJ a Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt aalmal 7e ee ci Search for ace Enter the text you want to search for and use the Proceed OK command to begin the search You must enter the text you are searching for exactly as it appears in the print job uppercase and lowercase letters must match exactly For example if you are searching for the employee ID BOU001 you can enter all six characters BOU001 just the first few characters BOU or just the last few characters U001 but not lowercas
137. Recurring Header File 10 1 6 APRLx Recurring Line Items 10 1 6 APTDx Transaction Line Items 8 1 6m Line No of E edit Append Goto Delete Field ID Field ID Sort Files Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal tooo ovr 3 Enter or edit the field information in the top half of the screen e Enter the field s Description and the Application ID to which the field belongs e Enter the file name of the Master File where the field is defined If the master file is company specific append a lowercase x to the file name Then edit the master File Description if necessary If this field contains numeric values select the Numeric Field check box or enter Y in text mode if not clear the box or enter N Enter the Field Number within the master file where this field is located e If this is not a numeric field enter the starting position within the specified field number where this field begins in the Field Start field Change Field Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 If this is not a numeric field enter the total number of characters that this field uses in the Field Length field Select the Window ID of the inquiry window you want to use when entering field values in the Change Fields function Enter edit the selection value associated with the inquiry window in the SELVAL field if necessary 4 The scrolling region in the bottom half of the screen lists the files in which the field is used and the
138. Resource Manager OSAS 7 6 User Guide OSAS OSAS Resource Manager User s Guide Version 7 6 2210 RM76 2010 Open Systems Holdings Corp All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Open Systems Inc OPEN SYSTEMS and OSAS are registered trademarks of Open Systems Holdings Corp All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Open Systems Accounting Software for UNIX uses PKZIP utilities from PKWARE Inc 648 N Plankinton Ave Suite 220 Milwaukee WI 53203 Phone 414 289 9788 Internet www pkware com Printed in U S A This manual is recyclable October 2010 Release 7 6 Document Number 2210 RM76 This document has been prepared to conform to the current release version of OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Because of our extensive development efforts and our desire to further improve and enhance the software inconsistencies may exist between the software and the documentation in some instances Call your customer support representative if you encounter an inconsistency Open Systems Inc 4301 Dean Lakes Boulevard Shakopee Minnesota 55379 General Telephone 952 403 5700 General Fax 952 496 2495 Support Telephone 800 582 5000 Support Fax 952 403 5870 Internet Address www osas com CONTENTS Chapter 1 Welcome to OSAS 1 1 About Resource Manager 05 1 5 Starting OSA
139. S press F7 to exit to the menu without saving To restore any original values that you changed use the Abandon F5 command If you change the paths for the Data Sample System or Report Writer directories within the OSAS Directories function and write your changes a message appears Select the action that you want to take e To copy the existing data files on the application server to the new location on the data server select Copy This action leaves a copy of the files in the old location on the application server which may quickly become outdated e To move the data files to the new location without leaving a copy select Move This action does not delete the files from the old location until after every file has been copied to the new location successfully Resource Manager Directories Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 For example if the process fails due to a power outage only the files that were copied successfully before the outage occurred will be found in the new location Since the process failed midway all files are still retained in the old location To finish the process delete the files from the new location and try again If you want to manually copy or move the files to the new location yourself select None This action leaves all files in their original locations Errors may result during OSAS processing if you do not copy or move the files to the new location manually If you are using a mix
140. S concisa rra A 1 11 Navigating OSAS 0 0 0 0 1 15 A 1 31 Repo mii o ee 1 35 Section Resource Manager OSAS Administration Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 2 1 Install ApplicatiOnS ooooooooooooooooo 2 3 IN He 2 9 Roles uer ERO USUARIO Ee 2 19 Devices oe ERAN ne VAGOS a 2 23 Directories morser tenye eE SRL ESSE ee ene S 2 51 User Defined Field Setup o ooo ooooo 2 59 E Mail Setup 0 0 ee eee eee eee 2 63 Address Mapping 0 0 0 0 eee eee 2 65 Support Information sss esee ess 2 69 E Mail History Report o oooocoocooom oo 2 71 Purge E Mail History 0 02 2 73 Remove Applications 0008 2 75 Company Setup 3 1 Company Information 0 3 3 Bank Accounts cede abe A alee 3 0 Accounting Periods 000 0005 3 21 Data File Creation 0 00 cece eee ee 3 25 Data File Conversion 0 00 eee eee 3 27 Options and Interfaces ooooooooooomo 3 31 Form Codes 0 0 0 0 cece cence eee een 3 35 Form Printers nes eee ep dea teg 3 37 iii CONTENTS Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Application TableS ooooooooooooooooo 3 39 GL Account Audit Report o o oooo o 3 41 Ele LIS citada 3 43 E Mail Queue 0 0 cee cee eee eee 3 49 Archive Control 0 00 00 eese 3 55 User Setup 4 1 User Activ
141. Site field Use the Proceed OK command to save any changes and return to the menu 2 70 Resource Manager E Mail History Report o M Use the E Mail History Report function to print a report containing information about e mail messages The report pulls information from the OSEL file to list the e mail addresses of the sender and recipient along with the date subject and OSAS application and menu title from which messages have been sent Sample Report 05 22 2007 Builders Supply 4 41 PM E Mail History Report Sorted By Sequence Number Company ID E Mail From E Mail Date E Mail Time Terminal ID E Mail To E Mail Subject E Mail CC ication ID Menu Title 00000001 johnl builderssup com 5 07 8 09 AM rbernard acme com Data File Allocation Report RM Data File Allocation Report 00000002 saram builderssup com 04 17 07 12 10 PM bhumphrey aceplumbingsupply com Vendor Detail List AP Vendor Detail List 00000003 saram builderssup com 04 17 07 37 PM bhumprhey aceplumbingsupply com Order Fulfillment Report SO Order Fulfillment Report 00000004 johnlebuilderssup com 04 22 07 4 23 PM juliec bigmail com Open Order Report PO Open Order Report 00000005 billw builderssup com 04 22 07 4 35 PM robin bauer altos com Purchases Journal PO Purchases Journal End of Report Resource Manager 2 71 Purge E Mail History o M Use the Purge E Mail History to clear the OSEL E mail History file This file
142. System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 When OSAS encounters an unexpected error details about the error are written to alog file OSERX Information recorded about each error includes the application and workstation ID date time error number line number program in which the error occurred and line listing Print the Error Log to view the errors you encountered if any while using the software 05 22 2007 10 46 AM Application Workstation Error Number Program Name Error Message Line Listing Application Workstation Error Number Program Name Error Message Line Listing Builders Supply Error Log AP TOOO Date 04 24 2007 47 Substring Out of Range APCJPEX1 BASIC ERROR 47 LINE 1050 PROGRAM APCJPEX1 1050 IF S1 1 OR S1 3 AND V9 5 1 Y GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE VE7 5 1 THEN GOSUB 2000 AP T000 Date 05 18 2007 42 Nonexistent Numeric Subscript APCJACT BASIC ERROR 42 LINE 3210 PROGRAM APCJACT REM 3210 IF GUI 0 THEN PRINT CF ELSE LET LN 0 1 GUI_ID 7000 GOSUB GENLINE GOSUB DISABLE_FIELDS 7 59 Inquiry Translation MM Use the Inquiry Translation function to modify code translation values in the application translation files Code translations allow F2 Inquiry windows to translate specific coded values into readable values for example you can translate the Sales Order Order Status code of 3 to the more meanful value of Verified See
143. User ID for whom you want to edit report criteria 7 5 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Report Criteria The scroll area displays the criteria saved for this user including the program program parameter entered description for the report criteria and whether that criteria is being used as a default 2 Scroll to the criteria you want to edit and choose one of the following commands e Press U to select a different user ID e Press E to edit the criteria see Edit Line dialog box on page 7 6 e Press V to view the template information for the report criteria e Press R to remove all report criteria for the user e Press P to remove criteria for the highlighted program for all users e Press C to copy the report criteria to another user ID Edit Line dialog box The Edit Line Dialog box allows you to edit the description and default settings of the report criteria EN Edit Line eee Commands Edit Modes Other Help XxXt 59e mul eee OK J Abandon User ID scottm Program Name POPRREQ Description August Purchase Requisition Report Set as Default a Company H 08 19 2010 Terminal T000 OVR The dialog box lists the user ID and the originating program name for the criteria To edit the pick criteria for the report pick screen use the following commands e Editthe Description of the report criteria for identification e Check the Set Default box to set the report criteria to automa
144. VR 7 15 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Application Information 7 16 To view or edit information for an application enter the Application Code and press Enter to list information for that application in the fields below The remaining fields on the screen are available only after you enter the application e You can use the Description and Short Description fields to change the application name that appears on the main menu If you use the text or graphical menu edit the Description to change the application s name If you use the MDI menu edit the Short Description to change the name that appears on the application s tab For your changes to take effect change the Installed field to NO and save your changes exit and re enter the Application Information function and then change the Installed field back to YES If you use the MDI menu you also need to close and reopen OSAS to see the changes e For add on or enhanced applications the Base Application field indicates which base application is extended by the application you selected above for example SO extends the base application AR For base applications this field is blank e The Installed field indicates whether an application is installed and appears on the menu To prevent an application that you have from appearing on the menu enter NO Likewise if you want an installed application that doesn t appear to be listed on the menu enter YES If you use the M
145. W Font blank Setup blank Dialog blank Print Dialog Wide Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 136 Compress Carriage Dot Matrix Cols 240 Top Margin blank Left Margin PDW blank Font blank Setup blank Dialog Yes Print Setup Wide Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 136 Compress Carriage Dot Matrix Cols 240 Top Margin blank Left Margin PSW blank Font blank Setup Yes Dialog blank Aligning Laser Forms There are many discrepancies in the way different laser printers print some print higher or lower than others or shift characters left to right There can even be printing differences between two identical printers The first place to check when you notice improper alignment is your printer To make sure lines and characters align properly when printing any form to a laser printer set the default lines per page to 60 to keep lines from creeping up the form Follow these steps to check the lines per page setting 1 Access the printing menu on the printer itself 2 Press the item button until the FORM LINES entry appears The must be 60 if it is another value change it Resource Manager 2 35 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Sysprint Devices Direct Printers 2 36 Up and down differences are usually slightly less than one line and can only be resolved by programming code to shift one full line at a time Similarly left to right diff
146. X C The Workstation Colors file stores information about the color sets used for a workstation s 14 windows and screens in text mode Set up the colors of your workstation through the Colors function page 4 21 The Country file stores information about countries such as the country code and name The Conversion file is used to compare the new application conversion and data files with the current application files This file is used to determine what version is on the system The Conversion Header file stores general conversion information The Company file stores the company names addresses and numeric mask defaults associated with company IDs Each time you define a new company using the Company Information function page 3 3 a record is added to this file The Copyrights Messages file stores copyright messages for applications enhancements and add ons The Device Setup file stores information needed to construct a maintenance screen for the Devices function page 2 23 The Workstation Defaults file holds information about the default values used for each workstation toggle defaults field defaults and directory defaults Set up these values for each workstation using the Preferences function page 4 7 The E mail Defaults file stores information about the e mail addresses you set up and maintain through the E Mail Setup function page 2 63 The system uses this information to create the e mail message correctly when you
147. a log file of users who log on to OSAS and their terminal ID Select Yes to log the last 2 functions accessed by each user by terminal ID select No if you do not want to track user activity OSAS can automatically generate sequential file names for the reports archived in Print Manager Select Yes to use this option otherwise select No to manually assign archive file names at print time Unless you manually keep track of file names we recommend you set this option to Yes Select Yes to keep a history log file of all reports printed through Print Manager otherwise select No Select All to list all files saved by Print Manager in the Active Report Control and Archive Report Control functions select User ID to list the Print Manager files created by the current user ID or select Terminal to list the Print Manager files created by the current terminal ID EIS allows you to set role based permission for particular fields Select Yes to allow the system to import roles set up in Resource Manager to EIS field level Select No if you do not want to use roles in EIS Select Yes to keep value file history for EIS fields accessed from the Global Dashboard Update function page 11 3 otherwise select No Select Yes to save e mail message history such as From To addresses date and subject in the OSEL file otherwise select No OSAS accesses this file to print the E Mail History Report page 2 71 If a function is not included in a role y
148. account numbers stored there This function is also available in the Master Files List menu of each application that stores GL account numbers in its files or tables but is limited to auditing GL account information for that application only To perform the audit select GL Account Audit Report in the Company Setup menu The GL Account Audit Report screen appears EN GL Account Audit Report fe ea Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt malaol 7 l ee Select the Applications to Include in the Audit counts Payable Include AR Accounts Receivable j Include BK Bills of Materials Kitting 4 Include BR Bank Reconciliation Include GL General Ledger Include IN Inventory Include JO Job Cost Include PA Payroll Include PO Purchase Order Include RM Resource Manager Include so Sales Order y oo E L Enter toggle All None Done Company H 0972672007 Terminal Tooo ovn The screen lists all installed applications currently interfaced with general ledger Use the commands to add or remove applications from the audit report e Press Enter to toggle a selected application between Include and Exclude 3 41 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup GL Account Audit Report e Press Ato include all applications in the GL account audit report e Press Nto set all applications back to Exclude status e Press Dto run the GL account audit report
149. al Entries Unposted Entry 001422 GL Account 1010 Not Found End of Report 3 42 File Lists Te Ml Use the functions on the File Lists menu to print lists of company setup information These lists are excellent references for the fields functions and setups you have defined and can help you when gathering information about your company or companies Printing a File List You produce all file lists in the same way Use the instructions on the next page to print a file list modifying the procedure as necessary for the list you are printing For example if the screen for the list you want to print does not contain check box options ignore that step and continue to the next Follow the steps on the following page to print a file list 3 43 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup File Lists Select the list you want to print from the File Lists menu The selection screen for that list appears The Bank Accounts List screen is shown below as an example A Bank Accounts List u fo o s Commands Edit Modes Other Help zxael elmao e ee OK _ Abenden Bank Account ID From FNBO01 a Thu SNBOO1 3 Print Summary List Detail List Print by Bank Account GL Account Include Bank Accounts Only Credit Cards Only Both CompanyH 10 09 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR Inquiry 6 Select the range of values to print in the list boxes Leave these fields blank to select all values or enter value
150. al T000 OVR Note The reports that are listed depend on the setting of the Display Print Manager Constrol Lists option in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you set the option to User ID or Terminal only reports that match the current user or terminal ID are listed Resource Manager 14 3 CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Archive Report Control Use these commands to work with the reports listed e Press Enter to tag reports to include them in a batch Tagged files can all be printed at once without supervision or searched for specific text Press E to edit the selected report s description When the Edit Line Item screen appears edit the description Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes e Press T to toggle the reports descriptions between the report name and its file path and name e Press X to search the selected report or all tagged reports for specific text The Search for Text screen appears See page 14 5 for more information You can search for text only in reports saved in text format reports saved in PDF format are not searchable with this function e Press O to open the tagged reports with the default viewer for that file type e Press V to view path and file information about the selected report e Press Sto sort the reports in the list then select the sort order to use You can sort by Description Date and Time from most recent to oldest User ID Terminal ID e
151. al of 50 000 is negligible if your current asset base is 10 000 000 A 0 5 percent drop in your current assets wipes out your working capital If your current asset base is only 100 000 and your working assets 50 000 your working capital is high Current ratio is a measure of your ability to meet current liabilities as they fall due It is expressed as the amount of working capital divided by the amount of liability If your ratio is too low you lack liquidity If it is too high you may not be getting the best return available Quick ratio is a measure of your ability to pay bills without relying on reducing inventories through sales It is expressed as financial assets that can be readily turned to cash divided by current liabilities Days receivables is the average number of days it takes you to collect receipts once you have issued the bill Number of inventory turns is the number of times in a year your inventory turns over For example if you have 100 000 of product in inventory the number 6 means that you sold 600 000 of product during the year Debt to equity ratio is a measure of your business s basic financial strength expressed as the amount of liabilities divided by the amount of equity Debt to asset ratio is the amount you owe divided by the amount of assets your business employs Return on equity is expressed as net income divided by net worth Return on assets ROA is the return on assets employed expressed as
152. ance functions or to add comments about a customer item vendor employee or job The Comments screen appears after you access the Comments command The Customer Comments screen is shown below as an example ustomer Co ts bol fata Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xulmaemol e e e OK Jan Customer ID ACE001 ACE BUILDERS Ref ID End Date 08 21 2007 FR Date Ref Comment 01 20 2007 01 20 2007 01 14 2006 01 04 2006 01 04 2006 PLEASE NOTIFY JANE OF ANY SHORT SHIPMENTS TRACER PUT ON LAST SHIPMENT ACE AGREED TO PAY 3000 ON 2 1 PLEASE NOTIFY JANE AT ACE WHEN ITEM IS MAILED CALLED CUSTOMER ABOUT PAST DUE BALANCE e w n ES Ed RefiD endDate Append Enter edit Nextscreen Prev screen Goto Company H 08712007 Terminaitooo Ov 1 Enter the ID for which you want to view or enter comments in the ID field at the top of the screen The Inquiry F2 command is available 2 The ID of the terminal you are working at appears in the Ref ID field To work with comments for only the default reference ID press Enter To work with comments for a different reference ID enter that ID To work with all comments clear this field and press Enter 3 Enterthe date of the most recent comment you want to work with in the End Date field or press Enter to work with all comments Information Menu OSAS Menus APPEN
153. and to launch your web browser See File Types on page 4 17 for more information on the start command If you use OSAS on Mac OS X enter usr bin open in the Web Browser box This command launches the appropriate application for registered file extensions on the Mac If you want to launch your e mail software from within an internet address field anywhere in OSAS using either the right click menu the Commands menu or the Shift F3 hot key enter the full path and file name of your e mail software If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment enter the path to the executable file on the client not on the application server If you leave this field blank on Windows workstations OSAS uses the default Windows start command to launch the e mail software See File Types on page 4 17 for more information on the start command If you use OSAS on Mac OS X enter usr bin open in the E Mail Client box This command launches the appropriate application for registered file extensions on the Mac OSAS uses the e mail address you enter here first when creating e mail messages If that field is blank OSAS then uses the address entered in the E Mail From field in the Installation and Configuration E Mail Setup function page 2 63 Enter the e mail address you want placed in the From field of e mail messages you send using OSAS Leave this field blank if you want to use the e mail address entered in the E Mail Setup function You ca
154. ange the subject line if necessary 3 51 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup E Mail Queue 3 52 Select Yes in the Attachment field to send the report as a text file attachment to the e mail message select No to send the report in the body of the e mail or select PDF to attach the report as a PDF file The E Mail Message dialog box appears EN E Mail Message Fej e Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2x te e moa e ok Jj Abandon Got your message Here s the report you requested Thanks Enter the message you would like included in the body of the e mail and use the Proceed OK command You are returned to the E Mail Information Screen Use one of the following commands in the Attachment File scroll region e Press Enter to edit the highlighted attachment if any Browse to or enter the name of the file you would like to attach in the Edit Attachment dialog box see Edit Append Attachment dialog box on page 3 53 e Press A to add an attachment to the e mail Browse to or enter the name of the file you would like to attach in the Append Attachment dialog box see Edit Append Attachment dialog box on page 3 53 e Press Gto go to a specific attachment line item this command is only available if there are more than six attachments to the e mail e Press H to change the header information of the e mail including the E Mail From field the recipient s the subject line and the at
155. application Each application addresses a different phase of your financial operations together they form a powerful accounting solution to your daily and periodic accounting needs About this Guide This guide describes Resource Manager functions covers processes and procedures and contains information to help you manage the OSAS system e Chapter 1 introduces OSAS and the Resource Manager application and contains details about how to navigate within the software e Section I OSAS Administration describes the functions you use to set up and maintain Resource Manager and the entire OSAS system This section contains function descriptions in chapters ordered by menu This order may not exactly mirror the appearance of the Resource Manager menu e Section II Executive Information Summary details how to use EIS and contains descriptions of the EIS dashboards and related EIS functions Resource Manager 1 1 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS e Section III describes Print Manager and contains its related function descriptions e The Appendixes contain supplementary material about Resource Manager e The Index is a topical reference to the information in this guide Conventions In this manual and in all other OSAS manuals we ve used some conventions to present information to you in the clearest manner possible When the Inquiry or Maintenance commands or both are available for a field the Inquiry and Maint f
156. appropriate for your setup some apply only if you use text screens e Ifyou want to customize the menu or add Favorites menus to individual workstations use the Menus and Favorites Menus functions Favorites menus are specific to individual workstations Use the appropriate functions on the Master File Lists menu to print lists of the information you have set up for your records and for later reference Consult the function descriptions in this guide for details on individual functions Resource Manager 1 9 Starting OSAS MM Starting OSAS in Windows To start OSAS on a computer running Windows double click the OSAS shortcut on the desktop or access the program from the Start menu You can set up OSAS such that it always opens using a specific company To do so open the OSAS program shortcut properties and enteryour company ID along with their corresponding parameter marks in the Target box For example using Sam as your user ID and H as your company ID enter the following be sure to replace the directories below with the correct ones if necessary C basis bin bbj exe osasstrt txt q tT00 cD osas70 progrm config bbx uSam cH This path uses these parameters e The q parameter allows OSAS to open faster by suppressing splash screens e The t parameter required for PRO 5 specifies the terminal you are using e The c parameter specifies the path to the config bbx file e The u parameter specifies your use
157. ards Te Using Commands Use the commands to move around a dashboard update or recalculate its field values view detailed information about a field or access a different dashboard In graphical mode access a command either from the EIS Functions menu or by right clicking on the screen and selecting the command from the menu that appears In text mode access the command by pressing the highlighted key Some commands are available only within certain fields e Select Update or press U to update and refresh field information when you re working on a network where others might have changed field data e Select Recalc or press R to recalculate only the selected field so that you have the latest information e Select Global or press G to recalculate all the dashboard s fields for the latest information When the verification message appears select Yes to refresh all fields or No to return to the dashboard without changing values e Select Setup or press S to view or change the selected field s setup definition The Setup screen appears See Setup Definitions on page 9 11 for more information e Select Field or press F to view or change the selected field s definition The Field Definitions screen appears See EIS Field Definitions on page 9 3 for more information e Select View or press V to view the selected field s Field ID and Description the date it was last updated and its status e Select Edit or press E to use the D
158. are on your system The list also identifies the sales and purchases tax collected for each tax class in each tax location 11 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 4 50 PM Tax Locations List By Tax Location General Ledger Accounts Tax on Tax Loc Name Level Tax Auth Tax ID Tax Liability Refundable Frt Mise ca California Sales Tax 1 ca 45 983459823 203800 203800 NO NO Tax Description Sales Tax Class Exp Acct Purch Tax Ref Tax Taxable Nontaxable Tax Calculated Over Short Refundable 00 Consumer Goods 4 000 Sales 29316 14 46522 97 1209 64 1172 65 36 99 806000 4 000 000 Purch 3521 24 00 140 85 140 85 00 00 01 Resale Sales 000 Sales 00 5654 00 oo DO 00 000 000 Purch 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 Ind Agr Prod 6 000 Sales 205 52 00 12 33 12 33 00 806000 6 000 000 Purch 25002 47 00 1500 17 1500 15 02 00 TOTAL FOR LOCATION CA Sales 29521 66 52176 97 1221 97 1184 98 36 99 Purch 28523 71 00 1641 02 1641 00 02 00 Resource Manager 5 17 CHAPTER 6 View File Contents 6 3 Change File Size 6 5 File Rebuild Verify 6 7 Purge Data Records 6 9 Change Fields 6 11 Audit Document Links 6 15 Data File Allocation Report 6 19 Database Utilities The functions on the Database Utilities menu allow you to work directly with your system data files You can view file contents and change file sizes work with application tables rebuild and verify files define customer fields for your records and even purge da
159. arterly or yearly basis Follow these steps to print the Sales Tax Report 1 Select Sales Tax Report from the Application Setup menu The Sales Tax Report selection screen appears EN Sales Tax Report eJ o Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help gt xa nemo 2e es OK Abandon Tax Authority From Thru Tax Location From Thru Print By Tax Authority Print Sales Purchases CA TX CA TXHOUS Zero Balance Tax Classes Zero Balance Tax Locations 22 Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Inquiry 2 Select the Tax Authority and Tax Location to include in the report Enter values into a combination of these fields to include only the data you want Resource Manager 5 13 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Sales Tax Report 3 Select the Print By option you want to use to organize the report 4 Select the Print check boxes or enter Y in text mode to include the specified information in the report clear the check boxes or enter N if you do not want to include that type of information 5 Select how to output the report See Outputting Reports on page 1 36 for information on producing reports Sample Report 11 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 4 41 PM Sales Tax Report By Tax Location General Ledger Accounts Tax on Tax Loc Name Level Tax Auth Tax ID Tax Liability Refundable Frt Misc ca California Sales Tax 1 CA 45 983459823 203800 203800 NO NO Tax Descript
160. arting key you entered As each record appears you can take one of three actions e Select Yes or press F3 to delete the record from the file e Select No or press Enter to leave the record in the file e Use the Exit F7 command to leave all remaining records in the file and return to the Database Utilities menu After you process the last record in the file enter another file name from which to purge records or press F7 to return to the Database Utilities menu Change Fields o M Use the Change Fields function to change any code from one value to another This function changes codes for any application To produce a list of fields changed use the Print Log feature A sample of the log appears on page 6 14 Select Change Fields from the Database Utilities menu The Change Fields screen appears J Change Fields a e Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help _ x xz lake a2 86 OK Field ID AP BATCH ID 4 Print Log Orginal Value New Value Fie Description rime E Tag on 1 AP Transaction Control Fi Short cd 4 AP LotSerialized Fie Shot m a Transaction Detail File shot m a Transaction Headers Short Ea DF Batch 1D Long E DFx Batch ID Log M IN Detail History Long Y Control File Control Rec Short Fi Lot Serial Invoiced File Short vi Lot Serial Received File
161. as this information is defined in the Report Writer Data Dictionary If you are entering a new window enter these values e Enter a descriptive name for the field in the Data Name field e Enter the data type in the Typ field Enter 1 to display characters 2 to display numbers 3 to display dates 4 to display telephone numbers 5 to display social security numbers or 6 to use an inquiry code translation definition Inquiry e For numeric data types enter the company defined user mask to use for the field in the Mask Tran ID field For translation data types enter the translation ID you want to use or use the Inquiry F2 command to look up and select an ID from the list that appears See Inquiry Translation on page 7 61 for more about setting up inquiry code translations 7 25 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities 7 26 Inquiry Window Definitions Enter to format it as a dollar amount with two decimal places and commas inserted where necessary 1 7 to format it with that number of decimal places or Z to display totals of zero when applicable e In the Fmt field enter a the way the data should be formatted Enter to format it as a dollar amount with two decimal places and commas inserted where necessary 1 7 to format it with that number of decimal places or Z to display totals of zero when applicable Enter the number of the data name s field in the record in the Fld field Enter the character in the field at
162. ashboard Editor to modify the current dashboard The Dashboard Editor screen for the current dashboard appears See Dashboard Editor on page 9 29 for more information Resource Manager 13 3 CHAPTER 13 Executive Information Summary Working with Dashboards e Select Load or press L to load and open a different dashboard then select the dashboard you want to open e Select History or press H to view the dashboard using saved field history from a different date This command is not available if the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to NO in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 You can use roles to limit access to EIS dashboard commands See EIS Roles on page 9 25 for more information Displaying Specific Information on Dashboards The fields on the built in dashboards use setup definitions that automatically pull information from all companies accounts locations and the like that are defined in OSAS If you want to pull and display information from only one source such as a specific company for example or from a range within that source such as a range of locations for example you need to modify the setup definitions used by the fields to specify the range you want to use For example the fields on the Company Summary dashboard use the COMP setup definition among others By default the range in the COMP setup definition is blank meaning that data is pulled from all companies d
163. ata dictionary files and stock reports used by the General Report Writer application e Select Online Doc to reinstall the PDF files for the application manuals e Select Productivity Reports to reinstall the application s productivity reports These Microsoft Excel reports connect directly to OSAS data and allow you to use spreadsheet tools to manipulate the information e Select Graphical Screens to reinstall the BRC files used by OSAS graphical screens If you press A to reinstall all applications OSAS automatically reinstalls all application components as well 2 After selecting the applications to install press D to begin the reinstallation process OSAS copies extracts and removes files as necessary and restarts when the process completes Installing Follow these steps to install OSAS updates Updates 1 Download the zip update file to a directory for example c temp Note Install only one zip update file at a time 2 6 Resource Manager Install Applications Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 2 Use the pkzip utility included with OSAS or another zip extraction utility WinZip for example to extract the files from the zip file you downloaded 3 Select Directories from the Installation and Configuration menu When the Directories screen appears enter the directory in which you downloaded and extracted the update files in the Install path Use the Proceed OK command to save the change and return
164. ation gathered from the SOORDERS function and COMP setup on the previous page with another function and setup that returns values and counts for transactions entered in Accounts Receivable for the same company To do this you would need to add a new line to the field definition and enter the AR function and corresponding setup ID You could then use this information in a formula to calculate the total number of orders entered in SO and AR for a given company 9 6 Resource Manager EIS Field Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Working with Formulas To view or enter the math formula the field uses to calculate and display its final value from those you collected with functions and setups press M on the EIS Field Definitions screen The Math Formula screen appears and lists the formula used for the field ZZ Sloss Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Field ID SOTOTAL 4 Description Total SO Orders Display Mask 999 999 999 00 Function ID Setup ID aa pesooosos eoun ea EN Math Formula eje gt Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xelae mo e 009 OK Abandon FIN F1 3 4F 15 4F 7 F1 8 F1 13 F2 1 2 LS Company H 1272872007 Terminal oon ovR Each Fx variable in the formula refers to the functions used to return values in the order in which they appear on the ElS Field Definitions screen In the sample illustration F1 refers to the SOORDERS
165. ations screen s scrolling region and press Enter The Edit Line screen appears EN Edit Line Sew Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2X tE a na 206 80 ok _ Abandon Tax Class 00 Description Consumer Goods Taxable Sales 00 Sales Tax Percent 0 500 Nontaxable Sales 00 Purch Tax Percent 0 500 Tax Collected 00 Refundable Percent 0 000 Expense Acct 806000 a Taxable Purchases 00 Nontaxable Purchases 00 Tax Paid 00 Tax Refundable 00 On the left side of the screen enter the sales tax percentage purchase tax percentage and refundable percentage if available for the location to assign to the tax class for the location then enter the expense account for the location If you are setting up OSAS and its tax locations enter the initial amounts of tax collected on sales and purchases in the fields on the right side of the screen Afterwards avoid editing these fields as OSAS updates the fields for each tax class within each tax location when you post invoices Editing these fields manually can cause errors in your accounting data Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Tax Locations screen Deleting Tax Classes from Tax Locations 5 8 To delete a tax class from the selected tax location select the you want to delete on the Tax Locations screen and press F3 When the confirmation message appears select Yes to delete the tax class from the tax location or No to return to the Tax Classe
166. available in graphical mode and gives you more information on using the Favorites Other Commands and Information menus available in both graphical and text modes A 1 Main Menus MM To access a command from one of the menus on the main menu screen click a menu title The commands for that menu appear followed by any associated hot key combinations in brackets lt gt To use a command click the command name or press the hot key combination Each menu is described below APPENDIX A OSAS Menus File Menu A 4 Main Menus Views Tools Favorites Other User Help Sample dataset F5 Workstation date F6 Exit Command F7 Description Sample data set Workstation date Application Setup Exit Toggles between Sample and Live data Opens the Workstation Date screen where you can change the workstation date See Workstation Date on page 1 14 for more information If you use the MDI menu the Application Setup command is also available Use this command to switch to a different fiscal year when you are inside the General Ledger or Payroll menus If you use the graphical or text menu press F9 to change fiscal years Exits from OSAS Main Menus OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Modes Menu File Modes Tools Favorites Other User Help Y GUl Functions Shift F6 Scale Sizes d 10096 12596 150 175 200 Custom Shift F7 Command Description GUI Functions Toggles between graphical and text function s
167. board History Pop Up Calendar Inventory Price Calculator The Other Commands menu gives you access to additional OSAS commands not directly related to the function you re using See Other Commands Menu on page A 17 for more information APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Scroll Commands Menu Modes Other Information Help Commands Function Menus First Line Home Previous Page Page Up Previous Line Up Next Line Down Next Page Page Down Last Line End Insert Insert Delete F3 The Scroll Commands menu appears only on screens with scroll regions Command Description First Line Previous Page Previous Line Next Line Next Page Last Line Insert Delete Jump Moves the cursor to the first data entry field Displays the previous page Moves the cursor up to the previous line Moves the cursor down to the following line Displays the following page Moves the cursor to the last data entry field Inserts characters between pre existing entries in a field Deletes the selected characters Moves the cursor to the next section of the screen in some functions Function Menus Inventory Lookups Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Commands Edit Modes Other Inventory Lookups Help Alias Lookup Shift F3 Customer Yendor Lookup Shift F4 Detail Lookup Shift F5 Lot Lookup Shift F6 Serial Lookup Shift F7 Description Lookup Shift F8 If you interface other OSAS applications with Inventory and the cursor
168. cation and copyright information The system uses label information to verify that the appropriate installation media is installed and that the copyright information is merged into the system copyright file The Install Last Task file stores BBx or BBj statements that perform special functions after the normal installation of an application The Menu file stores the menu records that appear on the screen for a company or application The system updates the main menu for a company when you create data files edit the main menu or remove an application The Message file stores the system messages for all applications To view or change system messages for an application use the System Messages function page 7 47 The Options and Interfaces file stores detailed information about the options and interfaces selected for a specific application The Option Linkage file stores the instructions that apply to a particular application and sets the options switch of another application to the same value to ensure that option settings are consistent across all applications Resource Manager xxTB xxWIND XXXXXXXX GUI XXXXXXXX SCR CNVTLOG EIFDDTA EIFDHDR EIFUDTA EIFUHDR EIHIST File Descriptions APPENDIX C The Tables file stores information that is relevant to a particular application For example the general table records contain information such as the table ID number of columns table type and table data The W
169. cations you do not use General Ledger Sales Order and or Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and or Accounts Payable Inventory Bill of Materials Kitting and then any other applications If you do not have Accounts Receivable or Sales Order you must create Resource Manager files and build tax information before you convert your other applications You can convert data files across multiple versions in one process However to convert from version 4 1 to 7 6 in one process and retain source files you must have enough available disk space for six copies of your files For example if you have 100 megabytes of Accounts Receivable data you need at least 600 megabytes of available disk space to store source files for versions 4 1 4 5 5 0 5 1 6 1 and 6 5 To save disk space convert each application check the results and purge directories source files for older versions as you go or answer YES to the Erase Source Files prompt to automatically erases the source files Expect the conversion processes to require several hours or perhaps days depending on the amount of data and the number of versions you are converting Some applications require responses during the conversion Periodically check the workstation and answer any questions that appear For instructions on converting see Data File Conversion on page 3 27 Resource Manager Data File Conversion e APPENDIX D Converting from 4 5x 4 6x Convert your application data file
170. ceed OK command to save your entries and begin the copy process After OSAS reads and copies to memory all records in the old file the n records copied The old file will be replaced message appears Use the Proceed OK command again to remove the old file and replace it with the new resized one If you are using this function to rebuild a damaged file compare the number of records copied from the message to the number of active records that appears in the Actual File Information column on the screen If the two numbers are substantially different press F7 to exit the function and restore a backup copy of the file or try the File Rebuild Verify or Purge Data Files functions File Rebuild Verify oo M Use the File Rebuild Verify function to rebuild a damaged data file or to verify that a file is still usable This function works with data files on local or mapped drives only It does not rebuild files SS on data server paths as in lt tiger proSsrv gt D osas data If you use OSAS in an enterprise client server environment you must either map a drive to the data files to run this function or run the rebuild program through the operating system locally on the data server To run the mkrecover rebuild program through the operating system on PRO 5 change to the directory where the program is located usually in the data server directory and type the command for the operating system you use To run the mkrecover rebuild program
171. cess Code Preferences Favorites File Types Colors Keyboard Description Use the Preferences function to activate or deacti vate toggled commands select options for the OSAS graphical mode select default values for common fields and for system functionality and specify direc tories for print files sort files and your PDF viewer web browser and e mail software See Preferences on page 4 7 for more information Opens the Favorites Menu function to allow you to modify the Favorites menu that is created automati cally when you add functions to it See Favorites Menu on page 4 15 for more information Use the File Types function to set up associations for various types of files See File Types on page 4 17 for more information Use the Colors function on the to customize the col ors at specific terminals for each type of text screen and text window in OSAS See Colors on page 4 21 for more information Use the Keyboard function to customize the function and editing keys for text screens on your workstation See Keyboard on page 4 23 for more information A 7 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Main Menus Help Menu File Modes Tools Favorites Other User Help FL About OSAS Command Description Help Opens a screen providing details on commonly used function keys and keyboard navigation About OSAS Opens a screen listing copyright information about the OSAS applications you have installed Functi
172. ch documents remember to store the file in the file path listed for the DocumentShare directory in the Directories function page 2 51 and to keep the file name to 8 characters or less If the file is located in a different directory or if it has a long file name OSAS cannot open it Enter a parameter for the menu selection If you selected a type of 0 for the line or if you do not need a parameter leave this field blank Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Menus screen Application Information o M Use the Application Information function to maintain information about the applications on your system This information is automatically updated when you install a new application or an update Application information is stored in the OSAPPL DOS or OSAPPL UNX file depending on your operating system in the sysfil directory To view or change application information select Application Information from the System File Utilities menu The Application Information screen appears E Application Information Dee Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmal 7e ee K Abandon Application Code SO S Description Sales Order Short Description Orders Base Application AR a Installed YES Version 7 50 Date Installed 11 26 2007 El Program Directory IprogAR m Modifications Directory Verification File SOTHx Last Maintenance None Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 O
173. cific set of data for example the INVALUE function returns values that pertain to the amount of product you have in inventory To make this information meaningful the IN VALUE function uses the company ID location ID and item number setup types meaning that you can determine the amount of product you have for a specific company for a given warehouse for a range of item numbers or for some combination of the three To specify the setup types that a function uses to pull data from files and return values based on that data press S on the Functions screen The Append Setup Types screen appears El Append Setup Types Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 xm e mn ejeo x Jw Description Length Type Company ID 3 3 Location ID 6 Item ID 20 D00 3002uUN 1 Enter or edit the setup type s Description You can use these types in functions e Company ID e Location ID temID e GL Account e Account Type Bank Account Enter the Length of the data field or substring used by the function 9 20 Resource Manager Function Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Enter any of these values in the Type field to restrict the information selected e 0 alphanumeric information e 1 numeric information e 3 uppercase alphanumeric information e 6 date information Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Functions screen After you define the setup types used by th
174. cified Help Screen List is an area that doesn t open up any of the files RMOSCNVT is trying to convert and therefore enables you to avoid the issue of attempting to overwrite a locked in use file Conversion Installation Hints D 4 A temporary directory is required for Inventory file lookups on Windows systems This directory is usually temp Make sure the temp directory is created and the SET TEMP command is in the AUTOEXEC BAT file SET TEMP C TEMP If an error 46 occurs try creating the temp directory in your network drive SET TEMP F TEMP where F is your network drive Start your conversions with the maximum memory File copies go faster When copying files to the source directory do not forget table files They are not company specific Resource Manager Data File Conversion e APPENDIX D Plan a consultation meeting to develop new codes and tables to make the most of the new features in this release Pricing methods changed in version 5 10 Be sure you understand the new pricing structures when you convert your Inventory files from earlier versions see the Inventory guide for more information Allow at least a 50 percent increase in data file requirements for all modules when converting from versions before 5 00 The amount varies for each module Payroll and Inventory may increase by 300 to 400 percent Allow about 200 percent available space for each version If you are converting through multiple versions you may not
175. creen appears The Edit User ID screen has similar functionality Press Enter to edit the highlighted user anna usen Hefe Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help xt abe m 1202 oo OK Abandon User ID kellyd Name Kelly D Password Remember Password Y Terminal ID T 070 Archive Control Never y Archive Path server archive Archive Share Path server archiveshare E Mail Login ID kellyd E Mail Password 9000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Company Role ID Description H Order Entry Order Entry Append Goto Header Done Enter the User ID and Name You may not use special characters in the User ID field Enter the Password for the user Select the Remember Password check box or enter Y in text mode if you want this user to be able to save his or her password on the OSAS Login screen for faster logins When you select this check box the Save Password option appears on the OSAS Login screen Enter a Terminal ID of up to three characters the T appears automatically for you to associate with the new user 2 11 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Users 2 12 10 11 Note If you use Windows use caution when you select terminal IDs as they are not case sensitive That is Windows does not differentiate between TSAM TSam and Tsam as referring to three different terminals all three of these examples would refer to
176. creen appears See Working with Setup Data Types on page 9 20 for more information Adding or Editing Returned Value Types While working with functions it s important to remember that the Functions function merely defines a function for use within OSAS the actual work and structure is performed by the function program itself Although you can add or change the type and description of the values a function returns here this does not change the function To add any changes you make here you need to modify the function program itself Function programs are stored in the progRM directory according to the naming convention of functionID FNC To add a new returned value type to the function definition in OSAS press A on the Functions screen To edit the selected value type press Enter The Append or Edit Functions screen appears Other than the name these screens are identical H Edit Function Definitions fo c ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help xtm9amule eg OK J Abandon Type Numeric v Description Total Cost Select the Type Numeric or Alpha then enter or edit the Description of the value returned Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes Resource Manager 9 19 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Function Definitions Working with Setup Data Types Setup data types determine the range of data that is pulled from data files and used in a function to return values Functions return values for a spe
177. creen appears enter RMSET in the Program field and leave the Parameter field blank Use the Proceed OK command to continue 3 When the Multiuser Configuration screen appears select the network type enter the number of workstations be sure to account for terminal 000 and enter the number of shared printers available to all workstations Use the Proceed OK command to continue 4 When the Shared Printer screen appears enter the BBx Device Name of the first shared printer Resource Manager Devices 10 11 Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Try to keep the device names the same as they were originally set to minimize the effects of users having to remember the new printer definitions when the new config bbx file is in place After defining the shared printer s device name the Printers screen page 2 29 appears as it would for any new printer Enter the appropriate information and press D to add the definition to the new config bbx file Add the remaining shared printers for the network the system prompts you for as many shared printers as you indicated After defining shared printers the Terminals screen page 2 27 appears so that you can add terminal definitions for each workstation for your network Note Be sure that you know specifically what terminal is currently the terminal you are defining so that you can define it properly regarding local printers Consult your original con
178. creens Scale Sizes This command allows you to pick from predefined scale sizes or to choose any scale size and also allow for dif ferent horizontal and vertical scaling factors The scal ing can be adjusted to provide a full screen view on wide screen monitors The default value is 100 Tools Menu File Modes Favorites Other User Help Calculator Command Description Calculator Opens the OSAS calculator APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Favorites Menu Main Menus File Modes Tools Favorites Other User Help Change to Favorites F2 Command Description Change to Favorites Other Commands Menu File Modes Tools Toggles between the Favorites and main menus See Favorites Menu on page A 6 for more information Favorites User Help Global Inquiry gt EIS Dashboard Display Calculator Inventory Price Calculator Pop Up Calendar User Comments Enter Product Suggestions Print Product Suggestions General Information Inquiry Active Report Control EIS Dashboard History Support Information Application Options Inquiry Call a BASIC Program The Other Commands menu gives you access to additional OSAS commands not directly related to the function you re using See Other Commands Menu on page A 17 for more information Main Menus User Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A File Modes Tools Favorites Other User Help Command Preferences Favorites File Types Colors Keyboard Ac
179. customer information in a different way as shown by their title To view the sort options available for an inquiry window refer to the File Descriptions manual or if you have the Report Writer application use the Alternate Key Descriptions master file list function to print a list of the alternate keys You must subtract 1 from this key number to get the correct key number to use for the window 7 23 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Inquiry Window Definitions After you enter the Window ID information for that inquiry window appears EN Inquiry Window Definitions es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xXe aelmo e oK Abandon Application SO as Window ID SOENT W1 4 Topic Number 000 File Name SOTHx File Number af Title Order Number Inquiry Key Number 0 Size No Data Name Typ Mask Tris ID Fmt Fid Beg Len Col Col Row 1 OUR ORDER NO 0 1 001 007 008 3 Start 5 5 2 CUSTID 0 1 009 001 006 14 Total 69 10 3 STATUS 0 6 SOTHTrans 002 001 001 22 Mask 4 LOCATIONID 0 1 029 021 006 34 um Em 5 CUSTOMERPO 0 1 031 002 025 42 Inc 1 6 6 Exc 0 7 8 Return No 1 9 10 11 12 Headings Output Columns Used 66 of 66 Company H 10 13 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 3 Ifyouentered a new window ID the Copy From field appears Enter the window from which you want to copy information and press Enter 4 Unless you are entering information for a new window leave the values in these fields as they are
180. d N to open a new dashboard or D to delete a dashboard Resource Manager Dashboard Editor EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Changing Dashboard Titles Changing Tab Sizes Adding Text and EIS Fields Moving Text and EIS Fields e Press E to access the Edit menu When you are inside this menu press A to add an EIS field to the dashboard then select the field ID If you are inside an EIS field when you access the Edit menu additional commands are available Press C to change the field ID press D to delete the field or press M to move the field to a new location e Press O to access the Options menu When you are inside this menu press S to set the tab size in characters or C to change the dashboard s title e Toreturn to the dashboard from the command menu press Page Up To change the title of a dashboard press Page Down to access the command menus press O to access the Options menu then press C Change the text that appears as the dashboard s title and press Enter When working with text dashboards you can press Tab to move over a set number of characters and line up columns To change the number of characters in the tab stop press Page Down to access the command menus press O to access the Options menu then press S Change the number of characters that appears as the tab size value and press Enter To add a text or EIS field to a dashboard use one of these methods e To add text to the dashboard as a
181. d Configuration CHAPTER 2 To edit an existing user record select the record to edit and press Enter Other than the title this screen is identical to the Append User screen When the Edit User screen appears edit the user information as needed Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Users screen When you finish entering values for the user you will be asked whether you want to add a terminal device to CONFIG BBX If you choose Yes the Devices Terminals screen opens See Devices Terminals Screen on page 2 27 for more information Close the screen to save your changes and return to the menu 2 13 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Users Setting up a User through BBj Enterprise Manager If you use OSAS on BBj follow these steps to set up users through BBj Enterprise Manager 1 Select Users from the Installation and Configuration menu The Users screen appears and lists all user records Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xc na mna 20 9009 OK Abandon Enable BBj User Validation User ID Name Term ID Save Password charlest Charles T T010 a scottm Scott M TOOO B 2 u B Enter edit Append Goto Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 Select the Enable BBj User Validation check box or press Y in text mode to validate OSAS users against the users tha
182. d lists of master field setup and function information so that you can research the information you need and the items you need to change Look at the dashboards included with OSAS to determine whether you can modify an existing dashboard instead of starting from scratch to save time Create or modify the dashboard elements you need Use the functions on the EIS File Maintenance menu page 9 1 to modify or create as many of the field and setup definitions as possible for the dashboard You can return to a field or setup definition as you modify the dashboard later if necessary to create or modify a definition you may have missed 8 5 CHAPTER 8 Executive Information Summary Working with Dashboards Begin your dashboard modifications Use the Dashboard Editor function page 9 29 to create the new dashboard This function contains the commands you need to load and save dashboards as well as add and change the fields they contain Save the new dashboard If you modified an existing dashboard save the new dashboard with a different name to preserve the original for future use Consider the modes you use in OSAS If you primarily use only one mode in OSAS you can simply modify the dashboard for that mode If you use both modes however you need to either change the text dashboard and then convert it see page 8 4 or make your changes to both the text and graphical dashboards Limit access to fields if necessary
183. d of crediting the bank s asset account charges credit the credit cards payable liability account 3 15 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup 3 16 General Information Bank Accounts Bank Accounts ola Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help zxalaelmao e ee OK Abandon Bank Account ID 4 Ace Plumbing Mastercard Type Credit Card Vendor ID ACE001 a ACE PLUMBING SUPPLY COMPANY Account Description Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 City State Zip Country Phone Fax Contact E Mail Address Web Site General Information Ace Plumbing Mastercard 6769 GOLDEN GATE DRIVE SAN FRANCISCO CA a 35454 5548 a 309 555 5321 309 555 5488 BILL HUMPHREY bhumphrey aceplumbingsupply com www aceplumbingsupply com Company H 08 29 2007 Terminal Tooo ovn Enter the general information that pertains to this credit card account description address information phone and fax numbers contact name and email and web site addresses 1 Enter a unique ID for the credit card type bank account in the Bank Account ID box 2 Choose Credit Card in the Type field 3 Enter the Vendor ID to be associated with this credit card 4 Inthe Account Description box enter a description of the credit card 5 Enter the Address City State Zip and Country for the credit card 6 Enter the vendor phone and fax numbers using the phone mask that appears 7 Inthe Contact box enter the name of the person you contact when
184. d use the Proceed OK command to return to the Help Screens screen Your changes are saved automatically Use brackets to make the text you enter appear in bold e Press Ato add a line of help text to the end of the list When the Help Text screen appears enter the text to add and use the Proceed OK command to return to the Help Screens screen Your changes are saved automatically Use brackets to make the text you enter appear in bold e Press H to return to the Field ID field in the header section of the screen e Press C to copy help text from another field When the Copy From screen appears enter the field from which to copy information and use the Proceed OK command to return to the Help Screens screen and edit the text you copied Press F7 to close the screen and return to the menu Help Screens System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Editing Help Text Within Help Screens You can also edit help screens from within OSAS functions without returning to the Help Screens function in Resource Manager Follow these instructions to edit help text within another OSAS function or menu 1 Press F1 within an OSAS field to view its help text 2 When the help screen appears press F6 to open the Help Maintenance screen for that field where you can make changes This screen is identical to the Help Screens screen Refer to the previous instructions for more information on the commands available 3 Usethe Proceed OK command to save
185. data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 21 Resource Manager Guide Print Manager CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Menu 14 2 Archive Report Control 14 3 Report History Inquiry 14 7 Parameters 14 11 Purge Report History 14 13 Resource Manager Print Manager Print Manager is a powerful business tool that helps you manage reports or forms archived through OSAS Print Manager automatically tracks the date and time a report was generated along with the user and terminal IDs that printed it then saves the report file for later use Using Print Manager you can e Reprint reports as needed e Search multiple reports saved to text file format for specific text e Print reports in batches e View PDF reports with a PDF reader 14 1 CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Print Manager Menu The Print Manager menu contains functions that you can use to customize Print Manager and work with the reports it manages e Use the Archive Report Control function page 14 3 to work with the reports that you have archived in Print Manager e Use the Report History Inquiry function page 14 7 to track report activity by listing each report archived the method used to print the report the date and time it was printed and the user and terminal ID that printed it e Use the Parameter
186. ders 3 SOPSR 05 IN Price and Availability 3 INIPACON 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 amp 14 E 15 E Enter edit Move Copy Swap l Unique Title l Write Company 11272007 Terminai T000 OVR This screen works in the same manner as the Menus screen See page 7 11 for detailed information on customizing menus You can create submenus that group functions together in two ways e Press F10 to add an entire existing submenu like the Sales Order Daily Work menu for example to the Favorites menu then switch to the Favorites menu and remove functions as needed until only the functions you use most often appear on it Edit the title of the menu if necessary Enter a new menu ID in the Menu field and give it a Title then press Enter in the scrolling region to add functions to the new menu You may need to use the Menus function to note down information about specific functions such as the programs they call and any parameters they need before you can enter it here Resource Manager File Types MM Use the File Types function to set up associations for various types of files These associations help OSAS open the appropriate software program to view files and give you the ability to attach documents spreadsheets word processing documents images and so on to master file records Once you have set up file types and associations use the Documents command when it appears on File Maintenance function sc
187. destination file in OSAS for the imported values in the Import Type field 4 Select the type of file you want to import in the File Type field The type describes the way in which the fields within the file are separated from one another You can choose from Comma Delimited Quote Comma Delimited or Fixed Field Width 5 If you chose a Fixed Field Width file type enter or edit the total length of each record in the Record Length field 6 Enter or browse to the File Name if editing an imported definition Scroll to the field you would like to edit Use the following commands to edit the import definition fields e Press Enter to use the Edit Field Information dialog box to edit the field See e Press L to choose a different Layout ID e Press Dto delete the current layout e Press Gto go to a specific field e Press F7 when finished editing the import definition to return to the System File Utilities menu 7 8 Import Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Edit Field Information dialog box The Edit Field Information dialog box appears when you highlight a field in the Import Definitions screen and press Enter EN Edit Field Information tJe Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help J 2xe amau eoeeo OK Field Name Amount Type Number Field Number 1 Start 0 Length 45 Default 1000 Force Default Translate From Translate To 100 1000 B Line No
188. don F5 command to restore all fields on the screen Shift F9 Copies the contents of the current field F10 Deletes the characters in the field to the right of the cursor deletes to the end of the line If Insert mode is turned off and you enter a character in the field s first position everything in the field is deleted Shift F10 Pastes the value you copied from a previous field into the Resource Manager current field APPENDIXC Resource Manager File Descriptions Like all OSAS applications Resource Manager uses data files to manage information As you work OSAS automatically accesses stores and transfers information within these files as needed for correct accounting and to keep the system current Unlike other OSAS applications that often have complex interactions between data files as a result of transaction activity Resource Manager s files are used in basic processing for the system as a whole Because Resource Manager is the basis of the OSAS system many of its files are accessed only to determine which country or tax to use in calculations or to determine how the system should function or how OSAS should appear on a given workstation For example the files that store tax information are accessed whenever the system calculates or stores tax amounts for transactions but the system does not directly change the information in these files unless you use the appropriate File Maintenance functions The system us
189. ds Toggles the bell on and off When the bell is on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command Toggles function key display on and off When this option is on available function keys are listed at the bottom of the screen to remind you of their use Toggles verification on and off When verification is on you must press a key twice to verify that you want to perform an operation Verification 1s on when a check mark appears next to the command on the Modes menu or when the Verify flag appears at the bottom of the screen B 7 Help Commands CC M Help content for field level help is editable meaning that you can customize the text that appears to best fit your needs When you press F1 on a function screen to access field level help you can use these commands when the help screen appears e Press F3 to delete the help screen content In graphical mode you must first press F6 to enter the edit screen for the help content before you can delete it To recover a deleted screen copy the xxHELP file from the OSAS DVD ROM to the PROGxx subdirectory xx is the two character application ID Remember that this copying process overwrites any changes you have made to other help screens e Press F6 to edit the help screen content e Press F7 to exit the help screen Resource Manager B 9 Scroll Region Commands o M When the cursor is in a line item scroll region you can use the commands listed below to move aro
190. ds and fields When you apply an role to a field that field still appears on any dashboards that use it but a string of Xs appears as the field s value if the employee does have role based permission To use roles with BIS dashboards the Keep field level roles for EIS option must be set to YES in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 and you must have at least one role already set up for the system See Roles on page 2 19 for more information on setting up roles for OSAS Keep in mind that this function applies permission and restriction only to EIS commands and fields to control what employees can view To limit access to the EIS dashboards and functions themselves use the Roles function on the Company Setup menu page 2 19 Resource Manager 9 25 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance This role must exist in the Roles function on the Company Setup menu before you can assign it to EIS elements 9 26 EIS Roles Follow these steps to apply roles to EIS dashboards 1 Select EIS Roles from the EIS File Maintenance submenu The EIS Roles screen appears Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help X Xt amp muy e eeo OK Abandon Role ID Reporting Access Field ID Description Edit EIS Dashboard Edit Command B v Global EIS Dashboard Global
191. ds you need to modify and save dashboards 9 1 EIS Field Definitions oo M Fields are the building blocks of dashboards they display data pulled or calculated from your OSAS data and allow you to consolidate data from several OSAS applications on one dashboard to provide a quick big picture view of company information Use the EIS Field Definitions function to create or modify existing fields change their description or the mask they use to display numerical values and edit the functions and setup definitions assigned to them Functionsand The information that appears in fields is defined by functions and setups Setups Functions process OSAS data and return one or more values based on the range of data defined in a setup definition When you create or edit a field you assign to it the functions that return the data you want to appear in the field and the setups that define the range of data used in the function to return data For example you can set up a field to display the total dollar amount of sales for all sales representatives as returned by a function in one company as governed by a setup range A number of functions and setups are built in to OSAS for your use in defining fields However if you want to define a new field based on new functions and setups you must set up these functions and setups before you can use them in a new field definition Formulas If a field consolidates information from more than one a
192. e Archive Control screen appears El Archive Control teo Es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xtl melmaal 7 lee OK Abandon Application AP Menu AP07 4 Tile History Reports Line Description Override Path File Prefix Control Type 01 AP Analysis Report APAP Always PDF 02 Purchase Analysis Report v Prompt Text 2 03 Check History Report Never PDF 2 04 Vendor Detail History Report VDHR Prompt PDF 05 Deposit History Report m Never PDF 06 Payment History Report Never PDF 07 Tax Audit Report Never PDF 08 Summary Invoice History Report SIHR Never PDF 09 Vendor Activity Report VAR Always PDF 10 Vendor Purchase History Report m Never PDF 11 i PDF 12 PDF 13 por 14 sti por El 15 mo o P E Enter edit Override Path Write Company H 06 07 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 3 55 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Archive Control 3 56 1 Enter the Application and the Menu which contains the reports you would like to archive See Edit Archive Control dialog box on page 3 56 for more information 2 To set a path to override the default archive settings in the Directories function highlight the report you would like to edit and press O See Override Path dialog box on page 3 57 for more information
193. e Name syswindow 4 Device Type 4 Device Mode Value E Keywait 2 Initialization 4 Termination Invisible Title Enter edit Header Done CompanyH 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 OVR OSAS automatically enters lines for each terminal into the config bbx file when you set up terminals during Resource Manager installation and set up Use the Terminals screen to edit these terminal entries or add new ones Enter or edit this information in the header section e Enter the Device Name This is the terminal ID assigned to the workstation for identification purposes e The Copy From field appears if you enter a new device name Enter the name of the device whose settings you want to copy or skip this field Enter a System Device Name Use syswindow to set up a Windows graphical workstation On Linux UNIX systems the value you enter here depends on the type of terminal emulation software you use Resource Manager 2 27 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices 2 28 If you enter syswindow to set up a Windows graphical workstation the This device type is unavailable message appears because the syswindow device is a logical device rather than a physical one Press Enter to continue e Leave the Device Type field blank Terminals generally do not use this field After you enter values in the header section OSAS lists the characteristics available for the terminal in the scrolling region To edit the
194. e User ID field Enter the BBj User ID that has been set up in BBj Enterprise Manager Enter the Password for the user then re enter the password Enter a Terminal ID of up to three characters the T appears automatically for you to associate with the new user Note If you use Windows use caution when you select terminal IDs as they are not case sensitive That is Windows does not differentiate between TSAM TSam and Tsam as referring to three different terminals all three of these examples would refer to the same terminal To avoid causing errors with files do not rely on capitalization to create unique terminal IDs In the Archive Control drop down choose whether you want the reports produced by this user to Always be archived to Never be archived or to give the user a Prompt to decide at the time of report production Enter the Archive Path and Archive Share Path if you want to use different paths for reports produced by this user Enter the E Mail Login ID and E Mail Password for the user Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and proceed to the roles section Use the following commands in the Roles section of the screen e Press A to add a role The Append User Role dialog box appears See Append User Role dialog box on page 2 18 e Press G to go to a specific role in the list Press H to edit the header of the Edit User ID screen Press D to return to the Users screen Resource Manager
195. e and FormsArchiveShare directories are for form sharing where individual forms PDFs are generated You can use the following shortcuts in the Archive ArchiveShare FormsArchive and FormsArchiveShare directory locations Y Current year to 4 digits M Current month in numeric text 09_september M2 Current month in text day month09 sep D Current day Tuesday YMD Current system date in YY Y YMMDD format 19950919 A Current application ID AR T Report Title Companies List 2 53 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Directories 2 54 TYPE Form Type Invoice Statement etc C Current company ID with spaces stripped off U Current user ID P Program generating the report or form ID Current master ID in forms As an example the location C OSAS76 Archive M T U would place the archive document in a folder named for the current month in numeric text M followed by a folder with the report title T and finishing in a folder with the current user ID U The Email and EmailShare directories are for forms that are e mailed e Ifreports are set for archiving but the directory cannot be found or created those reports will be put into the folders listed in the ArchiveError and ArchiveErrorShare Press Enter to edit the selected directory path if necessary then press W when you finish to save your changes and restart OSAS If you do not want to restart OSA
196. e detail display on or off e Press S to change your search selection e Press C to sort the information in a different way When you finish viewing the information use the Exit F7 command to return to OSAS Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Active Report Control Use the Active Report Control function to work with the reports you have saved with Print Manager but have not yet archived or deleted You can reprint reports either singly or in batches search reports for specific text or archive reports See Archive Report Control on page 15 3 for more information on how to use Active Report Control EIS Dashboard History Use the EIS Dashboard History function to open the Company Summary EIS dashboard with field data saved from previous dates To save field data use the Global Dashboard Update function page 11 3 When you finish press F7 to return to OSAS Support Information Use the Support Information command to view information about whom to contact for technical support or how to contact your dealer A 31 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu Select Support Information from the Other Commands menu This screen appears EN Support Information toa Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX te a aa 28 lee ok Abandon Dealer Name Phenomenal Business Solutions Dealer Contact Joe Smith Dealer Phone Number 888 555 8888 Fax No 888 555 8889 Dealer E mail joe phenombus com
197. e field values view more information about a field such as when it was last recalculated or open a different dashboard Resource Manager 8 9 CHAPTER 8 Executive Information Summary EIS Dashboard Display 8 10 In graphical mode access a command either from the EIS Functions menu or by right clicking on the screen and selecting the command from the menu that appears In text mode access the command by pressing the highlighted key Some commands are available only within certain fields Select Update or press U to update and refresh field information when you re working on a network where others might have changed field data Select Recalc or press R to recalculate only the selected field so that you have the latest information Select Global or press G to recalculate all the dashboard s fields for the latest information When the verification message appears select Yes to refresh all the fields or No to return to the dashboard without changing information Select Setup or press S to view or change the selected field s setup definition The Setup screen appears See Setup Definitions on page 9 11 for more information Select Field or press F to view or change the selected field s definition The Field Definitions screen appears See EIS Field Definitions on page 9 3 Select View or press V to view the selected field s Field ID and Description the date it was last updated and its status Select Edit or press E to use t
198. e function to return data use the Setup function page 9 11 to enter the exact range of data to use Building Functions When you define a field in EIS you must use functions that have already been built or coded Although the list of functions that EIS provides is extensive you might want to build your own functions For example you might want a field that returns the number of employees from the Payroll application To build a function you must program it in Business BASIC code then define it for use within OSAS via the Function Definitions function You should know how to read code use Business BASIC verbs and make Business BASIC manipulate data and handle files If you do not know how to program in Business BASIC but want to create a function contact your OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software reseller You also need a copy of the OPEN SYSTEMS Developer Kit for file descriptions and dimension lengths for arrays A sample function GENERIC FNC is included with the software The predefined SSA functions provided with EIS follow the format of GENERIC FNC use itas a base for creating new functions If you are familiar with word processors or spreadsheets this function is like a template the format is set but you must fill in the blanks By looking at other functions already coded for specific tasks for example ARTRAN FNC and GLJ YTD FNC you should be able to create your own functions You might notice that the line numbers are no
199. e letters bou001 14 5 CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Archive Report Control 14 6 When Print Manager finds the text string it lists the report and page number on which the text appears El Search for Te eJ e Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmal 7 l ee kok Abano Searching File No 1 Number of Occurences 1 Search for 10 Searching Price Report for Text Please Wait Found 10 on Page 1 Pick P rint the Page Print A Il Occurences or C ontinue Searching C To print the current report page on which the text appears enter P To print all pages in the current report on which the text appears enter A To continue searching for more occurrences of the text press C When all occurrences of the text have been found in the reports you included in the search the X occurrences were found message appears at the bottom of the screen Press Enter to return to the Archive Report Control screen Resource Manager Report History Inquiry o M The Report History Inquiry function helps you track report activity by listing all reports archived within OSAS The function lists information about e All report files archived and saved by Print Manager Every report printed from the Archive Report Control function The information that appears in this function is stored in the RMRHxxx file located in the progRM directory If you elected to save Print Manager report history in the Options and Interfaces functi
200. e mask is large enough to accommodate the totals you expect 3 7 Bank Accounts Te Use the Bank Accounts function to create and maintain bank accounts and credit card bank accounts The maintenance and master file list functions will include the fields necessary for the credit card accounts used with Accounts Payable Purchase Order and Landed Cost For instructions to set up a Bank Account type of account see Bank Account Type Account on page 3 10 For instructions to set up a Credit Card type of bank account see Credit Card Type Account on page 3 15 3 9 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Bank Accounts Bank Account Type Account General Information Enter the general information that pertains to the bank account including the additional description address information phone and fax numbers contact name and email and web site addresses El Bank Accounts eJ m Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX ma e e 06 _ Abandon Bank Account ID FNB001 1st National Bank Type Bank Account GL Account Number 100000 3 Status Active z General Information Account Description 1st National Bank Address 1 405 North 2nd Street Address 2 Address 3 City State Zip Country Minneapolis MN s 55402 us a Phone 612 554 6719 Fax 612 554 6799 Contact Don Meyers E Mail Address donm 1stnatlbank com Web Site www 1stnatibank com Company H 06 08 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 1 En
201. e next field that requires an entry Exits from a screen or a window without saving data Modes Other Information Help Shift F9 Shift F10 ee Undo Ctri Z Description Copy Paste Undo Modes Menu A 10 Copies the contents of the current field Pastes the value you copied from a previous field into the current field Restores the contents of the current field from before you made changes to it Commands Edit Other Information Help 2xtele v Verify Exit eles Quick v Verify PgDown Function Menus OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Command Description Verify Exit When verification is on you must press a key twice to verify that you want to exit or abandon functions Bell When the bell is turned on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command Quick When this option is off the cursor stops at every field Verify PgDown Other Commands Menu possible when you press Enter or Tab When this option is on the cursor stops only in required fields skipping those that are not required If verification is turned on you must press PgDn twice to proceed to the next screen or to save your entries Commands Edit Modes Information Help PX ta Calculator Execute an Operating System Command Call a BASIC Program Product Suggestions Application Options Inquiry Global Inquiry gt General Information Inquiry Support Information User Comments EIS Dashboard Display EIS Dash
202. e values returned and display those results in fields Use the Function Definitions function to change a function s definition or edit the setup data types associated with the function ID In addition you must use the Functions function to define any new functions you create before they are available for use within OSAS Because functions are small software programs you cannot create new ones without specialized Business BASIC programming knowledge However the pre defined functions included with OSAS are designed to return nearly any value you can imagine In addition you can use the values returned by a function in mathematical formulas to calculate any other values you might need If you do want to program your own functions see page 9 21 for tips on getting started Setup Data Functions use setup data types to pull a specific range of data from data files for Types use within the function These data types ensure that the values returned by the function are meaningful for example a function can use data types to return all product amounts for a specific warehouse or location Data types used by the function are defined within the function itself see page 9 20 and you specify the range to use within a setup definition see Setup Definitions on page 9 11 Return Value Descriptions of the values that are returned by a function appear in the scrolling Subnumbers region on the Functions screen Each line in the scrolling region is
203. ecified screen s background color enter the color group number To change the text border or title enter a color number within the selected color group The Sample box shows how the screen will appear so that you can view the new settings before you change them 5 To change the color settings for another screen type press Tab until that screen type appears and repeat step 4 6 Press PgDn to save your changes change the colors for the screen you selected and return to the main menu press F5 to abandon your changes and start over or press F7 to close the screen without changing the color settings 4 22 Resource Manager Keyboard ENS Use the Keyboard function to customize the function and editing keys for text screens on your workstation You can also use this function to copy a keyboard layout to another workstation or set of workstations during setup This function is not available if you use the graphical mode for function screens Keyboard assignments are stored in the OSKY file in the sysfil directory If you delete this file OSAS creates a new one based off standard defaults If you experience issues with your keyboard on a UNIX system use this function to make adjustments to keyboard assignments Follow these steps to change the keys assigned to commands l Select Keyboard from the User Setup menu The Keyboard screen appears El osas 1000 tee Settings Edit Print Help Keyboard Workstation T
204. ecutive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 15 Top 10 Items o M The Top 10 Items dashboard provides a list of the top 10 items ranked by year to date sales dollars Select Top 10 Items from the Executive Information Summary menu The Top 10 Items dashboard appears and lists the items that are sold most often TEN Top 10 em iaa Commands Edit Modes Other ElS Functions Help 2 gt xu na mo 2e es _ ok _ Abandon Item Description YTD Sales 1 Heating Cooling Package 933 819 68 2 150 Plumbing Package 708 956 62 3 650 Steel Supports 578 775 94 4 100 Electrical Package 460 139 21 5 250 Exterior Panels 250 156 53 6 400 Interior Materials 188 559 07 7 700 Cabinets 131 208 26 8 550 Millwork Package 106 817 84 9 450 Slide by Window 24 x 40 97 968 62 10 350 Entry Door 51 879 34 Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 17 Top 10 Sales Reps MM The Top 10 Sales Reps dashboard provides a list of the top 10 sales representatives ranked by year to date sales dollars Select Top 10 Sales Reps from the Executive Information Summary menu The Top 10 Sales Reps dashboard appears and lists the highest performing sales representatives EN Top 10 Sales
205. ed Linux UNIX and Windows PRO 5 enterprise environment you may not want to copy or move files from the Windows server to the Linux UNIX Data Server as doing so will overwrite the existing files you created when you installed the Linux UNIX Resource Manager Note If you are changing directories for the first time do not select None as doing so may accidentally delete directories and their contents If you are changing directories for the first time during setup select Copy or Move Entering Directory Paths You can use relative and UNC pathing in addition to absolute pathing when you enter directories Resource Manager To refer to a subdirectory in the current directory enter directoryname To refer to a directory that is at the same level as the current directory enter directoryname This convention tells OSAS to go up one level then go back down to the specified directory within that level For example data goes up one level from the osas progRM directory to the osas directory then goes back down to the osas data directory To refer to a directory that is one level higher than the current directory enter directoryname 2 55 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Directories e To refer to a directory on a network use UNC pathing Enter servername directoryname subdirectory Note If you use OSAS on BBj use caution when entering directory paths Since BBj does not allow access from mapped dri
206. edit information for a different role use the Abandon F5 command When you finish defining roles use the Exit F7 command to return to the main menu 2 21 Devices o M Because OSAS runs on so many operating systems it requires the config bbx configuration file to use devices in a standard manner This file is a text file that contains system wide information about your hardware and must be present for OSAS to run If the config bbx file is missing the system displays an error message when you launch OSAS Use the Devices function to edit this file and set up the terminals printers Windows graphic devices and other graphics devices such as plotters you use on your system If you have a multiuser system you can also specify whether a device is local used by only one workstation or shared by all workstations Note Do not edit the config bbx file in DOS or in a text editor It is too easy to enter incorrect information which causes problems in OSAS Using the Devices function is the best way to make changes to the config bbx file and automatically adjust the ALIAS parameters and STBLEN values The Devices function uses several different screens to capture data about the devices you use The screen that appears depends on the type of device you are adding or editing e Use the main Devices screen page 2 24 to view add and edit entries in the config bbx file e Use the Terminals screen page 2 27 to define the term
207. een and return to the menu press F7 Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Commands and Flags Both the text menu and text function screens let you use commands to drill down to more information change companies switch to sample data and perform tasks related to the function you are using These commands are analogous to the commands contained on drop down menus in graphical mode Refer to OSAS Commands on page B 1 for a list of all commands and their associated hot keys You access commands by pressing the hot key combination for the command you want to use If you re working with a keyboard that lacks function keys labeled with an F followed by a number or if you re working with an emulator in UNIX which can cause function keys to become unavailable press the appropriate alternate key combination to access the command Command hot keys are shared between the main menu and function screens and are context sensitive That is shared hot keys access different commands depending on whether you press the hot key on the main menu or in a function Not all commands are available for every function or field when a command is available a flag appears at the bottom of the function screen Common flags include Quick Info Maint Inquiry and Verify e The Quick flag reminds you that you are using the Quick Entry mode to skip fields that are not required Press Ctrl F to toggle quick entry on and off
208. een that appears when you add a document attachment to a record El Append Documents fo Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt aalm al 7 l ee ok Abandon Document ARtables txt m Path DOC laa Description Accounts Receivable table for ACE001 When you use this convention OSAS replaces the DOC variable with the file path listed for the DocumentShare directory to open document attachments If you do not store document attachments in the DocumentShare directory saving them in some other location instead do not enter the DOC variable in the Path field Instead enter the full file path of the directory in which the attachment is stored OSAS will not be able to locate the file to open it if you enter an incorrect directory path Note You must copy all files from the old location to the new location manually if you change the path listed for the DocumentShare directory If your document attachment files are not located in the directory specified here OSAS will not be able to open those files when you use the DOC variable Resource Manager 2 57 User Defined Field Setup EMEN OSAS user defined fields provide a consistent method of defining displaying and entering user defined fields for key master files throughout OSAS applications To set up user defined fields follow these steps 1 Select User Defined Field Setup from the Installation and Configuration menu The User Defined Field Setup screen appears
209. efined in OSAS for use in the Company Summary dashboard To refine the setup definition so that information is pulled only from company H use the Setup function page 9 11 to enter company H in both the From and Thru fields for the COMP setup When you next open the Company Summary dashboard it displays values only for company H See Setup Definitions on page 9 11 for more information on working with setup definitions and data ranges Modifying Dashboards 13 4 You can modify the built in dashboards to suit your unique needs save the modified dashboards under a new name to preserve the originals for future use then add the new dashboards to the menu for quick access See Planning Dashboard Changes on page 8 5 and Dashboard Editor on page 9 29 for more information Resource Manager Company Summary o MM The Company Summary dashboard provides a snapshot of key financial information Select Company Summary from the Executive Information Summary menu The Company Summary dashboard appears and lists sales gross profit and other related amounts resulting from transactions EN Company Summary eje Es Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help RX ts almnol e ee 0k Abandon Sales Daily Monthly Yearly Actual 45 577 69 9 648 015 97 Budget 26 153 86 810 769 65 10 524 454 23 Variance 7 585 03 765 191 96 876 438 26 Gross Profit Actual 15 839 28 20 743 14 4 310 240 51 Budget 11 083 28 343 58
210. elds on the screen are available only after you enter the company ID and press Enter If you enter a new company ID the Copy From field appears Enter the company ID from which you want to copy data or leave the field blank to continue On the left side of the screen enter or edit the company s information e The country code you enter also controls the defaults for the country code in other OSAS applications and the default phone number mask Company Information Company Setup CHAPTER 3 e Inthe Site field enter the company s OSAS site number for reference or use this field as a user defined field e Ifyou would like to print the company s logo on plain paper forms enter the link to the logo graphic in the Logo File field or use the browse button to navigate to the logo s location The fields at the bottom of the screen contain information about the applications and mapping websites you use to integrate OSAS with the Internet Enter the company s E mail Address If you like press Shift F3 to launch your e mail software and create a new message to send to that address e Enter the company s Web Site URL If you like press Shift F3 to launch your web browser and direct it to that website The second company information screen contains default values to enter in fields throughout OSAS and the number of decimal places to use for values in numeric fields EN Company Information oJ oes Commands
211. en the Inquiry command is available Click the button or press F2 to open the Inquiry screen to look up and select a valid entry Inquiry In this guide the Inquiry flag appears in the margin when discussing fields for which this commands is available The Inquiry screen operates in two modes search and sort You can toggle between these modes within an Inquiry window by pressing the Ins Insert key You can also choose the default mode for Inquiry windows by using the Preferences function page 4 7 e In search mode you can move through the keys listed by typing progressively larger portions of the key you want to find For example when you press C the window displays keys beginning with the letter C When you next press A the window displays keys beginning with CA and so on To shorten your data search use a partial key inquiry to cut down the size of the inquiry list For example if you know that the ID starts with JAR enter JAR in the ID field before you use the Inquiry command The Inquiry list starts with JAR and runs through the end of the list In sort mode you can change the order of certain Inquiry windows by pressing the letter key associated with the window sort You can see the available sorts in any Inquiry window by pressing Esc Command Help Resource Manager 1 31 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Inquiry The following commands are available inside Inquiry windows The scroll buttons are available in graphical
212. en you select Dashboard Editor from the EIS File Maintenance submenu in graphical mode is shown below E Untitled Dashboard SEE Commands Edit Modes Other File EIS Edit EIS Help xm5 miimiu 26 1009 OK J Abandon Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Opening A new dashboard opens automatically when you enter the function To open an Dashboards existing dashboard select Load from the File EIS menu then enter the dashboard ID To open a new dashboard select New from the File EIS menu Using The graphical dashboard editor contains three menus that house the commands Commands you need to modify a dashboard File EIS Edit EIS and the right click menu e Use the commands on the File EIS menu to Load or open an existing dashboard Save the current dashboard you are working on open a New blank dashboard for modification or Delete a dashboard e Use the commands on the Edit EIS menu to Undo your last action Copy Paste or Delete a field or Add an EIS or text field to the dashboard e Use the commands on the right click menu to Cut Copy Paste or Delete a field or to access the Properties screen for the dashboard or for a field Resource Manager 9 31 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Dashboard Editor Changing Dashboard Properties Working with Fields 9 32 r n E Properties os je Ed To change the size position or title of a dashboard click
213. enurfile Sort Goto Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR The Type field contains codes that indicate the last action taken on the report e PF printed to file e PA printed from the Archive Report Control function RA removed from the Archive Report Control function e AR archived and removed from the Archive Report Control function Use the commands to work with the reports listed e Press V to view the selected report s directory path and file name e Press T to toggle the reports descriptions between the report name and its file path and name Resource Manager Report History Inquiry Print Manager CHAPTER 14 Resource Manager Press S to sort the reports in the list then select the sort order to use You can sort by Executed Sequence from most recent to oldest Description in alphabetical order Date from oldest to most recent User ID in alphabetical order case is considered Transaction Type alphabetically by report action type Terminal ID Reverse Executed Date from oldest to most recent Press G to go to a specific report in the list This command is available only when there is more than one screen of reports listed 14 9 Parameters o M Use the Parameters function to set up and maintain the file names Print Manager uses to store archived report files that are specified in the Archive Control function see Archive Control on page 3 55 To work with the file names
214. eport as a PDF or Text File PDF output is available for OSAS systems using BBj The data path set up for the workstation in the Preferences function page 4 7 appears If necessary enter a new data path or click the Browse button to navigate to the correct directory then enter the file name followed by the PDF extension The file name plus extension that you enter must be less than 35 characters Press Enter to save the report as a PDF file in that directory Resource Manager Reports Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 To save the report as a text file select File or enter F The data path set up for the workstation in the Preferences function page 4 7 appears If necessary enter a new data path or click the Browse button to navigate to the correct directory then enter the file name followed by the txt extension The file name plus extension that you enter must be less than 35 characters Press Enter to save the report in that directory Note To preserve spacing and formatting view text file reports with a fixed width or monospaced font Courier Letter Gothic or Lucida Console for example View the Report on Screen Text Screens Only If you use text screens you can view selected reports directly in the OSAS screen Keep in mind that this option displays the report one page at a time storing previously viewed pages in the workstation s memory Use the Preferences function on the Resource Manager User Setup menu to limit the
215. er 4 13 to e mail executable 4 14 to web browser executable 4 13 directories Print Manager archive 14 11 directory navigation 1 23 documents adding to the OSAS menu 7 11 attachments 4 17 A 39 sharing attachments 2 57 E EIS Dashboard Display 8 9 EIS Dashboards 13 1 13 21 AP Analysis 13 13 AR Analysis 13 11 Cash Requirements Forecast 13 7 commands 13 3 Company Summary 13 5 Daily Statistics 13 9 displaying specific information 13 4 modifying 13 4 Top 10 Customers 13 15 Top 10 Items 13 17 Top 10 Sales Reps 13 19 Top 10 Vendors 13 21 EIS See Executive Information Summary EIS2GUL pub program 8 4 EIS File Maintenance 9 1 9 36 Dashboard Editor 9 29 9 36 Field Definitions 9 3 9 9 Functions 9 17 9 23 overview 9 1 Roles 9 25 9 27 Setup 9 11 9 15 EIS Master File Lists 12 1 12 9 Field Definitions 12 5 IX 4 Functions 12 7 printing 3 43 12 2 Screen Definitions 12 3 Setup definitions List 12 9 EIS Periodic Maintenance 11 1 11 6 Global Dashboard Update 11 3 11 4 Purge Dashboard History 11 5 11 6 EIS Reports 10 1 10 9 Dashboard 10 5 Dashboard History 10 7 Field History 10 9 printing 10 2 e mail e mailing reports 1 40 History Report 2 71 path to executable 4 14 problems sending in UNIX 4 7 protocol used 2 63 purging history 2 73 setup 2 63 error codes EIS fields 9 9 Error Log 7 59 Executive Information Summary commands 8 10 dashboards creating graph
216. er Commands menu A 33 Information Menu o M The Information Shift F2 menu appears on some function screens in certain applications and gives you access to additional information about a customer vendor item job bill of material or employee The commands available on the Information menu are determined by the applications you have installed and can include e General Information Comments e History Documents Not all of the commands above appear on every Information menu instead commands are available only as they are relevant to the task you are performing For example if you are entering a transaction in Accounts Receivable you can access comments or documents about items or customers but not about employees or vendors Information The Information command gives you general information about the subject For customers the Information command lists sale amounts and important dates while for inventory items the same command lists quantities types and base prices When the Information screen appears enter the ID for which you want to view information Use the commands available at the bottom of the screen to scroll between or select a new ID then use the Exit F7 command to return to the function screen from which you accessed the Information command A 35 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Information Menu Comments A 36 Use the Comments command when it appears to view comments added through File Mainten
217. er Prefix Page MM DD YYYY 12 Hour hh mm AM PM 9999999999 99 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 999999999 999 999999999 999 9999999999999 Inactive 1 3 45 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup File Lists Bank Accounts List The Bank Accounts list shows the bank accounts that have been setup in the Bank Accounts function 10 09 2007 1 41 PM Bank Type Description Account Number Bi Bank Account 3456 B2 Bank Account 5457 FNBOO1 Bank Account ist National Bank 8973 SNBOO1 Bank Account 2nd National Bank 3978 4 BANK ACCOUNTS LISTED End of Report Phone Number Fax Number Exp Date 612 554 6719 612 554 6799 612 827 0055 612 827 0011 Builders Supply Summary Bank Accounts List Bank Accounts Only By Bank Account GL Account Description Contact Credit Card Vendor 1000 Not on File 100001 CASH IN BANK 1st 100000 CASH IN BANK 1st Don Meyers 100100 CASH IN BANK 2nd Lisa Jungles TOTAL Last Stmt Date Pd Yr 10 09 2007 01 2009 10 08 2007 01 2008 12 01 2005 01 2012 12 01 2005 01 2009 Page 1 Last Stmt Bal Curr GL Bal oo oo 00 00 5139 38 4840 66 600 00 100 00 5739 38 4940 66 3 46 File Lists Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Options and Interfaces List The Options and Interfaces List shows the options and interfaces for the applications that are on your systems and the information they contain
218. er the setup from which to copy information or leave the field blank Enter the Function ID and Description The function ID you enter limits the types of data ranges that are available for the setup definition data range setup types are defined within functions See Working with Setup Data Types on page 9 20 for more information on data types within functions 9 13 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Setup Definitions 5 The data types and ranges for the setup definition appear in the scrolling region Use the commands to work with these types Press Enter to edit the selected data type and range The Edit Types screen appears See Adding or Editing Data Ranges below for more information e Press A to add a new data type and range to the end of the list You can only add data types that are defined in the function ID selected in step 4 to the setup definition The Append Types screen appears See Adding or Editing Data Ranges below for more information e Press D to return to the Description field to enter or edit the setup s description You can also change the function ID applied to the setup definition with this command Adding or Editing Data Ranges 9 14 To add a new range for a data type within a setup definition press A on the Setup screen To edit a range for the selected data type within a setup definition press Enter The Append or Edit Types screen appears Other than the title these screens are iden
219. erences are usually slightly less than one character but can only be resolved by programming code to shift one full character at a time However you may be able to send printer commands through the config bbx file to properly align characters and lines Note Remember that if you decide to edit the config bbx file to correct alignment problems these changes affect all OSAS forms to that particular alias Make a copy of the config bbx file in progRM before making any changes Always print one form at a time until you get the alignment you like Left to Right Issues If you print to a sysprint device in Windows you can place a decimal in the printer s Left Margin field on the alias line to shift text left or right For example if the left margin setting is 260 increasing the number 285 moves text to the right while decreasing the number 235 moves text to the left A 1 4 character shift is approximately 025 added to or subtracted from the left margin value If you use a direct printer in Windows Linux or UNIX you cannot move text to the left However if your forms are aligned too far to the left and you wish to move text to the right you must add the following configuration values to the config bbx file for the printer alias you are using These values let you shift text to the right in 1 720 inch increments Follow these steps 1 Select Devices from the Installation and Configuration menu 2 Edit the appropriate alias l
220. ersa Select GUI Functions from the Modes menu or press Shift F6 to toggle between the text and graphical modes for function screens When available press Shift F5 to switch between graphical and text menu modes or press Shift F6 to switch between modes on function screens You can also use the Preferences function to select the default mode to use for the main menu and function screens See Preferences on page 4 7 for more information In text mode use the Page Up Page Down arrow and Enter keys to move between menus select and enter functions and move around function screens When a list of commands appears at the bottom of a function screen press the highlighted letter to use a command These methods also work in graphical mode or you can use the mouse to click on fields and command buttons Graphical Mode If you re familiar with other graphical software programs you ll find it easy to navigate around the OSAS graphical mode which uses buttons toolbars text entry boxes and menus to help you move through your tasks Resource Manager 1 15 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS Graphical Main Menu Main Menu If you use BBj in graphical mode the main menu is available in two flavors graphical and MDI To switch between the two styles press Shift F5 or select the Menu Style to use on the Preferences screen page 4 7 If you use Visual PRO 5 the graphical main menu is the only graphical menu available The grap
221. es open the field s Properties screen Resource Manager Dashboard Editor EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 You can also copy paste and delete fields To use these commands on the selected field select the command from the Edit EIS or right click menus It s good practice to check an EIS field s ID via the Properties screen before using one of these commands to verify the field is the one you want to work with Changing To change a field s ID text position or size click the right mouse button on the Field field you want to change and select Properties from the menu that appears The Properties Properties screen for that field appears f A Properties foie e Type Field ID Text X Position Y Position Width Height e Ifthe field is an EIS field its field ID appears To change the ID click in the Field ID box then select the field ID you want to use Use this property with caution as it is easy to mistakenly change the ID of a field you want to keep It may make more sense to delete an unwanted EIS field then add the correct one e To change the caption that appears for a static text field enter the new caption in the Text box Do not use this box to change the mask for an EIS field Instead change the mask within the field definition itself see page 9 3 e To precisely position the field change the X and Y Position values While you can change the field s Width and Height the defa
222. es other files to determine how the system works in general or on a specific workstation some control how OSAS appears others manage basic function access and data formatting and others store application defaults and related information This appendix lists the Resource Manager data files and gives a brief description of each C 1 APPENDIX C File Descriptions XXAPPL txt xxCNVT xxDATA yyy xxFILES txt xxFRST txt xxHELP xxLABEL xxLAST txt xxMN xxMSG xxOl xxSWCH C 2 The Application Information file stores information about the applications you have installed on the system The Conversion Verification file contains information about the source files you need for each version The Application File Information file stores the data file information for applications which is used to create files during installation rebuild or resize files convert data files and print the Data File Allocation Report page 6 19 The Installation Copy Program file determines which files to copy and when to prompt for another application volume during installation The Install First Task file stores BBx or BBj statements that perform special functions before an application is installed The Help file stores all help screens for all fields within an application When you press F1 in an application field the text that appears to explain that field s function is accessed from this file The Label file stores appli
223. es unless instructed to do so by your reseller or a qualified technical support representative In addition be sure you know what information you are deleting and how it may affect other files Follow these steps to purge data records l Select Purge Data Records from the Database Utilities menu The Purge Data Records screen appears EN Purge Data Records fo a Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt aealma zjelee LOK Abandon File Name ARCUH Description Customer File File Type Highly Recoverable Mkeyed Logical Key Size Bytes per record 1152 Number of records Active keys 13 Deleted keys 1 3 109 12 4 1 1 6 E 11 2 1 11 1 6 5 10 6 11 1 I E 1 6 4 1 20 Key Chain 0 Starting Key Enter 00 thru 07 Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR 6 9 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities Purge Data Records 6 10 Enter the name of the file from which you want to purge records The bytes per record active keys and key definitions appear Enter the Key Chain number you want to use to locate the records to remove A key chain represents a primary key used in the table to sort and organize data Refer to the OSAS file descriptions manual for more information on key chains Enter the Starting Key from which to start purging records To start at the beginning of the file leave this field blank Use the Proceed OK command to begin the purge process Each key from the file appears beginning with the st
224. ess Name Date Time Term Company Data Path App Yr Menu Function Samara Start 10 04 2007 15 41 51 TOOO H Live RM 0 User Activity Report End Ukst 10 04 2007 sarmaram Start 10 04 2007 15 41 35 TOOO H Live RM O Main Menu Graphical End 10 04 2007 15 41 51 Wkst 10 04 2007 samdmm Start 10 04 2007 15 41 32 TOOO H Live RM 0 Options and Interfaces End 10 04 2007 15 41 35 Ukst 10 04 2007 samdrnm Start 10 04 2007 15 41 31 TOOO H Live RM O Main Menu Graphical End 10 04 2007 15 41 32 Wkst 10 04 2007 End of Report Resource Manager 4 5 Preferences o M Use the Preferences function to activate or deactivate toggled commands select options for the OSAS graphical mode select default values for common fields and for system functionality and specify directories for print files sort files and your PDF viewer web browser and e mail software The Preferences screen is a two part screen The first screen contains default values for toggle commands the OSAS graphical mode and fields The second stores directory paths for print and sort files and your PDF viewer web browser and e mail software and the e mail address to insert in the From field when you send e mails with OSAS Note Some of the preferences you set using this function override any equivalent defaults specified using the Company Setup functions Launching Your Web Browser or E mail Software When you enter an internet or e mail address field anywhere in an OSAS
225. ess is denied Resource Manager 9 27 Dashboard Editor o M Use the Dashboard Editor function to create and modify dashboards to suit your unique needs This function contains the commands you need to open save and delete dashboards add EIS fields or text fields to dashboards and copy paste move or delete fields Dashboard All dashboards included with OSAS are available in both text and graphical Modes mode Because text dashboards are not viewable in graphical mode and vice versa each dashboard has two files a text file extension SCR and a graphical file extension GUI All dashboard files are stored in the data directory This has implications for the dashboards you create and modify text dashboards are not viewable in graphical mode unless they are converted OSAS includes a utility that converts or creates a graphical dashboard file from a text dashboard but keep in mind that this utility works only one way it cannot create text dashboards from graphical ones See Creating Graphical Dashboards from Text Dashboards on page 8 4 for more information on this utility If you primarily use only one mode you need to create or modify only the dashboard file for that mode If you use both modes and want your changes to be available in either mode you need to make changes to both dashboard files or you can change only the text dashboard and then convert it to graphical Generally graphical dashboards are easie
226. etup User Activity Inquiry The screen lists all user IDs and terminals currently logged on to OSAS the application and function those terminals are using and the time the functions were accessed Use the commands to refresh sort or view additional information about the activities listed e Press R to update the screen with the most current information from the system If you have been monitoring user activity for some time use this command to update the view e Press S to sort the activities listed so that you can more easily find the information you need When the Select Sort Method screen appears select the field you want to use to sort the information and use the Proceed OK command to return to the User Login Activity screen and sort the information The Latest Function sort option will list only the functions each user is currently using e Press V to view detailed information about the selected activity The View Detail screen appears and lists more information about the current and previous menu selection for that terminal Press any key to return to the User Login Activity screen Resource Manager User Activity Report o M The User Activity Report displays the application a user has used when they used them and for how long The report can be sorted by User ID Application ID Menu Function or Date Time Sample User Activity Report 10 04 2007 Builders Supply Page i 3 42 PH User Activity Report User ID Acc
227. exadecimal codes to be sent to the plotter before the text for the graphics device Enter the hexadecimal codes to be sent to the plotter after the text Enter an operating system command that the system executes before a job is sent to the plotter Enter the commands to reset the device when the plotting job finishes Resource Manager Devices Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Devices Append Line Other Screen The Append Line Other screen appears when you add an alternate device line or edit one of these lines in the devices file E Append Line fo o Commands Edit Modes Other Help Z XE jaa ec OK Abandon config bbx Line alias NO tcp Enter a manual line to be added to the configuration file to control another type of device For example to set up one of the graphical devices X0 required to use the Windows graphical mode enter the following alias X0 sysgui To save your entry and return to the Devices screen click OK or press Enter Sample Config bbx Files The following pages include samples of config bbx files for these systems and short explanations of their components e Windows Open Windows e Linux UNIX e Novell Remember that you should not edit these files in a text editor as it is too easy to enter incorrect information Edit these files only through the Devices function Resource Manager 2 41 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Sample Wi
228. example if you want company A to save Payroll transaction history but not company B enter Own for A s option table type Then set the options accordingly for each company Enter the Application ID for which you want to set or view options When you use the Proceed OK command the Options table for that application appears and lists the options and interfaces available The Resource Manager Options screen is shown below as an example FERES VES z ee Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help RRlz aelmal ee OK Abandon Description Value Interface to General Ledger Automatically check reminders on startup of OSAS NO 2 Track user login activity NO 4 Do you want the system to assign sequential archive names NO Do you want to keep Print Manager report history NO Display Print Manager control lists for Terminal Keep field level access codes for EIS YES Keep value files history for EIS NO Keep E Mail History YES Hide menu entries when access is denied NO Bank Account and Credit Card Number display Last 4 Allow viewing of encrypted files in View File Contents NO Send E Mails Immediately NO Use Report Defaults NO Prohibit Period Locking with Transactions on File NO Prohibit Application Posting Processing for Locked Periods YES 3 Use separate check numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll NO x Option 001 of 018 Enter Tog
229. f this option is set to No functions to which access in denied for user still appear on the menu but cannot be selected When you first start OSAS the system will automatically create a role called ADMIN that grants access to all functions and will automatically apply this role to the user name you enter on startup You cannot delete the ADMIN role though you can change the user ID to whom it is assigned At least one user must have the ADMIN role at all times Resource Manager 2 19 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Roles Follow these steps to work with roles 1 Select Roles from the Installation and Configuration menu The Roles Screen appears N Roles is Es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt malmal e ee OK Role ID Order Entry Description Order Entry Application PO Menu ID PO02 4 Title Daily Work Line Access Description Type Program Param 01 Enter Orders 3 POENTINI F 2 02 Enter Returns 3 PORETINI D al 03 M Generate Orders 3 POGENCON o 04 W Copy Recurring Orders 3 POPSR 05 M Change Batches 3 POCHB 06 M Batch Control 3 RMACB 07 m 08 m 09 n ho nm h1 n 12 El 13 El 14 a s B Enter toggle All None Write Company H 08 12 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 Enter a Role ID to describe the role 3 Ifyou enter a new Role ID the Copy From Company ID field
230. f you use multiple printers you need to define each on a separate line 5 Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and return to the Form Printers screen Application Tables oo oo Use the Application Tables function to edit and view the tables used by any application The tables in Resource Manager are updated and maintained by other menu functions You need not maintain any of the Resource Manager tables using this function To produce a list of the information entered on the Tables screen print the Tables master list To work with an application s tables select Application Tables from the Company Setup menu The Application Tables screen appears El Application Tables eJ Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help zxt malma 7 l ee ok Table ID 4 Description Enter File Name GLTB Number of Cols 0 Column Length 0 Type Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR In the Enter File Name field enter the application table file name in the format XXTB where XX represents the application ID For example ARTB is the Accounts Receivable Tables file GLTB is the Tables file for General Ledger and so on The remaining fields on the screen are available only after you enter the file name 3 39 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Application Tables 3 40 After you enter an application table file enter the name of the table you want to work with in the Table ID field and press Enter to enable the remaining fie
231. ferent user ID When finished processing e mails press F7 to exit to the company setup menu E Mail Queue E Mail Information Screen Company Setup CHAPTER 3 The E Mail Information screen appears when you press E to edit a highlighted e mail EN E Mail Information fo es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help RX tz elana glee OK Abandon E Mail From samdObuilders_supply com To Customer y ACE001 S fa bhumphrey aceplumbingsupply com garry deacon bigmail com CC Employee BOUO0 ES Ls bourne builders_supply com BCC Employee ST0001 la La asotckard builders_supply com Subject AR Analysis Report Attachment Type MES y Attachment File C OSAS76 data Onpqq79x005 TXT Enter Edit Append Go to Header Done Company H 10 26 2010 Terminal T000 OVR The E Mail From field displays the originating e mail address Change it if you want the return e mail address to be different from the one set up in the E Mail Setup function in Resource Manager In the To carbon copy CC and blind carbon copy BCC fields select Other and enter the e mail address or select Vendor Customer or Employee and choose from the e mail addresses on file for those respective categories depending upon installed applications or select None to leave the field blank you must choose at least one To CC or BCC address The name of the report appears in the Subject field Ch
232. fig bbx file Press D to add the new terminal definition to the config bbx file For each terminal definition the Workstations screen appears prompting for the number of local printers connected to the terminal Enter the number of local printers and use the Proceed OK command to continue When the Local Printers screen appears enter the device name for the local printer for this workstation The Printers screen reappears so that you can define the local printer Enter the appropriate information and press D The next terminal to be defined will appear When all workstations and printers have been defined the system prompts you to confirm the creation of the new config bbx file Verify your changes to overwrite the existing file with the new definitions or press F7 to exit the program without saving the new definitions After confirmation OSAS closes All your changes take effect the next time you log on to the system If your changes are not correct copy the original config bbx and config bak files to their original locations and repeat the process 2 49 Directories MM Use the Directories function to add data directories to those that were established when Resource Manager was installed and to change the directories used by OSAS for installation media programs data files system files and so on Directory information is stored in the OSINFO DOS or OSINFO UNX file depending on your operating system in the sysfil direc
233. gh your accounting data and view reminders or calculators To access a command on the Other Commands menu click the menu name or press F4 then select the command you want to use from the list Global Inquiry Use the Global Inquiry command to gather information from all OSAS files and applications with a common field To produce a list of the windows use the Global Inquiry Window List function To produce a report of occurrences where links between windows are not continuous use the Global Inquiry Window Audit Report function The applications on the Global Inquiry menu are set up in the PARAM table in the Application Tables function Each application is assigned a window ID whose characteristics were either installed with Resource Manager or set up in the Global Inquiry Definitions function Setting up a Global Inquiry window definition requires knowledge of the file structures in OSAS If you are not familiar with OSAS file structures and you do not have a file descriptions manual consult your reseller before you add or change a Global Inquiry window definition APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu A 18 You can use the Global Inquiry Definitions and Application Tables functions to establish and update information about Global Inquiry window IDs A simple installation accomplishes the same tasks As a result when you use the Global Inquiry command the windows should be set up and logically connected to each other wit
234. gle Goto Write Company H 10 08 2010 Terminal 7000 OVR Use the commands to work with the options and interfaces Press Enter to toggle between values for the selected line e Press G to go to a specific option This command is available only if there is more than one page of options for the application e Press W to save your changes and return to the Options and Interfaces screen Options and Interfaces Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Resource Manager Options and Interfaces Option Description Interface to General Ledger Automatically check reminders on startup of OSAS Track user login activity Do you want the system to assign sequential archive names Do you want to keep Print Manager report history Display Print Manager control lists for Keep field level roles for EIS Keep value files history for EIS Keep E Mail History Hide menu entries when access is denied Bank account and credit card display Allow viewing of encrypted files in View File Contents Select Yes to use and post to General Ledger accounts for tax liability refundable and expenses in the Tax Locations and other Resource Manager functions If you select No you will need to manually enter these accounts Select Yes if you want Resource Manager to check for and display reminders in the Pop up calendar when you start OSAS Select No if you want to manually access these reminders This option keeps
235. gt AR lt gt AR lt 9 gt 100000 lt 10 gt 200 lt 11 gt 10 lt 12 gt lt 13 gt Y Y lt 14 gt 0 lt 15 gt 0 lt 16 gt 0 lt 17 gt lt 18 gt 0 lt 19 gt 0 lt Change File Size O M Use the Change File Size function to create a new file and copy the data from the old file into it You can also use this file under the direction of a qualified support technician to shrink files from which you have deleted records of old customers vendors employees inventory items and so on When you use this function OSAS creates a new data file reads the information from the existing file and copies all records it can read to the new file To shrink files select Change File Size from the Database Utilities menu The Change File Size screen appears EN Change File Size tole Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xtl melmalzelee OK _ Abandon File Name ARCU Description Customer File xxDATA File Information Actual File Information File Name ARCUx File Name ARCUx File Type High Rec Mkeyed File Type High Rec Mkeyed Logical Key Size 0 Logical Key Size 0 Number of Records Dynamic Number of Records Dynamic Bytes per Record 1152 Bytes per Record 1152 Active Records 13 Changes File Type 3 Highly Recoverable Mkeyed Number of Records 00000000 Bytes per Record 01152 Key Chain 00 3 High Recov Mkeyed 4 64 Bit Mkeyed 5 64 bit HR Mkeyed Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal TODO OVR
236. guide for the application you are using F2 Esc W Opens the Inquiry screen for the current field This command is available when the Inquiry 4 button appears next to the field in graphical mode or when the Inquiry flag appears at the bottom of the screen in text mode See page 1 31 for more information Shift F2 Esc 1 Opens the Information menu for the function when the Info flag appears at the bottom of the screen The commands that are available on this menu depend on the applications you have installed See page A 35 for more information F3 Esc D Deletes the current record or line item when allowed Resource Manager B 5 APPENDIX B OSAS Commands Function Commands Key Alternate Description Shift F3 Esc B Uses the item alias lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31 for more information In Sales Order this command allows you to enter purchase requisitions from the Ordered Units Shipped and Backordered fields In sales tax fields this command allows you to view sales tax breakdowns F4 Esc O Opens the Other Commands menu See page A 11 for details on the commands available Shift F4 Esc C Uses the customer vendor part number lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31 for more information F5 Esc X Abandons processing or clears all fields Shift F5 Esc G Uses the item detail lookup when the IN Search flag appears for an Item ID field See page 1 31
237. h convenient categories usually named after applications as options At that point you are ready to choose an option To use the function select Global Inquiry from the Other Commands menu then select an application from the menu that appears A screen appears listing details relating to that application The screen for Accounts Payable is shown below Item ID Description lt lt Begin gt gt Electrical Package A a a 150 Plumbing Package PEG A No No a 200 Heating Cooling Package PEG A No No 200100 Furnace EA A no no 200200 Water Heater EA A no No 200300 Air Conditioner EA A NO NO 200400 Water Softener EA A No No 200500 Sump Pump EA A No No 200600 Humidifier EA A No No 250 Exterior Panels cs A No No 300 Interior Door EA A No No 350 Entry Door EA A NO NO 400 Interior Materials PKG A No No 450 Slide by Window 24 x 40 EA A NO NO 460 Slide by Window 30 X 40 EA A NO NO 550 Millwork Package PEG A NG No fr 555 Millwork Package Cak PEG 0 No No E 600 Standard Window 24 X 40 EA D No NO E _ tematys J Attems iTemnist J serialno Lotnos locations F2 for window list CompanyH 12 28 2007 TeminalT000 OVR In the example above we selected Accounts Payable from the Global Inquiry menu The screen that appears lists vendors organized by vendor ID and the total amount due Because of the way the window is set up you
238. hat contains the contents you want to view The remaining fields on the screen are available only after you enter the file name 6 3 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities View File Contents To use the file s template when viewing the data select the Use Template check box or enter Y in text mode Using the file template places the template variable used to refer to the field next to the field s data Information about the file such as its description type key and record size appears in the middle section of the screen To reduce the amount of information produce through this function enter the Key chain to use to sort the data or enter 99 to view all key chains A key chain represents a primary key used in the table to sort and organize data Refer to the OSAS file descriptions manual for more information on key chains Enter the range of the records you want to view in the file in the Keys fields then select whether you want to print only the keys or both the keys and the data together Finally select the output device to use to product the file contents See Outputting Reports on page 1 36 for more information Sample File Contents List 10 03 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 4 03 PM View File Contents C 034375BBJ data GLJRH GL Journal File Key Chain 5 2010100000 1 gt 000033 lt 2 gt H lt 3 gt 2454377 lt 10 03 2007 4 gt 2454377 lt 10 03 2007 5 gt 0 lt 6 7 8 gt PAYMENTS RECEIVED lt
239. he Dashboard Editor to modify the current dashboard The Dashboard Editor screen for the current dashboard appears See Dashboard Editor on page 9 29 for more information Select Load or press L to load and open a different dashboard then select the dashboard you want to open Select History or press H to view the dashboard using saved field history from a different date This command is not available if the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to NO in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 You can use roles to limit access to EIS dashboard commands See EIS Roles on page 9 25 for more information Resource Manager CHAPTER 9 EIS Field Definitions 9 3 Setup Definitions 9 11 Function Definitions 9 17 EIS Roles 9 25 Dashboard Editor 9 29 Resource Manager EIS File Maintenance Use the functions on the EIS File Maintenance submenu to modify field setup and function definitions as needed to calculate or display the information that you want to appear on a dashboard You can also control access to dashboards and even individual fields they contain via the Roles function This function applies the roles you already use in OSAS to dashboards and the fields they contain Use the Dashboard Editor function to open a fresh blank dashboard You can use it to create a new dashboard from scratch or open an existing dashboard for editing This function contains the File and Edit comman
240. he field descriptions on page 7 31 After you enter or view the definition for the last column listed press either Ctrl J or Tab to move to the Heading Output Appearance field where you can change the headings used on the screen if necessary Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and continue to the next definition screen you selected If this is the last definition screen you selected the Global Inquiry Definition screen appears Enter another window ID to maintain or press F7 to return to the menu 7 33 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Global Inquiry Definitions Global Inquiry Links Screen 7 34 The Global Inquiry Definition Links screen lists the currently available links to other applications and their window IDs EEN Global Inquiry Definitions i foo Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xe Hum mal e ee OK _ Abandon Window APHISCHK Page 4 of 4 Global Links Label Window ID Define By Fid Pos Val Beg Len KeyPos 1 Inv Detl APHISID FIL 002 001 014 001 2 InvHist APHISINV FIL 002 001 006 001 3 Item Hist APHISITM FIL 002 001 006 001 4 5 6 Switch Output Appearance Inv detl iNv hist iTem hist Window Link 1 Switch Label Inv Detl Exclusion Application WindowlD APHIBID a lt lt Key Definition gt gt Define by Fld Pos Val Start Length Position in Key 1 FIL 2 1 14 1 2 FIL 2 15 1 15 Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal tooo ovR Use the fields at the bottom of the screen t
241. he order of menu selections add descriptive information to a menu or add other BB or BBj compatible programs to a menu Menu information is saved in the OSMNx file You can also use this function to add documents word processing documents spreadsheets graphic files and so on to a menu so that users can open them directly from OSAS When you add a document to a menu using a Type of A OSAS uses the associations you set up in the File Types function page 4 17 to launch the appropriate software application and open the file Note When you use add a document to the OSAS menu you must store the file you link to the menu in the location listed for the DocumentShare directory in the Directories function see page 2 51 and you must make sure the document s file name is no more than eight characters not including the extension as in osasdocs txt To produce a list of the information entered on the Menus screen press F8 on the Menus screen if you use the OSAS text mode or print the Menu master file list page 7 51 Print this list before you make any changes so that you can restore the original menus if necessary CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Menus 7 12 Follow these steps to customize the OSAS menus Select Menus from the System File Utilities menu The Menus screen appears Menus foja E Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xt aalmal 7el ee
242. her Help 2xt malmal 7 ee OK Abandon Import File La Delimiter 1 Enter or browse to the location of the file you want to import in the Import File field 2 Enter the Delimiter for the file tab space or comma 3 Use the Proceed OK command to import the file The contents of the file will populate the Change Fields screen Sample Change Fields Log 12 28 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 9 50 AM Change Field Log File Name Records Read Records Converted Original Total Record New Total Records ARDCH 4 2 2 2 ARCUH 15 13 13 13 ARTB 1 1 17 17 ARTB o o 17 17 SOTB 1 1 17 i7 SOTB o o 17 17 Field ID AR DISTRIBUTION Original Value New Value o1 03 02 04 6 14 Audit Document Links EMEN M You can attach documents to many entities throughout the OSAS applications such as customers vendors items and so on However if those documents are later moved or deleted without removing the attachment link entities can become cluttered with invalid document links The Audit Document Links function allows you to audit and optionally remove any document links that are broken Select Audit Document Links from the Database Utilities menu The Audit Document Links screen appears n Audit Document Links tee es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help x5 a nu ejee oK Abandon Flag App Description nelude nclude AR Acco
243. hical main menu is shown below E 1000 OPEN SYSTEMS R Accounting Software Ee Jr e Es File Views Tools Favorites Other User Help Oe Em E amp O H Builders Supply xj SAS E aay MainMenu Bank Reconciliation Transactions Bills of Materials Kitting Reconciliation Void and Stop Payments Fixed Assets Productivity Reports BR Journal General Ledger File Maintenance Bank Account Register General Report Writer Master File Lists Post Transactions Inventory Job Cost Payroll with Direct Deposit Purchase Order with Landed Cost Resource Manager Sales Order Company H Terminal T000 10 12 2010 4 27 PM You can move around the graphical menu in these ways Click an application to view that application s menu Click a menu item to view its functions Double click a function name to enter that function To exit from the graphical menu click a different application or menu name or press Tab to return to the main menu e To exit from OSAS click the Close box in the upper right corner of the screen press F7 or select Exit from the File menu Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 MDI Main Menu The MDI menu centralizes all OSAS functionality in one location applications appear as tabs at the top of the screen their menus and functions appear in a navigation pane on the left side of the screen and function screens appear in the large pane on the right Using this menu you
244. ical from text 8 4 editor 9 29 9 36 modes 8 4 overview 8 3 planning 8 5 9 30 EIS Dashboard Display 8 9 EIS Dashboards 13 1 13 21 EIS File Maintenance 9 1 9 36 EIS Master File Lists 12 1 12 9 EIS Periodic Maintenance 11 1 11 6 EIS Reports 10 1 10 9 fields 9 3 9 9 formulas 9 7 Functions 9 17 9 23 modes 8 4 overview 8 1 Setup 9 11 9 15 Resource Manager F F2 Inquiry 1 31 1 33 button 1 23 flag 1 27 See also Inquiry F2 window definitions 7 23 7 26 window definitions list 7 54 F6 Maintenance flag 1 27 icon 1 24 Favorites menu 4 15 4 16 A 15 adding functions A 15 removing functions A 15 Field Definitions adding files to 7 44 editing files 7 44 EIS fields 9 3 9 9 error codes 9 9 formulas 9 7 function IDs 9 5 setup IDs 9 5 overview 7 41 fields changing IDs on dashboards 9 36 dashboard properties 9 33 defining 7 41 EIS definitions 9 3 9 9 EIS definitions list 12 5 EIS error codes 9 9 EIS history report 10 9 list 7 58 on dashboards 9 32 9 35 user defined 2 59 values changing 6 11 FIL variable 4 18 file associations 4 17 File Lists 3 43 File Maintenance Print Manager 14 13 Parameters 14 11 Purge Report History 14 13 File Rebuild Verify 6 7 6 8 File Types 4 17 4 20 document attachments 4 17 overview 4 17 Resource Manager INDEX setting up 4 18 variables 4 18 files creating data files 3 25 dashboard 8 4 list of Resource Manager C 1 C 9
245. identify which software applications to use to open attached documents See page 4 17 for more information The Documents screen appears after you access the Documents command The Employee Documents screen is shown below as an example Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xtl malmal 7 lee OK Customer ID ACE001 ACE BUILDERS Document Information Document ARSAMPLE DOC Accounts Receivable Doc B FEE Line No 000001 of 000001 Enter edit Append View I Open Doc Next screen Prev Screen Go to Sort Company H 08 13 2010 Terminal T000 OVR A 39 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Information Menu A 40 Enter the ID for which you want to view attached documents The Inquiry F2 command is available Use these commands to view document information open an attached document or switch between or select a new ID Press H to return to the header section to select a new ID e Press F to view documents attached to the first ID on record e Press L to view documents attached to the last ID on record e Press N to view documents attached to the next ID on record e Press P to view documents attached to the previous ID on record e Press V to view document information The View Documents screen appears and lists the file name directory path and description of the attached document Press any key to return
246. ield Error Codes If a field displays something other than an numerical value it may indicate an error OSAS uses these messages to indicate EIS field errors Resource Manager XXXXXX indicates that you did not have role based permission for the field See EIS Roles on page 9 25 for more information Error indicates a problem with the math formula nun indicates an interface issue of some type kkkkkk suggests an error with the mask either defined or overflow 9 9 Setup Definitions oo M Setup Definitions define the range of data that is used by a function to return and display values Functions return values based on OSAS data For example a function might return all sales values in OSAS You use setup definitions to select the values used in a function so that it returns only those that interest you You could use the COMP setup definition to limit the values used in a function to only those for a certain company or you could use the GLSALES setup to limit the values used to only those for a certain range of accounts Many of the setups already defined in the system do not specify a range of values to use meaning that these setups select all values for the given type when they are used with functions For example the COMP setup selects only company values when used with a function but since its From and Thru values are blank by default it selects all values for all companies defined in OSAS You can modify the set
247. iew an application s menus click that application s tab e To view the functions a menu contains click the menu name The menu expands to list the functions it contains Click the function name to enter the function The function screen appears in the right pane e To exit from a menu click a different menu name or application tab To exit from OSAS click the Close box in the upper right corner of the screen press F7 or select Exit from the File menu Resource Manager 1 17 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS Function Screens Graphical screens contain the same functionality as text screens presented in a graphical format that includes easy access to commands via the mouse Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help es Tax Location MN Name Minnesota Sales Tax Tax Level 1 Tax ID 6182734 Authority MN Tax on Freight Misc Tax Liability Acct 203800 Tax Refundable Acct 203800 Class Description Sales Tax Purch Tax Tax Collected Tax Paid Consumer Goods a 01 Resale Sales 0 000 0 000 00 00 a 02 Exempt Sales 0 000 0 000 00 00 a 03 Ind Agr Prod 0 000 0 000 00 00 04 Interstate Comm 0 000 0 000 00 00 05 Motor Vehicles 0 000 0 000 00 00 06 Food Products 0 000 0 000 00 00 07 Clothing 0 000 0 000 00 00 y 08 Gasoline 0 000 0 000 00 00 E 09 Services 0 000 0 000 00 00 amp Total 1307 00 00 Calculated 1307 01 00 Over Short 01 00 Enter edi
248. iffers slightly from that of function screens Main Menu The toolbar for the main menu is shown below Click a tool button to access that Toolbar command Workstation Command Calendar Toggle Date Help Favorites N ce EM E S Application Calculator Call a BBj PRO5 Versions Program Function The toolbar for function screens is shown below Click a tool button to access Screen that command Toolbar File Start Paste Calendar Online Maintenance Over Documentation 2X mb Eg amp 00 Delete Copy Calculator Field Address Help Mapping Date Fields If you use BBj in graphical mode click the Calendar button when it appears next to date fields to open a calendar so that you can select the date you want to enter into that field 1 22 Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Address Mapping When you are working with a screen that contains one or more addresses you can use the Address Mapping command to view a map of those addresses This command combines the address information on the screen with the URL and search variables in the Address Mapping function and the Map Lookup ID specified in the Company Information function to automatically direct your web browser to an Internet mapping website and generate the map To view maps of addresses click the Address Mapping button on the toolbar The two Address Mapping buttons on the toolbar let you map both addresses when two addresses appear on the
249. ilable only if Bank Reconciliation is installed for this company 1 If you are using Bank Reconciliation and interfacing it with General Ledger the balance of the general ledger account you specified appears in the GL Balance box and you cannot change it The balance is updated when a transaction is posted in General Ledger to the general ledger account specified 2 If Bank Reconciliation does not interface with General Ledger enter the balance of the general ledger account you specified This field is updated when you post transactions in Bank Reconciliation and in interfaced applications that affect this bank account ID 3 Enter the last statement balance The last statement balance is updated each time you use the Cleared Transactions function for the bank account ID 3 18 Bank Accounts Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Enter the date of the last statement you received for the bank account in the Last Statement Date box The last statement date is updated each time you use the Cleared Transactions function for the bank account ID Enter the GL period of the last statement you received for the account in the Last Statement Period box For credit card accounts the Last Payment Information section displays the amount the date and the invoice number of the last credit card payment information recorded from the bank reconciliation application 3 19 Accounting Periods o M Use the Accounting Periods function to define the
250. inals that use OSAS e Use the Printers screen page 2 29 to define the shared and local printers on your system e Use the Plotters screen page 2 39 to define plotters used on your system Use the Other screen page 2 41 to add manual lines describing other types of devices to the config bbx file Resource Manager 2 23 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Using the Devices Function 2 24 Follow these steps to view or edit the config bbx file 1 Select Devices from the Installation and Configuration menu The Devices configuration backup screen appears before you re allowed to make any changes to device settings You must save a backup before continuing mE Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xe elma e eo ARA remm File Name Applications osas75 progRM config bak To save a backup copy of your current settings enter a new file name such as cnfg1203 bak If you don t need a backup copy leave the file name as is the system erases the old backup file and overwrites it with the new one After you specify the backup file name the Devices screen appears and lists information about the devices and terminals set up on your system Devices ommands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help C FCBS 100 HANDLES 100 CIBS 100 ALIASES 23 TRANSPARENTRGB 192 192 192 alias PF FILE Print file LF 0A FILE PRINT TO alias LPL sysprint System Default Printer Laser L
251. indow Definition file stores information needed to open and display an inquiry window The information from this file is then used by the GENWIND PUB program to create an inquiry window This file stores the layout and related information for a given EIS graphical dashboard This file stores the layout and related information for a give EIS text or character dashboard The Conversion Log file stores any errors that occur during file conversion The Field Definition File stores EIS field IDs and descriptions along with the functions and setup definitions needed to generate each field Each field ID corresponds to a field value in the EIVAL Calculated Values file The Field Definition Header file stores each EIS field ID mask description and math formula It also stores the value date and time terminal and error type for the last time the field was updated or recalculated You access this information when you use the View command on a dashboard for the selected field Use the Field Definitions function page 9 3 to change a field ID mask description or formula The Function Data file stores each value returned by a function Each function can return one or more values Use the Recalc or Global command on a dashboard or the Global Dashboard Update function page 11 3 to make a field return a value The Function Header file stores such information as the ID and description of each function Use the Functions function page 9 17
252. ine and add 1B266C323255 at the end of the Standard or Compressed Print field 3232 is the hexadecimal code for 22 which moves everything to the right 22 720 of an inch If you need to move text farther to the right change the second and last numbers in 3232 because the 3s are always constant For example to move the text farther to the right try 25 which changes the hex code to 3235 In hex each number is represented by 3 and then the number so 2 32 and 5 35 Resource Manager Devices Sysprint Devices Direct Printers Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Up and Down Issues If you print to a sysprint device in Windows you can place a decimal in the printer s Top Margin field on the alias line to shift text up or down For example if the top margin setting is 5 increasing the number 54 moves text down while decreasing the number 46 moves text up A 1 4 character shift is approximately 04 added to or subtracted from the top margin value If you use a direct printer in Windows Linux or UNIX you cannot move text up To move lines down you must add the following configuration values to the config bbx file for the printer alias you are using These values let you move text down in 1 720 inch increments Follow these steps 1 Select Devices from the Installation and Configuration menu 2 Edit the appropriate alias line and add 1B266C343555 at the end of the Standard or Compressed Print field 3435
253. ining local printers an if endif loop must be created for both the terminal definition T01 and each available session T010 through T019 You can do this by editing the config bbx file for individual workstations or by using the RMSET program See the next section for more information Note Although not shown in the sample the novell tts parameter should be included in the config bbx file if you have Novell with the Transaction Tracking System TTS and you want BBx to use it However this is not recommended because some OSAS function erase data files and TTS does not allow you to erase files Enter NO for this question when you install OSAS Using the RMSET Program to Create a New Config BBX File 2 48 If your network has multiple workstations each with its own local printer a quick and easy way to define the config bbx file for these workstations and printers is to use the RMSET program Before running this program save the current config bbx file and the config bak backup file in an outside directory or on a disk in case a device is defined incorrectly You can also print the config bbx file if you wish to list current definitions keep changes in definition limited and reduce the need to communicate changes to all OSAS users Follow these steps to use the RMSET program to create the config bbx file 1 With everyone else out of OSAS select Call a PRO 5 program from the Other Commands menu 2 When the Call a PRO 5 Program s
254. ion Sales Tax Class Exp Acct Purch Tax Ref Tax Taxable Nontaxable Tax Calculated Over Short Refundable 00 Consumer Goods 4 000 Sales 29316 14 46522 97 1209 64 1172 65 36 99 806000 4 000 000 Purch 3521 24 00 140 85 140 85 DO 00 01 Resale Sales 000 Sales 00 5654 00 00 00 00 000 000 Purch 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 Ind Agr Prod 6 000 Sales 205 52 00 12 33 12 33 00 606000 6 000 000 Purch 25002 47 00 1500 17 1500 15 02 00 TOTAL FOR LOCATION CA Sales 29521 66 52176 97 1221 97 1184 98 36 99 Purch 28523 71 00 1641 02 1641 00 02 00 5 14 Resource Manager Clear Sales Tax ooo Ml Use the Clear Sales Tax function to clear the accumulated sales and tax amounts from the tax location records at the end of the tax reporting period as part of your periodic processing or on a regular basis such as weekly monthly or yearly This function prepares the records to accumulate new figures for the next reporting period You can clear tax locations for a range of taxing authorities and tax locations You must print the Sales Tax Report as part of your audit trail for all of your tax locations and tax authorities before you clear accumulated sales tax Once you clear sales tax there is no way to retrieve the data without a backup Keep in mind that this function clears all data currently stored in the sales tax file you cannot select a date from which to clear the accumulated tax Resource Manager 5 15 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax
255. is aea Re 13 11 AP AMALYSISS 4 rtr GE NES ENR k 13 13 Top 10 Customers 0000 0 13 15 Top 10 Ttems oia idas 13 17 Top 10 Sales RepS ooocoooccooooooo ooo 13 19 Top 10 Vendors l l esses 13 21 Section Resource Manager Print Manager Chapter 14 Print Manager 14 1 Archive Report Control 00 14 3 Report History Inquiry 00 14 7 Parameters uas exis br ECCE ERA 14 11 Purge Report History 00 14 13 Appendix A OSAS Menus A 1 Main Men s ete ae En A 3 Function Menus 0 0 eee eee eee ee eee A 9 Favorites Menu 0 0 A 15 Other Commands Menu 2006 A 17 Information Menu 0 0 cee eee eee A 35 Appendix B OSAS Commands B 1 Main Menu Commands lll else B 3 Function Commands 0000 e ee eee B 5 Help Commands 0 0 0 E aS B 9 Scroll Region Commands 0 B 11 Field Editing Commands B 13 CONTENTS Appendix C File Descriptions C 1 Appendix D Data File Conversion D 1 Appendix E Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality E 1 Index IX 1 vii CHAPTER 1 About Resource Manager 1 5 Welcome to OSAS Starting OSAS 1 11 Navigating OSAS 1 15 Inquiry 1 31 Reports 1 35 The OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software OSAS product line has a modular design and consists of several accounting applications linked by a core manager
256. is in an Item ID field you can use any of the Inventory Lookups commands to search for information about items and select an item for entry in the field you are in Command Description Alias Lookup Searches for items with a specified alias listed as an alternate item When you enter the alias you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Customer Vendor Searches for an item based on customer ID or vendor Lookup ID When you enter the customer or vendor ID you can Detail Lookup Lot Lookup Serial Lookup Description Lookup use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Searches for detailed information about an item You can enter search information in any of the fields that appear using any of the following wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search lt gt Searches for an item based on lot number When you enter the lot number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Searches for an item based on serial number When you enter the serial number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Searches for an item based on item description When you enter the description you can use the and wild card characters to restrict or widen the search A 13 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Information Menu Commands Edit Modes Other Help Help Menu RX Function Menus Customer
257. is the hex code for 45 which moves text down 45 720 of an inch To move text down more change the second and last numbers in 3435 because the 3s are always constant For example try 56 to move text farther down which changes the hex code to 3536 In hex each number is represented by 3 and then the number so 5 35 and 6 36 Left to Right and Up and Down Issues If you use a direct printer in Windows Linux or UNIX and must add hex codes to the config bbx file to adjust text both left to right and up and down you must edit the file with a text editor because the command is too long to enter through the Devices function Open the config bbx file with a text editor and add the codes to the end of the SPz section of the alias line for standard forms or to the end of the CP section of the alias line for compressed forms Printing Laser Forms on Ink Jets Bubble Jets or Desk Jets These printers cannot interpret laser definitions meaning that there is no way to control how the forms print Either they print correctly or they do not Models labeled for Windows have better success but there is no way to control how the forms print Test your situation before ordering laser forms Resource Manager 2 37 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Continuous Forms When you print forms less than 11 inches in length such as checks or invoices through a sysprint device we recommend you turn off alignment mark printing Prin
258. istory Report oo B The Dashboard History Report contains the field values that you saved using the Global Dashboard Update function and helps you uncover important trends in your business This report is not available if the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to NO in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 It s important to remember that dashboard history is only updated when you use the Global Dashboard Update function page 11 3 history is not saved when you use the Global command within a dashboard itself Sample Report 06 09 2007 Builders Supply 3 44 PM EIS Dashboard History Report Dashboard ARTOP10C Top 10 Customers Graphical Field ID 01 09 04 ACE BUILDERS 1 223 580 ACE BUILDERS 1 665 331 TENNESSEE SHELTERS IN 808 095 KANSAS CITY GEODESIC H 696 228 LOS ANGELES CONSTRUCTI 541 298 CASH SALES DALLAS TX 522 780 CASH SALES DALLAS TX 497 803 TENNESSEE SHELTERS IN 454 090 DALLAS FT WORTH DOME H 447 243 DALLAS FT WORTH DOME H 367 487 KANSAS CITY GEODESIC H 377 085 GREATER NEW YORK DOMES 315 563 CASH SALES MINNEAPOLIS 318 997 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A ppp Resource Manager 10 7 Field History Report Te The Field History report lists values over a range of dates for the field you select Unlike the Dashboard History Report which shows all field definitions and their values for a given dashboard this report lets you compare values for a
259. it Modes Other Help Rx Ee ma e e OK Abandon This function will remove post code history for a specified post code Drill Down will not be available for all transactions with the Post Code entered GL Journal entries and Transaction History will NOT be deleted Purge Post Code 00000001 3 Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 2 Enter or choose the post code you would like to purge 7 49 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Purge Post Codes 3 Click OK to proceed with the post code purge You are returned to the System File Utilities menu 7 50 File Lists Laser Label Setup List The Laser Label Setup List shows the label definitions created in the Laser Label Setup function page 7 3 10 12 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 10 17 AM Laser Label Setup List Label ID Description Type Print Format Label Labels Gutter Lines Width Height Across Down Between New Large Labels Laser Compressed 30 20 1 1 1 i Small Labels Small Label Sheets Laser Compressed 40 10 E 5 1 1 End of Report Menu List The Menu List shows the menus that are on your system for a range of companies applications or menu IDs that you select 11 27 2007 Builders Supply Page 1 5 42 PM Menu List 4444444444444 Accounts Payable ID Title Description Type Program Menu Parameter APO1 Information Inquiry 1 Vendors and Invoices 3 APQUIRY 2 Invoices 3 APSOICON a
260. ites Inactive v Lock Windows Inactive Allow Exit Active Clipboard Inactive Copyrights Active M Output Type Printer Live Data Active Word Wrap Exit Line Down Verify PgDn Active z Field Defaults Location ID MN0001 a Screen Pages 5 Bank ID FNB001 a Printer EIS Dashboard ARTOP10C a User ID Other Defaults Map Lookup ID GOOGLE BBj Forms Printers Client Based Server Based Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Enter the Workstation for which you want to define default values The rest of the fields on this screen are available only after you enter the workstation ID If you enter a new workstation ID the Copy From field appears Use this field to copy default settings from another workstation to save time In the Copy To field enter the workstation ID to which you want to copy these default settings enter ALL to copy the default settings to all workstations or leave the field blank to work with the Preferences for this workstation only Select or enter the values you want to use for the options listed See the field definitions for more information on a specific field To proceed to the second screen after you ve made your changes press Page Down Press Page Up to return to this screen Your changes are not saved until you use the Proceed OK command on the second screen Resource Manager Preferences User Setup CHAPTER 4 Field Definitions Field Name Description Bell Verify Exit
261. ith country codes select Country Codes from the System File Utilities menu The Country Codes screen appears E Country Codes eJ o Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 xX em 2728109 OK Abandon Country Code JS 4 Country Name U S A Phone Mask ie ies Use Postnet y Status Bar Company H 07 30 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 1 Select or enter a Country Code then edit or enter the Country Name and Phone Mask 7 39 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Country Codes 2 You can enter special characters to mask the country code area code or city code phone number and so on Enter spaces where numbers are entered and other characters to separate the numbers for readability if desired The total length of numbers and separators cannot exceed 20 characters Example Entering a U S phone mask If you want a U S phone number to appear as 555 555 1212 enter a left parenthesis three spaces a right parenthesis three spaces a dash then four Spaces to finish as in the example below without the quotation marks If you wanta U S phone number to appear as 555 555 1212 enter three spaces a dash three more spaces another dash then four spaces to finish as in this example without the quotation marks 3 Checkthe Use Postnet box to print a Postnet barcode This feature is available on BBj systems only See Appendix E for more information
262. ity Inquiry ooooooooooooooooo 4 3 User Activity Report 4 5 Preferences oor ii iaa 4 7 Favorites Menu 0 00 00 02 eee 4 15 File Types esee me e Hea ee 4 17 COlOIS uid ute ce AS en 4 21 Keyboard Leo ee 4 23 Purge User Activity ooo ooooocooooommoooo 4 25 Sales Tax Reporting 5 1 Tax Classes 4222240113 qug est a 5 3 TaxLocations css KERRE R SE AE EN RS NUR 5 5 Tax TOPS iii areas 5 9 Sales Tax Report 00 0 0 000 eee 5 13 Clear Sales Tax ind a 5 15 ENS ar rare 5 17 Database Utilities 6 1 View File Contents 0 0 0 0 000 6 3 Change File Size oorr 6 5 File Rebuild Verify ooo ooococoocoooooooo 6 7 Purge Data Records esee 6 9 Change Fields 22222020 eeeeeen en 6 11 Audit Document Links 2222222020 6 15 Data File Allocation Report 6 19 System File Utilities 7 1 Laser Label Setup 2 2020 eneneenen nn 7 3 Report Criteria lees 7 5 Import Definitions llle 7 7 MEHUS cun AAA NAA HORE UIN EIU 7 11 Section Resource Manager Executive Information Sum CONTENTS Application Information 0 7 15 Help Screens o RR eR ERR ai ek 7 19 Inquiry Window Definitions 7 23 Global Inquiry Definitions 7 27 State Codes cce eee DR LN MIHI T d 7 37 Country Codes is sisi asta le A 7 39 Change Field Definitions 7 41 System
263. l IDs to eliminate file locking problems When terminal IDs are unique in a multiuser system a second user will not be able to access a function that locks a file until the process completes and the lock is released Each user ID must be associated with its own terminal ID User IDs and terminals work differently depending on the language you use e If you use PRO 5 the system detects the terminal from the required t parameter used to launch OSAS and determines which user is associated with that terminal when you start OSAS After determining the user OSAS defaults that user ID into the login screen and you can log in e Ifyou use BBj the system determines which terminal is associated with the user ID you enter when you log in then uses the default settings associated with that terminal Because the terminal is determined from the user ID your preferences travel with you regardless of which computer you use to log in User ID and terminal information is saved in the OSUS file in the sysfil directory While you cannot delete this file you can clear all user information from it with the exception of a single user with administrator permissions There are two types of users those who are set up through OSAS and those setup up through BBj Enterprise Manager Users set up through BBj Enterprise Manager use BBj validation and are able to carry out tasks within OSAS with User Authentication turned off Resource Manager 2 9 CHAPTER
264. lags appear in the margin See page 1 23 and page 1 27 for more information on these commands When you see the phrase use the Proceed OK command in this guide press Page Down in either text or graphical mode In graphical mode you can also click OK to proceed If a function or feature is only available if the Banking application is installed this banking flag appears in the margin If you use the Direct Deposit application that is available for Payroll additional features and functions were added to Payroll when you installed Direct Deposit When a feature or function has been added and is only available when you use Payroll with Direct Deposit the Direct Deposit icon appears in the margin Purchase Order functionality that is only available if you have Purchase Order with Landed Cost installed will be signified by the Landed Cost flag in the margin Look for the book icon this icon alerts you that this section provides more detailed information about the function or topic Often this information is more technical in nature to serve the needs of advanced users network administrators or resellers In other cases this section gives additional background about the function describes how the function works within the system or details interactions between this and other functions 1 2 Resource Manager Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Examples are presented in a table like this one Example In the manual thi
265. lds and list the table s information EN cis fo Sis Commands Edit Modes Other Help zxtleelmal elee ok Abandon Table ID GLAUDH 4 Description Number of Cols 1 Column Length 30 Type A y Builders Supply AUDIT TRIAL BALANCE December 31 2007 Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal To00 ovR If you entered a new table ID the Copy From field appears Enter the table from which you want to enter information or leave the field blank to continue Enter or edit the table s Description number of columns Column Length and Type of characters it contains A for alphanumeric N for numeric 3 for numeric with 3 decimal places or 4 for numeric with 4 decimal places The long bar at the top of the screen contains the headings for the columns in the table Enter or edit these headings if necessary then enter or edit the table s data in the remaining fields The data in the table depends on the application used to create it If any of the data is incorrect edit the appropriate entry Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes then enter another table ID to work with use the Abandon F5 command to change the application table file or use the Exit F7 command to return to the main menu GL Account Audit Report oo B Use the GL Account Audit Report function to scans all tables and data files in the current company for selected applications and verifies the presence and validity of the General Ledger
266. les for that application as well the system prompts you for verification before processing continues When the verification message s appears verify that you want to remove the specified application and use the Proceed OK command to continue After you verify the application s removal OSAS removes the application from the system and returns you to the main menu 2 76 Resource Manager CHAPTER 3 Company Information Bank Accounts Accounting Periods Data File Creation Data File Conversion Options and Interfaces Form Codes Form Printers Application Tables GL Account Audit Report File Lists E Mail Queue Archive Control 3 3 3 9 3 21 3 25 3 27 3 31 3 35 3 37 3 39 3 41 3 43 3 49 3 55 Company Setup Use the functions on the Company Setup menu to maintain information about the companies you manage through OSAS set up bank accounts create data files or convert them to a newer version set options and interfaces for all applications set up form codes and printers and manage application tables and print file lists 3 1 Company Information o MM Use the Company Information function to perform these tasks e Add and remove companies e Change the name address and phone and fax numbers for a company e Activate the company s files for use with the OSAS Web application e Select the date and time format for a company s reports and screens e Set a company s location bank ID and OSAS Web batch
267. lue to the list When the Edit or Add Original New Values dialog box appears enter the value you want to change in the Original Value field then enter the new value that you want to use for this field in the New Value field Use the Proceed OK command to return to the Change Fields screen 5 Continue entering old and new values until you have specified all of the values you want to change in the Values section 6 Press S to switch to the File Description section to specify which files to change during processing e The Time field gives you an idea of the relative time it takes to change the field in a given file Files where this code or ID are a part of the key to the file can be changed more quickly than files where each record in the file must be scanned for the code or ID Each file is rated as Short or Long to denote the estimated time required to change the field Change Fields Database Utilities e CHAPTER 6 e The Tag field denotes whether the file is included in the change process Tag the file to change fields in the file You should change IDs in all of the files as a general rule Exclude files from the change process only when your reseller or support representative instructs you to so Select a command e Press B to begin change field processing When the changes are complete the log prints if you elected to produce it e Press I to open the Import Field List dialog box This allows you to import a formatted list
268. maximum length you can enter is 94 3 13 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Bank Accounts 8 14 Reconciliation Information a Bank Accounts fo amp Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help zxaleelmao e ee OK Abandon Bank Account ID FNB001 First National Bank Type Bank Account GL Account Number 100000 CASH IN BANK 1st NATIONAL Reconciliation Information GL Account 100000 CASH IN BANK 1st NATIONAL GL Balance 4840 66 Last Statement Balance 3564 00 Last Statement Date 08 29 2007 c3 Last Statement Period 07 2007 Reconciliation File Format CompanyH 08 29 2007 Terminal Tooo ovn If you are using Bank Reconciliation and interfacing it with General Ledger the balance of the general ledger account you specified appears in the GL Balance box and you cannot change it The balance is updated when a transaction is posted in General Ledger to the general ledger account specified If Bank Reconciliation does not interface with General Ledger enter the balance of the general ledger account you specified This field is updated when you post transactions in Bank Reconciliation and in interfaced applications that affect this bank account ID If you are setting up the Bank Reconciliation system enter the balance of the last statement you received for the bank account in the Last Statement Balance box The last statement balance is updated each time you use the Cleared Transactions function for the bank account
269. meric Field Field Number Field Start and Field Length boxes located in the bottom half of the screen These fields are only available after you select the Record Test check box In the Operand field enter the comparison operator that is performed to test the record You can enter these operators e Enter to test whether the field is equal to the test value e Enter lt to test whether the field is less than the test value e Enter gt to test whether the field is greater than the test value e Enter lt gt to test whether the field is not equal to the test value In the Field Length field enter the comparison value for the record test Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Field Definitions screen 7 45 System Messages o M System messages are messages that appear while you use OSAS that help you determine the proper steps to correctly use the application and function in which the message appeared These messages can remind you which fields are required that a field has an incorrect value or that you ve made a change that may impact other areas Use the System Messages function to view or change the system messages that appear for specific applications Note Use extreme caution when editing system messages System messages are positional meaning that the system locates and uses the appropriate message at the proper time based on its position Do not change a message s position or con
270. mmands Edit Modes Other Help xts ea ma 29 90 ok __ Abandon File Name POPQx File Description Numeric Field Field Number Field Start Field Length Record Test Field Number Field Start Field Length Operand Field Length PO Purchase Requisitions File 2 1 Enter or edit information about the file in the fields Enter the F ile Name and Description of the file that contains the field If the file is company specific add a lowercase x to the end of the file name fthis field or enter Y Enter the Fi contains numeric values select the Numeric Field check box in text mode if not clear the box or enter N ield Number where the field is located within this file e If this is not a numeric field enter the starting position within the specified field number where this field begins in the Field Start field e If this is not a numeric field enter the total number of characters that this field uses in the Field Length field Change Field Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 e Tf this field occurs only in certain records within the file select the Record Test check box or enter Y in text mode to perform a test of each record to see if the record is of the proper type If the field occurs in all records in the file clear the box or enter N If you choose to perform a record test enter the data required to identify a record within the file that contains this field in the Nu
271. mple you can use the Maintenance command to add a new customer or item from within the Transactions function The Maintenance command is available when the Maintenance button appears on the toolbar Click the button or press F6 to open the File Maintenance function associated with that field and enter or edit a new master file record Text Mode The OSAS text mode is available on all operating systems If you use OSAS on an operating system that does not have graphical capabilities the text mode is the only mode available In text mode all screens are presented in an easy to use textual interface that you navigate through using keyboard commands Main Menu The text main menu is shown below EN osas tooo oa SeitiamsmEditwPuintek ieips 11 27 2007 Company H Builders Supply 4 25 PM Main Menu Bills of Materials Kitting ITO 9 OPEN SYSTEMS R Accounting Software 1 24 Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 When you select an application the application s menu is superimposed over the main menu Selecting an entry on an application menu opens a function screen or a submenu You can move around the text main menu in these ways Resource Manager Use the arrow keys to move the cursor up and down to highlight the application you want Then press Enter to select it Press the first letter of an application name to move the cursor to the
272. mpressed print about 17 6 characters per inch Enter the number of columns that can be printed on one line in compressed printer mode For a standard narrow carriage printer this value defaults the width of the paper to 132 columns wide If you are using a wide carriage printer this value defaults to 240 The maximum value you may use is 255 larger values are interpreted as the default value by the system If you use Windows select the box or enter YES in text mode if you want to open a dialog box that lets you select a printer Clear the box or enter NO in text mode if you want to print to the Windows default printer Enter the hexadecimal code that turns on expanded print mode Enter the code that turns off expanded print mode Enter the number of columns that can be printed in expanded print mode Enter the number of expanded print lines that fit on a page 2 31 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Device Mode Description Form Feed Font Initialization Left Margin Legacy Margins Line Feed Lines Per Page Lock File 2 32 Enter the hexadecimal code that makes the printer skip to the top of the next page Enter the font in which you want your reports printed For sysprint devices enter the name of the TrueType font to use surrounded by quote marks for example Courier New Leave this field blank to use the default font If illegible characters print when y
273. n the OSAS text calculator opens on top of the current function screen If you use the graphical version the OSAS graphical calculator opens Text Based Calculator With the OSAS text calculator you can store and retrieve totals and tapes add comments to tapes and print tapes A common use is to calculate a total exit from the calculator then enter the total into the field from which you started Memory p lt Functions gt 0 00 Subtotal Comment The left side of the lt Tape gt Print Tape The right side calculator is the MSIE reminds you which working side You keys and functions can store values in Erase Tape C are available and memory view the fuge Maras Quy lists the calculator s Its of former De sig status resu Memory M calculations on the Mem Recall MR tape and enter Mem Clear MC Exit Q values to be ECTS P calculated Decimal 0 Exit Total WU p Status Entry Printer OFF 0 00 Decimal 2 The printout tape of a real calculator is simulated in the Tape section Numbers operators and running totals appear at the bottom of the tape as you enter them A 20 Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A Each workstation has its own unique tape for the calculator OSAS recalls the last tape that was used you start the calculator The tape is stored as a file on the hard disk and is reloaded each time you use the calculator When you want to start a new tape press F1 to erase the curre
274. n the system prompts you to use the Exit F7 command to return to the menu Switch to graphical mode if necessary and access your graphical dashboard to verify the conversion Resource Manager Working with Dashboards Executive Information Summary CHAPTER 8 Planning Dashboard Changes Before you create or modify a dashboard take the time to carefully plan and research the fields you will need the values this fields display and the functions and setups that return the values you want In your planning address these issues What purpose does the dashboard serve What do you want to use it for How should the dashboard look Can you modify an existing dashboard and save yourself some work or do you need to start from scratch Where is the information coming from Are you consolidating information from several applications What information do you need What types of data are already available to you in current field setup and function definitions Do you need to modify any fields or setups to get the information you need Do you consider this data to be sensitive information Should you use roles to limit access to field information to only approved personnel After you ve determined how the dashboard should look and what information it should include follow these steps to create your new dashboard 1 Resource Manager Research Use the functions on the ElS Master File Lists menu page 12 1 to print detaile
275. n check box options ignore that step and continue to the next 12 1 CHAPTER 12 EIS Master File Lists 12 2 Follow these steps to print an EIS master file list Select the list you want to print from the EIS Master File Lists menu The selection screen for that list appears The Screen Definitions List screen is shown below as an example EN Screen Definitions List s Cere fea Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xalaemo l e e 0 Abendon Pick Dashboard From ARTOP10C A Thu DAILY la Show Screen Layouts Character only v Show Fields Used vi Show Field Detail v Show Function Setup Detail E Print Character Dashboards Graphical Dashboards Both Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo ovn Select the range of values to print in the list boxes Leave these fields blank to select all values or enter values into a combination of fields to select specific information to print on the list If the screen contains check boxes or Yes No options select the check box or enter Y in text mode to print that information on the list Clear the check box or enter N if you do not want to print that information If the screen contains option buttons or numbers select the option to use to print the list for that mode text character graphical or both or to print the list in full detail or summary only Select the output device to begin printing the list See Outputting Reports
276. n older version of Resource Manager to the current version you may need to convert your files in a certain order Consult Data File Conversion on page D 1 for detailed information on the order in which you should convert files Before you convert an application s files make sure you e Note the version number of the application you are converting The Data File Conversion function has no way of determining this information e Consider the exact setup of your system Since OSAS code can be customized modifications to your system might be lost if you install a new version of a program or update a file If you are not sure whether your system is ready for conversion consult your reseller e Back up your data files Note If you use Contractor s Job Cost OSAS does not consider the APFORMX and CJFORMX where X is a number between 0 and 9 to be data files and thus does not convert them when you use the Data File Conversion function To use these files in a new version you must either set them up again in the new installation or copy the files manually from the old directory to the new sysfil directory 3 27 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Data File Conversion Note Because tables are also converted when you convert data files any changes made including those in Options and Interfaces since the initial set up may be lost Check table settings and verify your options and interfaces selections after converting all companies If you need
277. n tax If you use multiple tax levels and answered Yes to the Calculate Tax on Tax Level X prompt tax on tax is calculated according to this formula Subtotal Previous tax location tax Current tax location percent For example you have a transaction with a subtotal of 1000 This transaction has been assigned a tax location with five tax levels each with a tax percent of 5 Levels 2 5 also calculate tax on tax Tax in this example is calculated as follows Level 1 1000 05 50 Level 2 1000 50 05 52 50 Level 3 1000 50 52 50 05 55 13 4 1000 50 52 50 55 13 05 57 88 Level 5 1000 50 52 50 455 13 57 88 05 60 78 Transaction total 1000 50 52 50 55 13 57 88 60 78 1276 29 Note that levels 2 5 include any calculated taxes from the previous level before calculating tax for that level Leve Deleting a Tax Group To delete a tax group select the group you want to delete on the Tax Groups screen and press F3 When the confirmation message appears select Yes to delete the tax group or No to return to the Tax Groups screen 5 12 Resource Manager Sales Tax Report MM Print the Sales Tax Report at the end of each period for information about how taxes have been allocated for the tax locations you set up Note Be sure to print the Sales Tax Report as part of your audit trail before you clear sales tax as part of your periodic processing whether it be on a period qu
278. n the Inventory and Sales Order applications and is printed on some screens reports and forms Enter the standard weight system your company uses For example enter LBS or lbs if you use pounds or KG or kg if you use kilograms Select the Map Lookup ID to use to view maps of addresses with the Address Mapping command Note You must set up information about the mapping websites you use in the Address Mapping function page 2 65 before you can select an ID here After you ve set up mapping websites and selected the Map Lookup ID to use for this company you can use the Address Mapping command when it is available on function screens to view maps of the addresses they contain If you want dates in the company s reports and on OSAS screens to appear in American format mm dd yyyy enter 0 in the Date Mask field If you want dates to appear in European format dd mm yyyy enter 1 If you want times in the company s reports and on OSAS screens to appear in standard 12 hour format hh mm A M P M enter 0 in the Time Mask field If you want times to appear in military 24 hour format enter 1 Company Information Company Setup CHAPTER 3 e For each Mask Type listed enter the Number of Decimals to use for that value throughout OSAS The Sample Display shows you an example of how the numbers will appear Notice that the number of places to the left of the decimal decreases as you increase the number of decimal places Make sure th
279. n to continue Verification Press lt PgDn gt to proceed Address Mapping When you are working with a screen that contains an address you can use the Address Mapping command to view a map of that address This command combines the address information on the screen with the URL and search variables in the Address Mapping function and the Map Lookup ID specified in the Company Information function to automatically direct your web browser to an Internet mapping website and generate the map To view maps of addresses press Shift F4 to map the first address on the screen or Shift F5 to map the second if present The two Address Mapping commands let you map both addresses when two addresses appear on the screen such as on order Header Information screens If the screen contains only one address the second command is not available The Address Mapping command is available when the Map flag appears Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Note Before you can view maps you must set up information about the mapping websites you use in the Address Mapping function enter the path to your web browser in the Preferences function and specify the Map Lookup ID to use in the Company Information function See page 2 65 page 4 7 and page 3 3 for information Resource Manager 1 29 Inquiry O M When the Inquiry button Y appears next to a field or the Inquiry flag appears in the lower right corner of the scre
280. nd edit the config tpm database configuration file required by the BASIS PRO 5 ODBC driver Use the E Mail History Report function to print a report containing information about e mail messages Use the Purge E Mail History to clear the E mail History file Use the Remove Applications function to remove any application except Resource Manager from the system Resource Manager Install Applications o M Use the Install Applications function to install or reinstall applications including Resource Manager to update existing applications with new versions or to install OSAS updates This function installs from the path defined in the Directories function page 2 51 For applications in which the order of installation is important Accounts Receivable and Sales Order for example this function automatically installs applications in the correct order and warns you when you also need to install complementary applications if they are not already present on your system Note Before you install applications or updates you must first identify the installation path for the DVD drive or update directory in the Directories function page 2 51 In Windows enter the drive letter of the DVD ROM drive or the directory to which you copied the update as the installation path In Linux or UNIX enter the DVD ROM root directory for example mnt cdrom or the directory to which you copied the update Installing Follow these instructions to i
281. nd returns to the area of code that gets another From Thru range Lines 4000 4199 are used to write each calculated value received from lines 2000 3999 to the EIVAL file Each value is placed in the array TOT VALUES during calculation Do not modify this area Lines 4200 4599 are used to return error codes to the EIVAL file when a problem occurs in the function Do not modify this area Lines 5000 5199 are called by lines 1000 1399 to read a setup record of type 1 company IDs and add the ID to the variable CO It continues adding IDs to CO as long as it finds a valid type 1 setup record Do not modify this area Lines 5200 5399 read a setup record for a particular type The type is specified by the variable TYPE The last valid record found for this type is stored in the variable SEQS TYPE This variable is needed to allow the next setup record read to point to the correct starting location for this type After a setup record is read the From and Thru values are placed in the variables FR TYPE and TH TYPE respectively If no more setup records for this type are found the Boolean variable DONE is set to 1 Do not modify this area Lines 9300 9399 hold the GENLOCK General Record Lock Routine See the Development Standards manual for an explanation of this routine Resource Manager 9 23 EIS Roles o M If you use roles throughout OSAS to limit the data that employees can view you can apply these roles to EIS comman
282. nd text mode Dashboard files are stored with your data files and carry extensions of SCR for text dashboards or GUI for graphical dashboards This has implications for the creation and modification of dashboards if you want a change to be available in both modes you need to make that change to both the text and graphical dashboard or change the text dashboard save it then convert it to a graphical dashboard If you work primarily in one mode you can simply create or modify dashboards for that mode only Creating Graphical Dashboards from Text Dashboards OSAS includes a utility that creates a graphical dashboard file from a text one so that it is available in both modes However you cannot create a text dashboard from a graphical one Follow these steps to use this utility 1 Make backup copies of your ElS dashboards especially the one you are converting 2 Select Call a PRO 5 Program from the Other Commands menu 3 When the Call a PRO 5 Program screen appears enter EIS2GUI PUB in the Program field and use the Proceed OK command to continue 4 When the Convert Character EIS Screens to GUI Screens screen appears enter the text dashboard you want to convert and use the Proceed OK command to continue The system creates a graphical dashboard file from the text dashboard and saves it with an extension of GUL The original text dashboard file extension SCR is retained 5 When the utility completes the conversio
283. nd using this formula 1024 number of terminals 2048 The number of terminals and printers in your configuration The default is 22 OSAS uses the default for Windows systems and automatically calculates this value for UNIX Linux systems The total number of disk files that can be simultaneously accessed by one workstation The default is 10 OSAS sets FCBS to 100 The total number of I O channels that can be simultaneously accessed by one workstation The default is 16 OSAS sets CIBS to 100 The maximum number of file handles to be used by each invocation of BBx If you enter a large number BBx retains a large number of open files or lets you open a large number of files OSAS sets HANDLES to 100 Note Insufficient values for the HANDLES FCBS or CIBS entries can cause error 16s The TRANSPARENTRGB 192 192 192 entry allows OSAS to bring in your system default colors Do not remove this line from the file The Alias PF FILE Print File LF 0DOA entry is a device created by OSAS that allows the File output selection when printing reports or when you print screen via the F8 key Resource Manager Devices Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Devices Terminals Screen The Terminals screen appears when you add or edit a terminal line Eh Devices Terminls es al Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Device Name T001 4 System Devic
284. ndows Config bbx File stblen 10240 aliases 23 FCBS 100 HANDLES 100 CIBS 100 TRANSPARENTRGB 192 192 192 alias PF FILE Print file LF 0D0A FILE PRINT TO alias LPL sysprint Windows Default Printer Laser LINES 63 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 TMARGIN 5 alias PDL sysprint Print Dialog Laser INES 63 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 TMARGIN 5 dialog alias PSL sysprint Print Setup Laser INES 63 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 TMARGIN 5 setup alias LPD sysprint Windows Default Printer Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 alias PDD sysprint Print Dialog Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 dialog alias PSD sysprint Print Setup Dot Matrix INES 66 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 setup alias LPW sysprint Windows Default Printer Wide Carriage INES 66 SPCOLS 136 CPCOLS 240 alias PDW sysprint Print Dialog Wide Carriage Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 136 CPCOLS 240 dialog alias PSW sysprint Print Setup Wide Carriage Dot Matrix LINES 66 SPCOLS 136 CPCOLS 240 setup alias N0 tcp alias T000 syswindow 3 alias T001 syswindow alias T002 syswindow alias T003 syswindow alias T004 syswindow alias T005 syswindow alias T006 syswindow alias T007 syswindow alias T008 syswindow 2 alias X0 sysgui alias X1 sysgui 1 Notice the number of printers that are available to all terminals although they may not all be needed The interpreter for Windows automatically sets up these entries and refers
285. need to return to it only infrequently as edits are needed You need to set up at least one tax class one tax location and one tax group e Use the Sales Tax Report and Clear Sales Tax functions to view tax allocations at the end of each period and clear accumulated tax totals to prepare for the next reporting period 5 1 Tax Classes OC M Use the Tax Classes function to add or change the descriptions associated with tax classes Tax Classes identify the categories of goods or services you sell that are taxed at a set rate Several tax classes are already preassigned but you can edit their descriptions if necessary You assign rates to these classes for locations in the Tax Locations function If you use the Inventory application you assign a tax class to an item when you set up the item in the Items function Set up tax classes before you set up tax locations and tax groups To work with tax classes select Tax Classes from the Application Setup menu The Tax Classes screen appears EN Tax Classes eJ e les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help gt xu na mu e 00 K CAbandon Class Description 00 Consumer Goods 01 Resale Sales me 02 Exempt Sales 03 nd Agr Prod 04 Interstate Comm O5 Motor Vehicles O6 Food Products 17 Clothing B Gasoline 09 Sewices jo o oaod Enter edit Append Go to Cl Company H 11 27 2007
286. nges to the help content or as a record of the changes you made 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Information Inquiry Daily Work Management Reports Pay Invoices File Maintenance Builders Supply Help Screens List Accounts Payable Help Text Use the functions on the Information Inquiry menu to view your AP data without changing it You can view information about your vendors and their open invoices summary or periodic history and detailed purchase history Use the functions of the Daily Work menu to enter invoices and debit memos for purchased and returned items Also you can copy recurring entries that you have set up into live transactions The functions on the Management Reports menu allow you to print open invoices cash flow statements vendor analysis 1099 forms and aged trial balances The functions on the Pay Invoices menu allow you to change open invoice status for vendors hold or release invoices for vendors prepare checks select which invoices you want to pay for each vendor print checks and void posted checks The functions in File Maintenance will allow you to change vendor information set up recurring entries change terms and distribution codes change tables perform periodic maintenance and to purge vendor comments 7 53 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities File Lists Inquiry Window Definitions List The Inquiry Window Definitions List shows the inquiry windows
287. nly to vendor ACE001 the report includes information only about vendor ACEO01 Information for reports is sorted first by a space _ then by special characters then by digits then by uppercase letters and finally by lowercase letters No matter what you enter in the From and Thru fields however your entries are sorted in alphabetical order unless the function provides an option to sort the information differently Sorting by alphabetical codes or IDs is easy For example the ID ACL comes before the ID BB because A comes before B Use caution when you enter codes or IDs consisting of characters other than letters the order might not be what you expect For example if 20 items are labeled 1 through 20 and all are included in a report you might enter 1 at From and 20 at Thru expecting them to be listed 1 2 3 19 20 However since OSAS sorts in alphabetical order rather than numerical order the numbers are listed in this order 1 10 19 2 20 In this example numbers 3 9 are not included in the sort since they fall after 20 in an alphabetical sort To prevent this situation pad extra spaces in codes and IDs with zeros so that numbers in alphabetical order are also in numerical order In the example above the items could be labeled 000001 through 000020 Outputting Reports 1 36 You can output reports in a variety of ways but keep in mind that the mode you use controls which output options are available to you If y
288. nnot change the address that appears in the E Mail From field on the E Mail Information screen that appears when you send e mails through OSAS Resource Manager Favorites Menu o M The Favorites menu allows you to build your own menu of the functions and submenus you use most You can create and add functions to the Favorites menu automatically by using the Add to Favorites F10 command To add a menu or a function to the Favorites menu select the menu or function you want to add and press F10 e To remove a entry from the Favorites menu select the entry to remove and press F10 again e To toggle between the Favorites and main menus press F2 Use the Favorites Menu function to modify the Favorites menu that is created automatically when you add functions to it For example use this function to group some functions together into a submenu Keep in mind that Favorites menus are specific to individual workstations Resource Manager 4 15 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Favorites Menu 4 16 To customize the Favorites menu select Favorites Menu from the User Setup menu The Favorites Menu screen appears Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Workstation TODO Menu MAIN Title Favorites Menu T000 Line Description Type Program Param GL Journal 3 E 02 SO Daily Work 2 150001 2 103 SO Cash Receipts 3 ARCSHINI la 04 SO Copy Recurring Or
289. not have Direct Deposit installed for this company this prompt is set to NO and cannot be changed disabled on graphical screens Enter or choose the Positive Pay Format to use with this bank Enter the Next AP Check Number to be used when printing checks for this account using AP PO If you have set the Use separate check numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll option set to NO this field is called Next Check Number and applies to both AP PO and PA checks Enter the Next PA Check Number to be used when printing checks for this account using PA This field won t be displayed if you have set the Use separate check numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll option set to NO The remaining fields on this screen are disabled if the Allow ACH Creation prompt is set to NO Otherwise enter the information required to produce the ACH files for direct deposit transfer of fund Enter the Next AP Voucher Number to be used when generating vouchers for this account using AP PO If you have set the Use separate voucher numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll option set to NO this field is called Next Voucher Number Bank Accounts 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Enter the Next PA Voucher Number to be used when generating vouchers for this account using AP PO or PA The last direct deposit posting date appears in the Last ACH Posted field This field is updated when you post checks and vouchers
290. ns are currently being used and at what time users or terminals exited the system You cannot access this function if you have the Track user login activity option set to No in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function To view user activity select User Login Activity from the User Setup menu The User Login Activity screen appears El User Activity Inquiry ters Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xe ae ma 0 OK User ID 4 Start Date Time Company ID 4 From 10 12 2010 EH 00 00 00 Application 4 Thru 10 12 2010 E3 00 00 00 Menu Descr User ID App Menu Selection Time Date scottm RM User Activity Inquiry 10 05 10 12 2010 scottm RM Main Menu Graphical 10 0510 12 2010 La Scottm IN nventory Movement Report 1o 0510 12 2010 a scottm RM Main Menu Graphical x 10 05 10 12 2010 scottm IN Inventory Transactions 10 05 10 12 2010 scottm RM Main Menu Graphical 10 05 10 12 2010 scottm RM User Activity Inquiry 10 0410 12 2010 scottm RM Main Menu Graphical 10 0310 12 2010 scottm OS Starting Stopping OSAS 10 0310 12 2010 z scottm s Starting Stopping OSAS 10 0310 12 2010 scottm RM Main Menu Graphical 10 0310 12 2010 Sort by User ID Line 000001 of 000011 UseriD Sort Viewdetail Goto Company H 10 12 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Resource Manager 4 3 CHAPTER 4 User S
291. ns for regular printers and sysprint devices in the scrolling region the options are listed in alphabetical order to help you more quickly locate the appropriate explanation Device Mode Description Backspace If the printer supports an ASCII backspace code enter YES to use the hexadecimal code 08 or enter a different hexadecimal code to perform a backspace If the printer does not have backspace capability enter NO Resource Manager Devices Device Mode Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Description Bottom Margin Carriage Return Compress Print Compress Cols Dialog Expanded On Expanded Off Expanded Cols Expanded Lines Resource Manager If you use BBj enter the amount of offset you want for the bottom margin This option has no effect on PRO S For sysprint devices the size appears in decimals If you change the default setting the new setting overrides the Windows default If you change the default the new setting overrides the Windows default If the printer supports the ASCII carriage return code enter YES to use the hexadecimal code OD or enter a different hexadecimal code to perform a carriage return If the printer does not have this capability enter NO YES is selected by default to put a carriage return after a line feed If your reports or print files show a stair step effect changing this value to NO could solve the problem Enter the hexadecimal code for co
292. nstall an application Applications 1 Select Install Applications from the Installation menu 2 If you are installing from a DVD ROM the Select Sort Method screen appears B Select Sort Method lo a Commands Edit Modes Other Help xt amp emmu e GQ x JA Select Sort Method Resource Manager 2 3 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration 2 4 Install Applications If you are installing base applications select CD Application Installation If you are installing CJC select CJC Enhancement Installation CJC uses a slightly different installation routine than base applications and OSAS requires you to specify which method to use before you can continue When the Activation Key screen appears verify the activation key that appears or enter a new one then use the Proceed OK command Enter CD Activation Key XXXXX0000000000000000000 The activation key controls which applications are available for installation 4 When the Install Applications screen appears select the applications you want to install and the directories in which to install them Application Tagged to Install Accounts Payable Y Accounts Receivable Bank Reconciliation Bills of Materials Kitting Fixed Assets General Report Writer General Ledger El Inventory Job Cost Payroll
293. nt if any Browse to or enter the name of the file you would like to attach in the Edit Attachment dialog box see Edit Append Attachment dialog box on page 1 42 e Press A to add an attachment to the e mail Browse to or enter the name of the file you would like to attach in the Append Attachment dialog box see Edit Append Attachment dialog box on page 1 42 1 41 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS 1 42 Reports e Press Gto go to a specific attachment line item this command is only available if there are more than six attachments to the e mail e Press H to change the header information of the e mail including the E Mail From field the recipient s the subject line and the attachment type e Press D when done entering the e mail information and you are ready to process the e mail 8 If you choose No in the Send E Mails Immediately option in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces see Options and Interfaces List on page 3 47 the e mail will be held in the E Mail Queue for processing see E Mail Queue on page 3 49 Otherwise the e mail will be sent immediately Note To preserve formatting view e mailed reports or e mail attachments with a fixed width or monospaced font Courier or Lucida Console for example Edit Append Attachment dialog box The Edit Append Attachment dialog box appears when you press Enter or A in the Attachment File scroll region of the E Mail Information screen
294. nt tape As new calculations are entered at the bottom of the tape the previous numbers and operators scroll up to make room When the tape is full the numbers scroll off the top of the display area Use the View Tape function to scroll the tape up and down to view previous calculations and totals The Entry section contains the values and operators you enter to use in calculations To enter a number type the number e To enter a comment type a quotation mark and then a comment Comments can be 16 characters long e To make calculations with the Calculator use postfix notation First type a number Then press the key of the operator X or you want to use Type a second number and press the key of another operator or press Enter to total the calculation e To repeat the last calculation using the same operator and number press the same operator key again You can repeat this operation indefinitely The Functions section lists the functions you can use e Press S to view the subtotal e Press the quotation mark key to start a comment e Press T to print the tape e Inthe View Tape function you can use three keys the up arrow key to move the tape up the down arrow key to move the tape down and the Esc key to jump to the bottom of the tape and exit from View mode A 21 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu A 22 Press a key to work with values in the Memory Tape Entry and Status secti
295. nter A if you want to begin in Search mode enter I If you want to use Windows graphical screens enter A If you want to use the text screens enter I You can change modes at the menu by pressing Shift F6 Enter the type of menu you want to use on this workstation T text menu G graphical panelled menu M MDI graphical menu Select Active functions with multiple windows retain relative positions for hidden or new windows If you want the OSAS copy and paste commands to use the windows clipboard making the information available for use in other applications enter A If you want the copied data to remain local to OSAS enter the normal setting This setting applies to copying in graphical mode only Choose a default output type for reports and lists Enter the ID of the default location for the workstation This ID appears in any Location ID field throughout OSAS for this workstation Enter the ID of the default bank for the workstation Resource Manager Preferences Field Name User Setup CHAPTER 4 Description EIS Dashboard Screen Pages Printer User ID Map Lookup ID Resource Manager Enter the default EIS Dashboard for the workstation If you leave this field blank the EISDFLT Company Summary dashboard is used Enter the maximum number of pages you want to store in memory for a report that you print to the screen in text mode The system default is five screen pages The larger
296. nts as of that date 6 Use the commands to work with comments in the scroll region e Press I to enter a different user ID e Press R to enter a different reference ID e Press Dto change the end date e Press A to add a comment Press Enter to edit the selected comment e Press O to print the selected comment e The Shared Private command is available only if you have set up role based permission for this function Press E to toggle between shared and private comments Shared comments can be viewed by everyone private comments can be viewed only by the person who has role based permission e Press F to go to the first comment e Press Lto go to the last comment e Press N to go to the next comment Press P to go to the previous comment 7 When you finish entering editing or viewing comments use the Exit F7 command to return to OSAS A 27 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu E Mail Queue The E Mail Queue function allows you to see the emails in the e mail queue and to review them before sending See E Mail Queue on page 3 49 for more information Product Suggestions From any field you can make edit and save suggestions for improving the software If you have a suggestion fax or mail it to Open Systems Follow these steps to enter a product suggestion Select Product Suggestions from the Other Commands menu This screen appears Product Suggestions LLIIIIIL T1 1 11111111 fo
297. nu appears on some functions screens in certain applications and gives you access to additional information about a customer vendor item job bill of material or employee See Information Menu on page A 35 for more information The Help menu gives you access to help on function keys and keyboard navigation to help on individual fields or to the online PDF documentation OSAS gives you quick access to commands relating to the screen you re using via a shortcut menu The commands that are available depend on the function and the field you are currently using To use these commands click the right mouse button and select the command from the menu that appears An example of the shortcut menu that appears on function screens is shown below Online Documentation Proceed Start Over Field Up Field Down Abandon Delete Jump Exit On the main menu the shortcut menu gives you access to commands that help you manage your Favorites menu switch between sample and live data perform certain setup tasks and view function information On function screens this menu helps you access help documentation move around the function screen or move between transactions work with EIS dashboards and so on Resource Manager 1 21 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS Toolbars As with menus graphical screens also contain toolbars that give you fast access to the most frequently used OSAS commands The toolbar for the main menu d
298. number of screen pages you can view to conserve memory resources Follow these steps to view the report on screen 1 Enter S to select S creen 2 When available enter S if you want to view the report in standard width or C 1f you want to view it in compressed width 3 When the report appears press Enter to view the next page or Page Up to view previous pages Resource Manager 1 39 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Reports 1 40 E mail the Report Before you can e mail reports you must enter details about your e mail system using the E Mail Setup function on the Resource Manager Installation and Configuration menu You can e mail only selected reports In general any report or form that makes up part of your audit trail cannot be e mailed Follow these steps to e mail a report 1 Select E mail or enter M The E Mail Information screen appears EN E Mail Information fo o Es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help RX tz ejan 0 09 OK Abandon E Mail From samd builders_supply com To Customer gt ACE001 la la bhumphrey aceplumbingsupply com garry deacon bigmail com CC Employee BOU001 4 La bourne builders_supply com BCC Employee STO001 a faj asotckard builders_supply com Subject AR Analysis Report Attachment Type YES y Attachment File C OSAS76 data Onpqq79x005 TXT Enter Edit Append Go to Header Done Company H 10 26 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 The
299. o enter definitions for each link listed Press Ctrl J to jump from one definition to another or press Tab to scroll through each field in a definition before moving to the next one In the Switch Label field enter the label that appears for the link If you want this link to appear only if a specific application is not installed enter the application ID in the Exclusion Application field For example suppose that you want an AR Transaction link to appear only if Sales Order is not installed In this case enter SO in the Exclusion Application field Finally enter the Window ID to which you want to link this window Global Inquiry Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 In the Key Definition section enter information about the key segments used in the link nthe Define by field enter how the key segment is defined Enter FIL if the segment to be sent is in the central file LIN if the segment is defined as a field in the data section of the window SUM if the segment is defined as a field in the summary section of the window VAL if a user defined literal value is to be sent Enterthe position of the field in the file list to be accessed in the Fld Pos Val field Enter the first character position in the field that you want to send to the next window in the Start field Enter the Length of the field Enter the position that the data segment being sent is to occupy in the key used in the connecting window in
300. o more information and so on Many of these commands also appear on drop down menus in graphical mode You can use the hot keys to access commands regardless of which mode you use See Graphical Mode on page 1 15 for more information on the graphical menus Command hot keys are shared between the main menu and function screens and are context sensitive That is shared hot keys access different commands depending on whether you press the hot key combination on the main menu or on a function screen B 1 APPENDIX B OSAS Commands To access a command press the corresponding key listed in the tables in this appendix If you re working with a keyboard that lacks function keys labeled with an F followed by a number or if you re working with an emulator in UNIX which can cause function keys to become unavailable press the appropriate alternate key combination to access the command Some hot key combinations used by OSAS may also be reserved for use by your operating system When this is the case that hot key will not work in OSAS You may be able to reassign these keys using your operating system s utilities to resolve the conflict Alternately if you use the OSAS text mode you can use the Keyboard function page 4 23 to reassign the hot keys OSAS uses to resolve conflicts Please note that alternate key combinations starting with Esc will not work in graphical mode B 2 Resource Manager Main Menu Commands o M Key
301. odes Other Help RX ty Ga amp eamuooe oco OK Abandon Status Bar Save as Personal Report Picks M Save as Global Report Picks Y Description Northeast Region Requisition Report Set as Personal Default y Set as Global Default Company H 10 20 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Resource Manager 1 43 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Reports 1 44 e Check the Save as Personal Report Picks box save the pick criteria for use at a later time on your workstation e Check the Save as Global Report Picks box to save the pick criteria for use by anyone in your organization who has access to this report Enter a Description for these report defaults for identification e Ifyou check the Set as Personal Default box or enter Y in text mode these pick criteria will be automatically applied on the report screen the next time you run the report from the menu e Ifyou check the Set as Global Default box on enter Y in text mode these pick criteria will be automatically applied on the report screen whenever anyone in your organization runs the report from the menu Whether or not you set saved criteria as a default you can load any report criteria you have saved by clicking Shift F3 and choosing the description you want Resource Manager Resource Manager Guide OSAS Administration CHAPTER 2 Install Applications Users Roles Devices Directories User Defined Field Setup E Mail Setup
302. of fields generated outside of the OSAS system See Import Field List Dialog Box on page 6 14 e Press H to return to the header section to change the selection you made for printing the log e Press F to choose a new field ID this abandons any field changes you entered but have not yet saved e Press S to switch between the Values and File Description sections of the screen e Press Y to select the years for which the field changes should be processed nthe Values section press Enter to edit the current line In the File Description section press Enter to tag or untag a file to include or exclude it from processing e nthe Values section press A to add another value to the list In the File Description section press A to tag all of the files e ntheFile Description section press N to untag all of the files This command is not available in the Values section e Press C to clear the values entered into the Original Value New Value fields 6 13 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities Change Fields e Press Gto go to a particular entry This option is only available when there is more than one page of entries Import Field List Dialog Box The Import Field List dialog box opens when you press l in the Change Fields function This dialog box gives you the ability to import a list directly into change fields without having to enter the list manually EN Import Field List Je eal Commands Edit Modes Ot
303. olumn reference in the format RxxCyy Global Inquiry Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Data Columns Screen The Global Inquiry Definition Data Columns screen is similar to the Summary Fields screen it shows the data columns available from the Report Writer dictionary the heading format used on the screen and the actual definitions of each column EX Global Inquiry Definitions Eee Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 XxX a a a a 2 e e OK Abandon Window APHI8CHK Page 3 of 4 Col Data Name Type Format Field Start Len Column 1 INVOICE NO 1 002 007 008 1 2 INVOICE DATE 3 011 10 3 CHECK NO 2 007 001 007 19 4 CHECK DATE 3 012 28 5 IF 12 11 gt 0 THE 2 006 37 6 GROSS DUE 2 005 001 014 47 7 NET PAID 2 006 001 014 62 Heading Output Appearance Data Columns Invoice Date Check No Chk Date DaystoPay Gross Due Net Paid XXXXXXXX MM DD YY HHHHHIO MM DD YY HHHO HHHHHHHHHE 00 HHHHHHHHHHE 00 Data Field No 1 Data Name INVOICE NO Expression Data Type 1 Format Field 2 Start 7 Length 8 Col No 1 User Mask Xref Field Start Length Fids Table Key Test Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal oon OVR Use the fields at the bottom of the screen to enter definitions for each column listed Press Ctrl J to jump from one definition to another or press Tab to scroll through each field in a definition before moving to the next one For descriptions of individual fields on this screen refer to t
304. ompletes 6 Setupthe new applications Refer to your application guides for more information Reinstalling Follow these steps to reinstall an application Applications 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 in the previous section to select the application you Resource Manager want to reinstall If you press Enter to tag an application to reinstall the system jumps to the component options at the bottom of the screen rather than to the directory path field Installations are reinstalled in the directories where they were originally installed Select the check box or enter Y in text mode for the components you want to reinstall clear it or enter N for those you do not After making your selections press Page Down to return to the application listing 2 5 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Install Applications e Select Programs to reinstall all application programs those in the progXX directory and all common programs those in the progRM directory e Select System Files to reinstall all files in the sysfil directory which includes files shared between live and sample data such as inquiry window definitions help files and menu files e Select Sample Data to reinstall all data files and information for the sample Builder s Supply company provided to help you familiarize yourself with OSAS before using your own live data e Select Data Dict to reinstall application data dictionary files used by the ODBC Kit and d
305. on follow these steps 1 Enter the first number of the calculation to reset the current total The new total appears on the tape 2 Type the operator you want to you do not press Enter The number you entered in step 1 and the operator appear on the tape 3 Enter the second number The calculator performs the calculation and prints the total at the bottom of the tape This total is used in the next calculation 4 Type the second operator do not press Enter The calculator recalls the last total and prints the operator behind it on the tape 5 Enter the next number The calculator performs the calculation and the new total appears at the bottom of the tape 6 Repeatsteps 2 5 until you finish your calculations A 23 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus A 24 Other Commands Menu Graphical Calculator In graphical mode calling the calculator opens the OSAS graphical calculator Based on the Windows calculator it can also be used to return a result into an input field The Edit menu allows you to cut and paste numbers to and from the entry field The Precision menu allows you to change the maximum number of places allowed past the decimal point EN osas Calculator EJ Ex Edit Precision 8675 309 Backspace CE C s ua ma ut ua lolo bs us a aa uaa gt RE tia ua od nm a a Return Total Use the Return Total button to return the
306. on page 3 31 this file stores the report description the method used to print the report the date and time the report was printed and the user and terminal that printed the report each time a report is printed to a file in OSAS If the RMRHxxx file gets too large you can use the Purge Report History function to purge information dated before a the date you specify from the file See page 14 13 for more information This function is not available and history is not saved in the RMRHxxx file if the Do you want to keep Print Manager report history option is set to NO in the Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 Resource Manager 14 7 CHAPTER 14 Print Manager Report History Inquiry 14 8 To track report history select Report History Inquiry from the Print Manager menu The Report History Inquiry screen appears and lists information about all reports printed to a file within OSAS Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2 gt xu na mu 2e 00 Description Type Date Time User Vendor Analysis Report 12 29 2010 12 53P scottm Purchases Journal PF 12 29 2010 12 52P scottm Open Invoice Report PF 12 29 2010 12 51P scottm Sales Journal PF 12 29 2010 12 48P scottm R Analysis Report PF 12 29 2010 11 11A scottm M u SortBy Reverse Executed Sequence View file Toggle m
307. on Menus oo o M To access a command from one of the menus on a function screen click a menu title The commands for that menu appear followed by any associated hot key combinations in brackets To use a command click the command name or press the hot key combination Each menu is described below Commands Menu Edit Modes Other Information Help Inquiry F2 15 aa Maintenance F6 Proceed Page Down Start Over Page Up Field Up Up Field Down Down Abandon FS Delete F3 Jump Ctrl J Exit F Command Description Inquiry Lists valid entries for the current field Date Inquiry Opens a calendar from which you can select a date This command is available only for date fields in BBj Maintenance Opens the appropriate File Maintenance function Proceed OK Proceeds to the next screen or saves your entries Start Over Moves back to the first field or to the first field after the key field without erasing any entries or changes APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Edit Menu Command Function Menus Description Field Up Field Down Abandon Delete Jump Exit Commands RX lE Command Moves the cursor to the previous field Moves the cursor to the next field Clears data from all fields and moves the cursor to the first field on the screen Deletes information on the screen Since this command deletes an entire record use it with caution Moves the cursor to the next block of data on the screen or to th
308. on and Configuration Use the functions in this menu to install applications on your system and remove applications when necessary and to set up user IDs for the employees who access OSAS set up roles and define multiple terminals printers and graphics devices You can also set up and maintain the system including its directory file paths and support e mail and web Internet information Use the e mail history report and purge e mail history functions to manage your system e mail Resource Manager 1 5 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS About Resource Manager 1 6 Company Setup Use the Company Setup functions to set up company information set up bank accounts define accounting periods create or convert the data files for each application select options for each application and the interfaces between applications set up roles to protect your data from unauthorized access set up form codes set up forms printer definitions and set up codes for countries and states User Setup Use the User Setup functions to keep track of user activity application and favorites menus assign colors on a text workstation define the keys that execute particular functions and editing commands on a text workstation enter file associations for the software programs you use so that OSAS can automatically launch these programs to view documents or maps and specify default system information Sales Tax Reporting Use the Sales Tax Reporting functions
309. on and setup ID line to the end of the list on the EIS Field Definitions screen press A To edit a function and setup ID line select the line to edit and press Enter The Append or Edit Fields screen appears Other than the title these screens are identical The Edit Fields screen is shown below TEN edit Fields Ciara Commands Edit Modes Other Help xt amp m8emu e ood OK Abandon Function ID SOORDERS a Setup ID COMP ia Select the Function ID that returns the values you want to use then select the Setup ID that defines the range of data used by the function to return values In the example above the SOORDERS function returns several values including the total values and counts of orders entered in Sales Order a grand total and count of these orders and associated costs that accompany them The function uses the range of companies defined in the COMP setup ID to return only values based on that range Resource Manager 9 5 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance EIS Field Definitions Because a field can display only one value a grand total for example you need to use a math formula to specify or calculate the final value to display in the field from those you collected with functions and setups See Working with Formulas on page 9 7 for more information on formulas Fields are powerful because they can consolidate data from several OSAS applications For example you might want to combine the inform
310. on page 1 36 for more information After you produce the list the ElS Master File Lists menu appears Resource Manager Screen Definitions List o M Use the Screen Definitions List function to produce a list of EIS Dashboard definitions You can use this list to print every piece of information about a dashboard from its layout for text character dashboards only to help with design to the fields it contains to determine where fields are used to the functions and setups used by each field to identify where changes are needed Sample List 05 23 2007 Builders Supply 3 38 PM Screen Definitions List Dashboard APANAL Accounts Payable Analysis Character Screen Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 Aging Analysis Purchase History Period to Date Year to Date Current Due 999 999 999 nvoices 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 Balance 31 60 999 999 999 Freight 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 61 90 999 999 999 Tax 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 91 120 999 999 999 Misc 999 999 999 999 999 999 1214 999 999 999 Total 999 999 999 999 999 999 Total Due 999 999 999 Payment History Amt on Hold 999 999 999 Period to Date Year to Date Amt on Tmp Hold 999 999 999 Prepaids 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 Amt Released 999 999 999 Disc 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 Checks 999 999 999 00 999 999 999 00 Total Vendors 999 999 Disc 999 999 999 999 999 999 Inv on Hold
311. on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Executive Information Summary menu Resource Manager 13 13 Top 10 Customers o M The Top 10 Customers dashboard provides a list of the 10 customers with the highest sales amount in the current and prior years Select Top 10 Customers from the Executive Information Summary menu The Top 10 Customers dashboard appears and lists the 10 highest sales amounts for your customers ES Top10 Customers ee Commands Edit Modes Other EIS Functions Help xt5 a mnl e eoeo 05 Abandon Sales Last Year Sales This Year to Date 1 1 223 580 ACE BUILDERS 1 665 331 2 TENNESSEE SHELTERS IN 808 095 KANSAS CITY GEODESIC H 696 228 3 LOS ANGELES CONSTRUCTI 541 298 3 CASH SALES DALLAS TX 522 780 4 CASH SALES DALLAS TX 497 803 4 TENNESSEE SHELTERS IN 454 090 5 DALLAS FT WORTH DOME H 447 243 5 DALLAS FT WORTH DOME H 367 487 6 KANSAS CITY GEODESIC H 377 085 6 GREATER NEW YORK DOMES 315 563 7 CASH SALES MINNEAPOLIS 318 997 7 LOS ANGELES CONSTRUCTI 247 192 8 GREATER NEW YORK DOMES 183 707 8 CASH SALES MINNEAPOLIS 138 197 9 SUNSHINE HOMES INC 77 318 9 CASH SALES BALTIMORE 108 137 10 0 10 CASH SALES OAKLAND CA 66 487 Company 12 28 2007 Terminal taoo ovn Use the commands to refresh the data or view more detailed information See Using Commands on page 13 3 for more information Press F7 to exit the dashboard and return to the Ex
312. on the installation media in the UTILS MICRFONT folder Note if the OSAS system is running when you install the font you will need to restart BBj Services before you can print checks using the MICR font Follow the directions below for your operating system Installing the MICR font in Windows XP 1 Open the UTILS MICRFONT folder on your OSAS installation media Copy the MICR TTF file 2 Open the C WINDOWS fonts folder Paste the MICR TTF file into the fonts folder Installing the MICR font in Windows Vista Windows 7 1 Open the UTILS MICRFONT folder on your OSAS installation media 2 Right click on the MICR TTF file and select Install Installing the MICR font in Mac OSX x 1 Open the UTILS MICRFONT folder on your OSAS installation media 2 Copy the MICR TTF font and paste it in the Library Fonts folder on the Mac 3 You must restart the Mac before you can use the font E 4 Resource Manager Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality APPENDIX E Installing the MICR font in Linux These instructions may vary depending on your Linux distribution The following instructions work with Red Hat Linux 1 Make a temporary directory with full access permissions Example mkdir usr share fonts newfonts 2 Copy all TTF files to this folder 3 Change to that directory and execute mkfontdir cd usr share fonts newfonts mkfontdir 4 Add the directory to the font path chkfontpath a usr share fonts newfonts
313. on your system and the information they contain 05 22 2007 Builders Supply 2 18 PM Inquiry Window Definitions List Accounts Payable Topic File File Key Starting Size Inclusion Exclusion Add No Name Col Row Col Row Begin Len Begin Len Routine Data Names 0 APDCX Description Window Title Distribution Codes Column Headings Code Description Returned Field APACB W 0 APBIX Batch Number Description Window Title Batch Number Inquiry Lock Flag Column Headings Batch Description Lock Pch Deb Stat Purchases Jrnl Statu Misc Debt Jrnl Statu Status Returned Field APACDCWI 0 APDCx Distribution Code Description Window Title Distribution Codes Column Headings Code Description NOTE Returned Field APACSCW2 0 23 GLMAx 20 10 48 12 GL ACCT NO GL ACCT DESC Window Title General Ledger Inquiry Column Headings GL Account Description NOTE Returned Field 7 54 File Lists System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 Global Inquiry Definitions List The Global Inquiry Definitions List provides information about each Global Inquiry window This information is valuable if you are setting up windows and want a list of windows that have already been established 05 22 2007 Builders Supply Global Inquiry Window List Inventory Purchase History General Information File Topic No of Key Key Inclusion Exclusion No Flds No Len Begin Len Begin Len Search Label Search Pos Search APHI1 APHIx 008 Strt Len Row Col
314. onfiguration E Mail Setup 2 64 Enter the name of your e mail server in the SMTP Server field Change the Port number if necessary If your SMTP server requires authentication enter your login ID and password otherwise leave these fields blank The password is saved in an encrypted password file Enter your e mail address in the E Mail From field OSAS uses the address you entered in the E Mail From field in the Preferences function page 4 7 first when creating e mail messages If you leave that field blank OSAS uses the address you enter here when creating e mail messages You cannot change the address that appears in the E Mail From field on the E Mail Information screen that appears when you send e mails through OSAS Enter your time zone for example CST for Central Standard Time MDT for Mountain Daylight Time and so on If you are a MetroFax subscriber and want the option of sending OSAS forms by fax enter your MetroFax Fax Login Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the menu To test the system send an e mail to yourself Select a master file list that can be e mailed the Options and Interfaces List for example and then select the e mail output option Enter your e mail address in the E Mail To field then use the Proceed OK command to send the e mail If the e mail does not arrive there is some problem with the information you entered about your e mail system Consult your IT
315. online documentation using the Shift F1 hot key enter the full path and file name of the Adobe Acrobat Reader executable or that of a comparable program capable of reading and displaying PDF documents If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment enter the path to the executable file on the client not on the application server If you don t want to access the online documentation files if your terminal does not support graphical display or if you don t have a compatible reader leave this field blank If you use OSAS on Mac OS X enter usr bin open in the Acroread Path box This command launches the appropriate application for registered file extensions on the Mac The Adobe Acrobat Reader is a freeware product available for many operating systems If you have an OSAS DVD ROM you can install the Adobe Acrobat Reader for Windows from the Autorun screen on the DVD If you want to launch your web browser from within an internet address field anywhere in OSAS using either the right click menu the Commands menu or the Shift F3 hot key enter the full path and file name of your web browser If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment enter the path to the executable file on the client not on the application server CHAPTER 4 User Setup 4 14 Field Name Preferences Description E Mail Client E Mail From If you leave this field blank on Windows workstations OSAS uses the default Windows start comm
316. ons If your computer lacks function keys you can also press the alternate key combination listed in parentheses e Press F1 to clear the tape Once you clear the tape it cannot be recalled e Press F2 to clear the Entry field to enter a different value e Ifthe value in memory is 00 press F3 to copy the total at the bottom of the tape to the Memory field If the Memory field contains a value pressing F3 adds the total at the bottom of the tape to that value e Press F4 to subtract the total at the bottom of the tape from the value in memory e Press F5 to copy the value in memory to the Entry field e Press F6 to erase the value in memory e Press F7 to exit from the calculator without saving the total e Press F8 to turn the printer on and off If the printer is on your subsequent entries are printed until you turn the printer off or exit from the calculator e Press F9 to change the number of default decimal places the calculator displays The default number of decimal places is read from the current OSAS program Valid values are 0 1 2 3 4 5 FLOAT Floating Point and AUTO Automatic Numbers are saved and calculated with 1 to 14 decimal places but only the default number of places is shown When you select FLOAT the decimal floats from 0 to 5 places to correctly display a number unless 5 places are not available after you enter the whole number When you select AUTO a decimal is placed before the last two numbers of
317. or example OSAS modAR in order for OSAS to function correctly If you store modifications outside the OSAS directory do not use relative pathing Instead enter the full directory path e The Verification File field contains the name of the file used to verify that the application is installed for a company If the file name changes depending on the company involved add a lowercase x in place of the company ID for example to use the company specific Vendor file in Accounts Payable enter APVEx e OSAS automatically updates the Last Maintenance date with the date of the last update you installed When you finish viewing or editing the information use the Proceed OK command to save your changes Then enter a new Application Code or press F7 to return to the menu 7 17 Help Screens o M Use the Help Screens function to add or change text on OSAS help screens Help screen text is stored in the XXHELP file where XX represents the application ID To produce a list of the information entered on the Help screen print the Help Screens master list page 7 53 Follow these steps to work with OSAS help text 1 Select Help Screens from the System File Utilities menu The Help Screens screen appears EN Help Screens Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Application ID AR 4 Help Key ARACC 000938 4 Field ID History Information Help Text History Information includes sales profits
318. or example to set up a data range for the company ID type that includes companies A through F then K through M follow these steps 1 Ifthe Company ID type is not already present in the setup definition press A to add it to a new line in the setup If the company ID type is not available you may need to change the function ID assigned to the setup If the company ID type is already present press Enter to edit that type line 2 Enter A in the From field and F in the Thru field on the Add Edit Types screen to set up the first data range of companies Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Setup screen 3 Press Add to add a second type line to the setup definition When the Add Types screen appears select Company ID as the type then enter K in the From field and M in the Thru field to set up the second range 4 Continue adding lines as needed to define all the ranges you want to use in the setup definition Use this method if you want to select two non contiguous pieces of data to be used in a function For example to select two non continuous accounts enter two ranges one only for the first account and another only for the second account Resource Manager 9 15 Function Definitions o M A function is a small program that processes data from a data file and returns one or more values You can display the values the function returns directly in fields or you can use a math formula to manipulate th
319. or vendor Vendor ID When you enter the ID you can use the and Lookup wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Detail Lookup Shift F5 Searches for detailed information about an item Enter information in any of the fields that appear using these wildcards to restrict or widen the search 2 lt gt Lot Lookup Shift F6 Searches for an item based on lot number When you enter the lot number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Serial Lookup Shift F7 Searches for an item based on serial number When you enter the serial number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Description Shift F8 Searches for an item based on item description Lookup When you enter the description you can use the Resource Manager and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search 1 33 Reports ooo MI OSAS applications contain a variety of reports that help you make the best decisions for your business With reports you can view transaction summaries print audit trails of activity managed through OSAS functions make lists of your basic master file information for reference and analyze all aspects of your company s cash flow This section summarizes the basics of using reports For detailed information on a specific report see that reports description in the appropriate application guide Selecting a Range of Information To produce a re
320. ore ChileCompany Information Environment Servers NM Classpath Autorun Performance Sin Connection Information BBj Services Information Version Build Date Build ID System Information Operating System Operating System Version Java Virtual Machine localhost 2002 admin REV 9 12 11 20 2009 17 02 1258761184 Windows Vista 6 0 Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_20 32bit Wei we Resource Manager Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality APPENDIX E 2 Click on the Classpath tab and then on the lt default gt entry in the Classpath Names field Information Environment Servers JvM Classpath Autorun Performance Skin Java Classpath Settings Classpath Names m Y Classpath Entries C 0SAS752 bbj lib BBjIndex jar C 0SAS752Wbbj ib ExtIndex jar Lo A 3 Click the green button next to the Classpath Entries field Classpath Entries C OSAS752 bbj lib BBjIndex jar 105A5752bbj lib ExtIndex jar E d Browse to the osas progRM folder and select Barcode4j jar You must then restart BBj Services to put the changes into effect Resource Manager E 3 APPENDIX E Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality Installing the MICR Font Before you print MICR codes on checks you must first install the MICR font on your system The MICR TTF font is found
321. ost information appears only if you elected to show costs in the price and availability lookup in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 A 25 APPENDIX A OSAS Menus Other Commands Menu Pop Up Calendar Use the Pop Up Calendar to view create and edit dated reminders by User ID You can create reminders for yourself for another user or for everyone using OSAS User Comments Use the User Comments function to enter comments or notes for reference Follow these steps to enter a comment 1 Select User Comments from the Other Commands menu This screen appears 12 28 2007 CES Subscription expires 12 31 2007 Remember to renew ate Append Enter edt print Online shares Last Next Prev Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 2 Enter a User ID or use the Inquiry F2 command to enter a user ID for which to view or enter comments You can enter any value for your user ID 3 Shared Private appears only if you have set up role based permission for this function If the comment is shared SHARED appears If the comment is private PRIVATE appears along with the role name A 26 Other Commands Menu OSAS Menus APPENDIX A 4 Enter a reference ID for which to view or enter comments 5 The current date appears in the End Date field Enter a new date to apply to new comments or to view comme
322. ou can choose to keep that function from appearing on the menu when someone has been assigned that role Select Yes to hide unauthorized functions for roles otherwise select No If you select No unauthorized functions appear on the menu but are unavailable Choose Last 4 Hide All or Show All to define how bank account and credit card numbers are displayed Choose Yes to allow viewing of encrypted files in the View File Contents function choose No to deny access 3 33 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Options and Interfaces Option Description Send E Mails Immediately Use Report Defaults Prohibit Period Locking with Transactions on File Prohibit Application Posting Processing for Locked Periods Use separate check numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll Use separate voucher numbers for Accounts Payable Payroll 3 34 Select No to save emails in the email queue before sending see E Mail Queue on page 3 49 Select Yes to send emails immediately Select Yes to use the report defaults function when producing a report see Using Report Pick Screen Criteria on page 1 43 Select No to produce reports without using the defaults function Select Yes to stop the period locking process if transactions are on file see Accounting Periods on page 3 21 Select No to allow period locking regardless of transaction status Select Yes to stop applications from posting or processing transactions for periods
323. ou use a sysprint device this setting may be at fault Enter Courier New including the quote marks save then test the printer If this font does not fix output problems try other fonts Enter an operating system command that the system executes before a job is sent to the printer Enter the amount of offset you want for the left margin For sysprint devices the default is blank If you change the default the new setting overrides the Windows default If you have alignment issues when printing reports in BBj select the check box or enter Y in text mode to closely approximate PRO 5 report printing This option has no effect if you use PRO S If you still have alignment issues after enabling this option try changing the top left right and bottom margin values to correct report alignment Enter the hexadecimal code that makes the printer move to the next line without a carriage return Enter the maximum number of lines you can print per page If your system has a printer locking mechanism or if you have a single user system skip this field If your system does not have a printer locking mechanism enter the name of a file that is created on the disk when the printer is being used to prevent others from using it Typically this is only used for a direct printer Name the file so that it has meaning to you and enter the full path to the lock file for example C tmp lock fle Resource Manager Devices
324. ou use graphical function screens you have the following output options Printer Print Preview PDF File or E mail for selected reports If you use text function screens you have these options Printer File Screen or E mail for selected reports Resource Manager Reports Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 If you use graphical screens the Output Information dialog box appears after you select the range of information to include in the report EN Output information tela Es LPL System Default Printer Laser poma PDL Print Dialog Laser Standard Print Preview LPD System Default Printer Dot Matrix andar PDF PDD Print Dialog Dot Matrix Compressed LPW System Default Printer Wide Carriage File PDW Print Dialog Wide Carriage Dot Matrix Email File Name data Q0000H pdf Browse Cancel If you use text screens these options appear at the bottom of the screen after you select what to include in the report and how to organize it Output P rinter p Rjeview F ile S creen e Mail find Print the Report Follow these steps to print a report 1 Select Printer in graphical screens or enter P in text screens 2 Ifmultiple printers are available for the terminal either select the printer from the list or enter the appropriate code for the printer and press Enter Use the Devices function page 2 23 to add printers to the terminal 3 When available select either Standard or enter S to print the report in standa
325. periods for each fiscal year you use OSAS automatically creates a new year when you complete year end processing in General Ledger To avoid problems with accounting periods do not manually change this information during the year You can also use the Accounting Periods function to lock data entry or editing for all or individual applications during a specific period To define periods select Accounting Periods from the Company Setup menu The Period Setup screen appears EEN Accounting Periods fele e Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2 x ejaan 8 00 OK Current Fiscal Year 2010 4 No of Periods Y ear 12 Fiscal Year 2010 4 Pd Begin Date End Date AR BA BK DD FA GL IN JO PO 01 01 2010 01 31 2010 02 01 2010 02 28 2010 E 03 01 2010 03 31 2040 El 04 01 2010 04 30 2010 El 05 01 2010 05 31 2010 El 06 01 2010 06 30 2010 07 01 2010 07131 2010 08 01 2010 08 31 2010 09 01 2010 09 30 2010 10 01 2010 10 31 2010 11 01 2010 11 30 2010 12 01 2010 12 31 2010 m E Dr olonia a wn Es je I Tete fee fe Enter edit l Auto fill Write Fiscal Y ear Current Fiscal Year a N Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 3 21 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Accounting Periods
326. plication server or desktop as in C osas Document in which OSAS installs documents Do not change this directory path as OSAS uses it internally when installing program related documents such as during initial installation or re installation Changing this path may cause errors Resource Manager Directories Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 The DocumentShare directory listed in the Other Paths section initially lists the same file path as the Documents directory If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment change this path to use the UNC pathing for the osas Document directory on the server as in osassrv osas Document so that documents in this directory can be accessed by client workstations When you press Shift F1 to open a user s manual use the Open document command on the Documents screen or add a document to the OSAS menu OSAS opens the file from this directory You use this directory to store document attachments so they are accessible to all OSAS users see page 2 57 for details Note If you use OSAS in an enterprise environment you can change this path so that it references a directory other than the osas document directory on the application server However if you do so you will need to copy the document files that OSAS installs to the new location manually The Archive and ArchiveShare directories are the default folder destinations for report archiving The FormsArchiv
327. port you must specify what information you want to include in the report e To produce a report that includes all information available leave the From Thru fields on the report screen blank For example if you want to include information about all the vendors you work with in a report leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank e To limit the amount of information in the report enter a range in the From Thru fields For example if you want a report to include information only about vendor ACEO001 enter ACE001 in both the Vendor ID From and Thru fields If you want the report to include information only about vendors that start with CO enter CO at From and COZZZZ at Thru e You can also choose a non contiguous list of values for inclusion in the report using the Inquiry F2 command at the From field In the inquiry window you can select the Tag check mark next to any selection you want to include In fields where you ve tagged individual choices the selection will appear as an asterisk in the From Thru fields after the selection Resource Manager 1 35 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Reports Sorting Each field where you enter information on a report screen usually restricts the overall output of the report For example if you leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank the report contains information about all the vendors But if you enter invoice 100 in the Invoice Number From and Thru fields and invoice 100 is assigned o
328. ports Printing an EIS Report 10 2 You print all EIS Reports in the same way Follow the instructions below to print a report modifying the procedure as necessary for the report you are printing For example if the report screen doesn t contain option buttons skip that step and move on to the next Follow these steps to print a report 1 Select the report you want to print from the EIS Reports submenu The screen for that report appears The Dashboard History screen is shown below as an example El Dashboard History fo e Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help _2xelmealmal e lee OK Abanden Dashboard ID ARTOP10C a Include Character Dashboards Graphical Dashboards 9 Both Print Field ID Field Name Both Enter dates from history to compare with s Es x a ES a ES M CompanyH 12 28 2007 Terminal TODO ovR 2 Ifthe report contains From Thru fields select the range of fields dashboards or dates and time values you want to use to select data to print in the report Leave these fields blank to select all values The Inquiry F2 command is usually available for these fields Resource Manager Resource Manager EIS Reports CHAPTER 10 If the screen contains option buttons or numbers select the option to include information for character or graphical dashboards or both in the report You can select only one option If the report contains Print or Print By o
329. pping website Select Address Mapping from the Installation and Configuration menu The Address Mapping screen appears EN Address Mapping tela lt Commands Edit Modes Other Help gt xau nemo 2e es ok Abandon Map ID 3OOGLE 4 Description Google Maps Path http maps google com maps q Address address City city State state Zip zip Additional Info country Space Character Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal TODO ns Enter the Map ID then enter or edit the mapping website s Description Enter the base URL of the mapping website you use in the Path field Enter the search terms the website uses followed by the OSAS search variables including the brackets in the Address City State Zip and Additional Info fields To find the search terms that the mapping website uses use the website to enter an address to locate then examine the resulting URL In the Space Character field enter the character the website uses to represent spaces that are present between words in a search value Many websites use a plus sign to represent spaces For example 134 Hennepin Avenue becomes 134 Hennepin Avenue Resource Manager Address Mapping Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 6 Close the screen to save your changes and return to the menu Resource Manager 2 67 Support Information MM Use the Support Information function to enter all the relevant info
330. pplication you may need to define a mathematical formula to calculate the field s value from those returned by the functions and setups assigned to the field For example imagine a field that displays the total number of transactions entered in Sales Order Purchase Order and Payroll To define this field you would enter the functions that return the total number of transactions from SO PO and PA assign setups to those functions to return the correct range of data all transactions for company H for example then enter a math formula that totals the values that are returned When you view this field on the dashboard OSAS uses all the information in the field definition to display the total transactions correctly See Working with Formulas on page 9 7 for more information on using math formulas Resource Manager 9 3 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance EIS Field Definitions Follow these steps to work with a field definition 1 Select EIS Field Definitions from the EIS File Maintenance submenu The EIS Field Definitions screen appears EEN ES Field Definitions AA Commands Edit Modes Other S nmands Ht Field ID SOTOTAL Description Total SO Orders Display Mask 999 999 999 00 Function ID Setup ID SOORDERS COMP ARTRAN COMP gt bbb Id 44 4 Function of Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal Tooo ovn En
331. pplication for which you set up user defined fields in Resource Manager e Check the User Defined Fields box within the Employees Vendors Jobs and Phases or Customers functions and use the Proceed OK command to continue When the User Defined Fields screen appears enter the information for the fields you set up in Resource Manager 2 61 E Mail Setup So M Use the E Mail Setup function to enter details about the server login ID and password and address you use to send and receive e mail You must use this function to enter information about your e mail system before you can e mail reports to other people when available OSAS uses TCP IP protocol to send e mail messages When it experiences problems SS using TCP IP OSAS uses a backup executable on Windows machines or a Perl script on UNIX machines to send e mail If you have problems sending e mail through OSAS on UNIX machines download Perl at www P erl org Follow these steps to set up OSAS for e mail 1 Select E Mail Setup from the Installation and Configuration menu The E Mail Setup screen appears Se Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX te emu eed ok Abandon SMTP Server exchange_server Port 25 Login ID samd Password orange123 E Mail From samd buildersupply com Timezone CST Fax Login samd buildersupply com Resource Manager Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR 2 63 CHAPTER 2 Installation and C
332. ptions select the option to use to organize the report information You can select only one option Select the output device to produce the report See Outputting Reports on page 1 36 for more information After you produce the report the menu appears 10 3 Dashboard Report o MI The Dashboard Report prints current field values for a range of dashboards along with the date the fields were last updated The lists all field definitions used for that dashboard the fields current values and the terminal date and time used when the fields were last updated Sample Report 06 09 2007 Builders Supply 3 52 PM EIS Dashboard Report Dashboard DAILY Daily Statistics Graphical Field ID Description Current Value Last Updated at Last Updated By Orders Total a 09 2007 000 o Errors PONEWTOT PO New Orders Total 09 2007 T000 SOPICKED Picked Orders Total T000 POPRTTOT PO Printed Orders Total 09 2007 T000 o Errors SOVERIFY Verified Orders Total 128 674 09 2007 T000 POGOOTOT PO Goods Received Orders Total 32 244 T000 SOBACK Backordered Orders Total 09 2007 T000 o Errors PORTNTOT PO Returned Orders Total i 09 2007 T000 SORETURN Returned Orders Total 97 651 T000 PORDMTOT PO Returned w Debit Memo Orders Total 14 506 09 2007 T000 o Errors SOTOTAL Total SO Orders 34 577 09 2007 T000 POALLTOT PO All Orders Total 109 553 09 2007 T000 No Errors Resource Manager 10 5 Dashboard H
333. py Prompt V 4 Sales Rep Copy Prompt F 5 6 ut 8 9 Do you want to print alignment mark before printing v Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 OVR 3 35 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Form Codes 3 36 2 Enter the Company ID to create company specific form codes or leave this field blank to create general form codes used by all companies Enter the Form Type for which you want to set up or change a form code The Form Name for the type you selected appears Edit it if necessary Enter or edit the Number of Copies you want to print each time you print that form Entries for the number of copies you enter appear in the lower section of the form For each copy enter the name to print on the copy and select the check box or enter Y in text mode if you want the system to prompt you to load forms into the printer for each copy so you can change the paper stock color for instance Clear the check box or enter N in text mode if you do not want this prompt to appear for each copy of the form printed After defining each form copy select the check box at the bottom of the screen or enter Y if you want to print an alignment mark before proceeding to print the forms Clear the check box or enter N if you do not want to print this alignment mark Alignment marks are useful if you use pre printed forms In this case these marks ensure that the data you print appears and is aligned correctly in the pre printed form
334. r Sample Text Data Text Data Text Data Text Data Resource Manager 4 21 CHAPTER 4 User Setup Colors Available colors are divided into eight groups The background color in each group represents the screen background while the colored text illustrates how text looks on that background The muted text on the left represents system prompts the brighter text on the right illustrates user entries The box at the top right labeled Functions in the example screen contains the current color settings for that type of screen In the example screen this box tells you that function screens currently use color group 1 for the background and color 6 for the screen s text color 2 for the border and color 5 for the title You can change color settings for functions menus help screens inquiry screens information screens errors system and verification messages options and attention messages Inquiry 2 If you have a multiuser system you can copy color settings from one workstation to another with a similar monitor To copy color settings from another workstation enter the workstation ID in the Copy From field and press Enter To restore the current workstation s colors to their original installation colors use the Inquiry F2 command and select DFLT from the list that appears 3 Press Tab to select the screen type for which you want to change color settings 4 To change the sp
335. r ID e The second c parameter specifies the company in which to open OSAS When you start OSAS the values you specified for the u and c parameters appear in the appropriate fields on the OSAS login screen so that you can log in faster If these parameters are not specified you must fill in these fields manually These parameters can be entered in any combination after the separator dash Starting OSAS in other Operating Systems To start OSAS on an operating system other than Windows enter osas at the operating system prompt The osas command recognizes twoparameters t and C Resource Manager 1 11 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Starting OSAS e The terminal ID t is the identification code assigned to the terminal you are using to run OSAS On multiuser systems each terminal usually has a default ID assigned when the terminals were added to the system Use the t parameter to log on using a specific terminal If you do not specify a terminal OSAS uses the first terminal defined in the Devices config bbx file e The company ID c is the identification code assigned to a company If your system carries two or more companies and you do not enter a company ID OSAS enters the company used by the last person at that terminal The most general expression for launching OSAS takes all the parameters into account For example if you are on terminal 2 T2 working with company B specify that information to access the system osas
336. r Lines Per Page 63 Standard Cols 80 Compress PSL Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin blank Font blank Setup Yes Dialog blank Windows Default Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 80 Compress Printer Dot Matrix Cols 132 Top Margin blank Left Margin blank LPD Font blank Setup blank Dialog blank Print Dialog Dot Matrix Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 80 Compress PDD Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin blank Font blank Setup blank Dialog Yes Print Setup Dot Matrix Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 80 Compress PSD Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin blank Font blank Setup blank Dialog blank 2 34 Resource Manager Devices Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 If you use a wide carriage printer use the Print Setup function in Windows to set up the paper size Select a paper size of 14 7 8 inches x 11 inches use the US SF information in the Windows Print Manager Due to a limitation in Windows you must set this printer as the default printer at the Windows level to use the US SF paper size when printing If you do not make the wide carriage printer the default printer you must change the paper size each time you print to that printer Device Default Settings Windows Default Lines Per Page 66 Standard Cols 136 Compress Printer Wide Carriage Cols 240 Top Margin blank Left Margin blank LP
337. r file stores the setup ID headers and user defined information to be used by a function in a calculation The Calculated Values file stores each value that appears on a dashboard the terminal that last updated the value and the last update date and time When a function calculates a value the data including the date and time is sent to this file The EIS Dashboard function retrieves the data and sends it to the screen When you use the Recalc or Global command on a dashboard or the Global Dashboard Update function page 11 3 the information is stored here The Application file stores information about individual applications Resource Manager uses the file during installation and to control the Applications menu The OSAPPL DOS file is used on Windows systems while the OSAPPL UNX file is used on UNIX and Linux systems One or both files may be used depending on the operating systems you use with OSAS In mixed client server environments the UNIX terminals use the OSAPPL UNX file for program path information and the Windows workstations use OSAPPL DOS The Backup files are text files that contain the operating system commands used to back up OSAS files The OSBUF txt file contains the command appropriate for diskette backup the OSBUT txt file contains the command appropriate for tape backup Resource Manager OSCL OSCN OSCNVT OSCNVT HDR OSCOMP OSCOPR OSDE OSDF OSED OSEL OSER File Descriptions APPENDI
338. r information on setting up users and roles Resource Manager 1 13 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Starting OSAS Roles Roles limit use of the system and protect sensitive information Each role allows access to specific applications menus and functions If you cannot select a menu or function your assigned role is not authorized for it Use the Roles function page 2 19 to set up roles Workstation Date To change the workstation date select Workstation date from the File menu click the Change Date button on the toolbar or press F6 EN set Workstation Date BE Commands Edit Modes Other Help Workstation Date 12 28 2007 5 When the Workstation Date box appears use the button or your keyboard to enter the date and press Enter 1 14 Resource Manager Navigating OSAS o M OSAS menus and functions are available in two modes graphical and text The graphical mode allows both keyboard and mouse commands and uses data entry fields and buttons similar to those found in any graphical software program The text mode presents information in a simpler text format and uses keyboard commands to access functions and move around the screen If you use an operating system that does not have graphical capabilities the text mode is the only mode available You can use either text or graphical function screens independent of the main menu For example you can use text function screens while using the graphical main menu and vice v
339. r to work with because you can use the mouse to drag and drop fields or access right click menus but text dashboards allow precise control and can be converted For information on working with graphical dashboards turn to page 9 31 For more information on working with text dashboards see page 9 34 Resource Manager 9 29 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Dashboard Editor Planning Dashboard Changes 9 30 Follow these steps to plan and manage dashboard creation or modification 1 Research the values functions setups and field definitions you need for the dashboard Determine whether you can modify an existing dashboard and save time or whether you need to start from scratch Spending a little planning time up front can save headaches later Use the EIS Field Definitions Setup and Functions functions to create or modify the dashboard elements you need for the new dashboard Use the Dashboard Editor function to create and save the new dashboard If you want the dashboard to be available in both modes convert the new dashboard or make your changes to the text dashboard if necessary Use the Roles function page 9 25 to limit access to sensitive information if necessary For more details on planning and creating a new dashboard see Planning Dashboard Changes on page 8 5 Resource Manager Dashboard Editor EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Working with Graphical Dashboards The screen that appears wh
340. ransaction that uses the tax location Clear the check boxes or enter N if the tax location does not tax freight or miscellaneous charges e Ifyou have refundable taxes enter the Tax Refundable Acct to which you want to post the refundable tax Use the Proceed OK command to move to the scrolling region to enter or edit sales and purchase tax rates and to view current totals for tax collected Use these commands to work with the information in the scrolling region Press Enter to edit sales and purchase tax percentages assigned to the selected tax class The Edit Line screen appears See Editing Tax Class Percentages on page 5 8 for more information on how to use this screen e Press T to return to the Tax Location field in the header section e Press F to view the first tax location record in the file e Press Lto view the last tax location record in the file e Press N to view the next tax location record in the file Resource Manager Tax Locations Periodic Processing for Sales and Use Taxes Sales Tax Reporting CHAPTER 5 e Press P to view the previous tax location record in the file Press V to view detailed information for the selected tax class Press any key to return to the Tax Locations screen when you finish viewing the information Press H to return to the Name field in the header section of the screen e Press G to go to a specific tax class line This command is available only when there is more
341. rd width or Compressed or enter C to print it in compressed width 4 Click OK or press Enter to begin printing the report 5 If you want to stop printing after it has begun press Ctrl Break 6 Click OK or press Enter to continue Resource Manager 1 37 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Reports 1 38 Preview the Report The Print Preview option is only available for graphical workstations However before Print Preview will work in Windows you must add a sysprint device line in the config bbx file for that workstation Use the Devices function on the Resource Manager User Setup menu to add this line Follow these steps to view a report using Print Preview 1 Select Print Preview in graphical screens 2 If multiple printers are available for the terminal either select the printer from the list or enter the appropriate code for the printer and press Enter Use the Devices function on the Resource Manager Installation and Configuration menu to add printers to the terminal 3 Click OK or press Enter to continue 4 When available either select Standard or enter S if you want to view the report in standard width or select Compressed or enter C if you want to view it in compressed width 5 Press Enter The Print Preview screen displays the report as it will look when printed out in hard copy 6 To print from this screen select Print from the File menu To exit from this screen select Exit from the File menu Save the R
342. re left as they are Note Once files are erased you cannot undo the action 5 Usethe Proceed OK command to create the files After the files are created the Company Setup menu appears You can use the Data File Creation function to create one new data file if it has become corrupted and you do not have a backup to restore Follow these steps to create a data file in this situation 1 Rename the corrupt file or move it to a different location 2 Access the Data File Creation function and enter the application ID that contains the corrupt file 3 When the message appears select No so that the system does not erase the existing files for the application you selected 4 Use the Proceed OK command to create the corrupt file The system creates only the missing file the one you renamed or moved in step 1 5 Use the function related to the corrupt file to verify the file was created successfully and to re enter any data that was lost 6 After you are certain the new file is working correctly erase the corrupt file you renamed or moved Data File Conversion o M Use the Data File Conversion function to convert data files and EIS screen definitions from OSAS version 3 2 or higher to the latest version Some versions of certain applications require this conversion to be performed in a specific order Consult the application guide or the release notes you received for specific instructions If you are converting from a
343. reens to attach documents to master file records The File Types screen is divided into two sections You must use the top header section to specify the workstation to which the file types apply and to enter the default start command or script location and name However you do not need to set up file types in the bottom section of the screen if you or your users use only the programs corresponding to the default file associations in Windows or Mac OS X or in the Linux UNIX script mentioned below You only need to enter file types if you or a user uses an alternate program for these file extensions for example if you use Wordpad instead of Word to open files with a DOC extension or if you use a PDF viewer other than Adobe Acrobat Reader On Windows and Mac OS X workstations OSAS uses the default start command for SS these operating systems to launch the appropriate program for a given file type Since Linux UNIX machines lack a similar command you need to write a script to call and launch the program for a corresponding file type then specify that script name in the Default Start and Program Name fields on the File Types screen for these workstations When OSAS launches a program to view an attached file it uses one variable to identify the file so that the program can open it The DOC variable contains the attached document s file path and name The values for these variables are taken from the information you enter when you attach a documen
344. ription for the item This short description appears as the name on the application s tab if you are editing the main menu or as the name of the function within a menu If the Short Description field is blank the system uses the information in the Description field on the MDI menu instead Select the menu item s type e Oindicates that the line contains only descriptive comment information e 1 indicates that the line is a menu file that uses another menu file e 2 indicates that the line is a record using another menu from the current file e 3 indicates that the line executes an application program e 4 indicates that the line calls or executes a public program 5 indicates that the line executes an operating system command e 6 indicates that the line executes a public program directly e 7 indicates that the line opens an EIS dashboard e 8 indicates that the line opens a GENERAL Report Writer report e 9 indicates that the line starts an ODBC function e Aindicates that the line uses file type associations to launch an application and open the file indicated in the Program field If the menu item uses another menu or calls a program or command enter the program name menu file name menu record name or operating system command to execute in the Program field If you selected a type of 0 leave this field blank If you are attaching a document to a menu enter the document s file name in the Program field When you atta
345. rmation for technical support This information also appears on the Other Commands Support Information screen You can also access this function by pressing Shift F3 when a Basic Error window appears Technical support may prompt you to access this screen if you call for technical support for basic information such as your site number and the telephone numbers for your reseller or dealer To enter support information select Support Information from the Installation and Configuration menu The Support Information screen appears EX Support Information lee Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX tz a aa 20 lee ok Labandon Dealer Name Phenomenal Business Solutions Dealer Contact Joe Smith Dealer Phone Number 888 555 8888 Fax No 888 555 8889 Dealer E mail joe phenombus com Dealer Web Site www phenombus com Dealer Site Number 999999 Note 1 Call Joe before calling Open Systems support Note 2 Customer Site Number 999999 Open Systems Technical Support United States 888 582 5000 Canada 888 582 5000 Web Site www osas com Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 INS Resource Manager 2 69 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Support Information Enter or edit your reseller or dealer s contact information as well as any notes you want to remember Enter or edit the United States or Canadian phone number you call for support and make sure the correct URL address www osas com appears in the Web
346. ry from the RMRHxxx file select Purge Report History from the Print Manager File Maintenance submenu The Purge Report History screen appears EN Purge Report History CITE Commands Edit Modes Other Help Xt eimu ejego OK Abandon Select Report Type to Purge o Printed to File Archived Printed from Archive File Removed from Archive File All Purge History Dates Before 07 01 2010 fe Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Select the type of report to purge then enter the date before which to purge information Use the Proceed OK command to begin processing The menu appears when the purge completes successfully Resource Manager 14 13 APPENDIXA Main Menus Function Menus Favorites Menu Other Commands Menu Information Menu A 3 A 9 A 15 A 17 A 35 OSAS Menus When you use the OSAS graphical mode see Graphical Mode on page 1 15 for more information a menu bar appears at the top of main menu and function screens to give you access to additional commands While the commands these menus contain are available in text mode via function keys only the Favorites page A 15 Other Commands page A 17 and Information page A 35 menus are shared between the two modes Refer to OSAS Commands on page B 1 for information on all commands available in both graphical and text mode and the function keys you use to access them This appendix describes each menu
347. s 1 22 function screens 1 22 main menu 1 22 Top 10 Customers 13 15 Top 10 Items 13 17 Top 10 Sales Reps 13 19 Top 10 Vendors 13 21 U updates installing 2 6 use tax accumulated totals 5 7 calculating tax on tax 5 12 clearing totals 5 15 percentages 5 8 periodic processing 5 7 Sales Tax Report 5 13 tax authorites 5 6 Tax Classes 5 3 Tax Groups 5 9 tax levels 5 6 Tax Locations 5 5 tax on tax 5 9 User Login Activity 4 3 4 4 User Defined Field Setup 2 59 2 61 Users 2 9 terminal IDs in BBj 2 9 terminal IDs in PRO 5 2 9 V values Resource Manager INDEX field changing 6 11 function types 9 19 variables FIL 4 18 file types 4 18 PTH 4 18 View File Contents list 6 4 overview 6 3 W web browser path to executable 4 13 Web Setup 2 65 Workstation Configuration 4 20 Colors 4 21 4 22 Defaults 4 7 4 14 A 7 Devices 2 23 2 49 File Types 4 17 4 20 Keyboard 4 23 4 24 Users 2 9 workstation date 1 14 workstations color settings 4 21 default settings 4 7 A 7 keyboard mapping 4 23 X XXHELP 7 19 IX 11
348. s 3 37 LPTx devices 2 30 printer devices screen 2 29 printing form feed marks 2 38 laser forms on ink jets 2 37 printing orm feed marks 3 36 sysprint defaults 2 34 sysprint devices 2 30 Pro 5 programs calling A 33 Proceed OK command 1 2 product suggestions entering A 28 Resource Manager properties dashboard 9 32 field 9 33 PTH variable 4 18 Purge Dashboard History 11 5 11 6 Purge Data Records 6 9 6 10 Purge Report History 14 13 Q quarterly period setup 3 23 R ranges in EIS setup IDs 9 11 in reports 1 35 rebuilding damaged files 6 6 6 7 records purging 6 9 reinstalling applications 2 5 removing applications 2 75 Report Control Active Report Control A 31 Archive Report Control 14 3 Report History Inquiry 14 7 14 9 reports Active Report Control A 31 aligning laser forms 2 35 2 37 Archive Report Control 14 3 Dashboard 10 5 Dashboard History 10 7 e mailing 1 40 Field History 10 9 formatting 1 42 including information 1 35 previewing 1 38 Print Manager history inquiry 14 7 Print Manager types 14 8 printing 1 37 continuous forms 2 38 laser forms on ink jets 2 37 ranges 1 35 Sales Tax 5 13 saving to a file 1 39 searching 14 5 Resource Manager INDEX selecting information 1 35 sorting information 1 36 viewing on screen 1 39 Reports and Inquiry 4 4 Data File Allocation Report 6 19 E Mail History Report 2 71 Error Log 7 59 Global Inquiry Window Audit
349. s No Length 3 System Mask 4 Mask e Enter the text you want to use for the field in the Prompt text box Enter the field Type or use the Inquiry command to look up and select it from the list that appears e Change the number of characters that can be entered into the field if necessary e Ifyou are working with a numeric field enter the System Mask to use for the field or use the Inquiry command to select one from a list e Use the Mask text box to enter whatever type of mask you require for example a phone number mask You cannot enter anything in the Mask text box if you select a system mask Use the Proceed OK command to return to the User Defined Fields Setup screen and enter other user defined field information Use the Move and Swap buttons to move lines around on the screen Select a line and click either Move or Swap A dialog box appears for defining where you want to move the selected line Press H to return to the Application field to select a different application and file for which to enter user defined fields Resource Manager User Defined Field Setup Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Resource Manager When you finish working with user defined fields use the Proceed OK command to close the screen and return to the Installation and Configuration menu Perform these steps within each application for which you set up user defined fields e Open the File Maintenance menu within each a
350. s Resource Manager uses to maintain the OSAS system Installing and Setting Up Resource Manager Refer to the installation guide you received with your OSAS media to install Resource Manager and its related components You must install and set up Resource Manager and terminals before installing other OSAS applications To set up Resource Manager follow these steps for each workstation that uses OSAS Refer to your installation guide for more detailed information 1 Work through all functions on the Installation and Configuration menu e Except for the Devices function you must work through the functions for each workstation Use the Copy From field to copy settings to other Workstations e Verify that the correct paths appear in the Directories function If the paths are not correct enter the correct ones e Use the User Defined Field Setup function to set up the customized fields your business uses e f you want to e mail selected reports to others use the E Mail Setup function to enter information about your e mail system 2 Work through all functions on the Company Setup menus e Setup Form Codes and Form Printers to print forms for your business 1 8 Resource Manager About Resource Manager Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Work through the three tax functions on the Sales Tax Reporting menu then use the Period Setup function to enter the fiscal year and period dates Work through all functions on the User Setup menu as
351. s available only when there is more than one screen of tax groups 5 10 Resource Manager Tax Groups Sales Tax Reporting CHAPTER 5 Adding or Editing Tax Groups To add a tax group to the Tax Groups screen s scrolling region press A To edit an existing tax group press Enter The Append or Edit Tax Group screen appears The Edit Tax Group screen is shown below Other than the title these screens are identical N Edit Tax Group ted e Ea Commands Edit Modes Other Help xm we mu e ee oc Jw Group ID MNMPLS Description Minneapolis MN Reporting Method Combined Tax Level 1 MN 4 Tax Level 2 MNMPLS a Tax Level 3 a Tax Level 4 al Tax Level 5 a Enter the Group ID and Description If you are editing a group the group you are editing appears and cannot be changed Select the Reporting Method for the tax group Combined or Separate Combined reports only the total tax Separate reports a breakdown of each tax level Inquiry Enter or edit the tax locations to use as the tax levels for the tax group If you enter multiple levels the Calculate Tax on Tax Level x message appears Select the check box or enter Y in text mode to calculate tax including the previous tax level otherwise clear the check box or enter N Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Tax Groups screen Resource Manager 5 11 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Tax Groups Example Calculating tax o
352. s detailed reminder information for the Pop Up Calendar The Reminder Header file stores subject information for Pop Up Calendar reminders The Application Form Printer file stores information about the printers used to print forms through application functions The Restore files are text files that contain the operating system commands used to restore OSAS files The OSREF txt file contains the command appropriate for diskette restore the OSRET txt file contains the command appropriate for tape restore The State Codes file stores state code information The temporary Config bbx Detail file stores detailed information about a device in the config bbx file This file is built and removed in the Devices function page 2 23 The temporary Config bbx Master file stores the master list of devices in the config bbx file This file is built and removed in the Devices function page 2 23 The VAR Information file stores the dealer and support information you enter in the Support Information function page 2 69 The Tax Class Codes file contains tax classes and descriptions When you set up tax locations you assign a percentage and other information to each tax This file is set up through the Tax Classes function page 5 3 The Device Definitions file stores sample device names that are used in inquiry windows during device maintenance Resource Manager C 7 APPENDIX C File Descriptions RMDRVDEF RMGCxxx RMGIDEF RMPRN
353. s function page 14 11 to modify the file name parameters that Print Manager uses to name archived reports it maintains e Use the Purge Report History function page 14 13 to remove information from the history file that tracks report activity Remember that the roles you use in OSAS apply to Print Manager if you do not have access to an OSAS function you will not be able to access a report file that was produced using that function 14 2 Resource Manager Archive Report Control oo M Use the Archive Report Control function to work with the reports you have archived in Print Manager To work with archived report files select Archive Report Control from the Print Manager menu The Archive Report Control screen appears El Archive Report Control fo es Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help _ a E xt5 alnu l e ee OK Tag Description Date Time User Term Open Invoice Report 12 29 2010 AR Analysis Report 12 29 2010 102 18p iscottm T000 2 Sales Journal 12 29 2010 102 18p scottm TOOO a Purchases Journal 12 29 2010 02 19p scottm T000 Vendor Analysis Report 12 29 2010 02 19p scottm T000 B Sort By Date Sequence Enter tag Edit Toggle menu file Jl teXt search Open file View file Sort Print l print Batch Goto Status Bar Company H 12 29 2010 Termin
354. s in this order skip the applications you do not use Resource Manager General Ledger Sales Order and or Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and or Accounts Payable Inventory Bill of Materials Kitting and then any other applications If you do not have Accounts Receivable or Sales Order you must build tax information in Resource Manager before you convert the other applications You can convert data files across multiple versions in one process However to convert from version 4 5 to 7 6 in one process and retain source files you must have enough available disk space for five copies of your files For example if you have 100 megabytes of Accounts Receivable data you need at least 500 megabytes of available disk space to store source files for versions 4 5 5 0 5 1 6 1 and 6 5 To save disk space convert each application check the results and purge directories source files for older versions as you go or answer YES to the Erase Source Files prompt to automatically erases the source files Expect the conversion processes to require several hours or perhaps days depending on the amount of data you are converting Back up your data files before you start Some applications require responses during the conversion Periodically check the workstation and answer any questions that appear For instructions on converting see Data File Conversion on page 3 27 Converting from 5 0x 5 1x 5 2x 6 xx Convert your application data
355. s into a combination of fields to select specific information to print on the list 7 Ifthe screen contains check boxes or Yes No options select the check box or enter Y in text mode to print that information on the list Clear the check box or enter N if you do not want to print that information 8 If the screen contains option buttons or numbers select the option to use to print the list for that mode text character graphical or both or to print the list in full detail or summary only 9 Select the output device to begin printing the list See Outputting Reports on page 1 36 for more information After you produce the list the File Lists menu appears 3 44 File Lists Company Setup CHAPTER 3 Company Information List The Company Information List shows the names and addresses of companies that you have set up 11 27 2007 3 17 PM ID Information H Name Address 1 Address 2 City State Country Phone Fax Site Logo File Email Web Zip Defaults Location ID Bank ID Weight Unit End of Report Builders Supply Company Information List Masks Builders Supply Date Format o 4301 Dean Lakes Blvd Time Format o Shakopee MN 55379 Reg Dollars 2 US U S A IN Costs 4 9524962465 IN Prices 4 9524962495 IN Quantities 4 999999 Rates 3 SAMPLOGO GIF Hours 3 Vebmasterfbuilders_supply com Credit Limits www builders supply com MNOOO1 OSAS Web FNBOO1 OSAS Web Batch ID lbs OSAS Web Ord
356. s screen Resource Manager Tax Groups oo MM Use the Tax Groups function to combine several tax locations into one group for simultaneous sales tax calculations for line items For example a group could consist of a state and a local tax authority who both assess a sales tax on merchandise sold within their jurisdiction As an example suppose that Minnesota has a state sales tax and Minneapolis has a city sales tax Sales in Minneapolis incur two sales taxes one owed to Minnesota and the other to Minneapolis This situation requires a tax location group that contains two tax locations one for Minnesota and the other for Minneapolis When this tax group is used for a transaction taxes due to both tax authorities are calculated You can also use this function to set up tax on tax Tax on tax means that taxing authorities charge tax on the selling price of goods or services and taxes by another tax authority When tax on tax is calculated the first tax rate is calculated and subtotaled before the second tax rate is calculated and added and so on for the total selling price Tax on tax is used primarily outside of the United States Goods and services tax GST and provincial sales tax PST are examples of taxes that can require tax on tax capabilities Contact your local tax authorities for more information As an example suppose that Canada has a goods and serves tax GST and Quebec has a provincial state tax PST which also taxe
357. s table contains specific examples on how to use OSAS functions or tools These examples are for demonstration only you may need to substitute your own data and values or modify the procedure slightly to fit your business practices and obtain the results you need Resource Manager About Resource Manager OC M The Resource Manager application is the engine that drives the entire system it holds the data files that store basic information used by functions in every other application it contains default settings used by individual workstation terminals and it manages access and tracks usage for each application installed Resource Manager also contains the powerful Global Inquiry tool that helps you drill through your accounting data to find information throughout your system Because it provides the operating environment that holds other applications Resource Manager is required for every OSAS application In addition to the OSAS administrative functions Resource Manager also contains another powerful business tool Executive Information Summary EIS With EIS you can access company information quickly and view summaries of all aspects of a single company or a group of companies Resource Manager Menus Like all OSAS applications Resource Manager organizes functions by menus Each Resource Manager menu is described below For details on the functions each menu contains please refer to that chapter in this guide Installati
358. s the GST When the tax location group is set up Canada is the first level tax location and Quebec is the second level tax location Sales with the Quebec tax location group ID incur a Quebec PST that is calculated on the goods and services total plus the GST Resource Manager 5 9 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Tax Groups To work with tax groups select Tax Groups from the Application Setup menu The Tax Groups screen appears and lists the tax groups you have defined ax Groups lee Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help RX ta Rba mna 208 909 Ok Abandon Group ID Description Reporting mm dax ares eee Method One Two Three Four Five CA California Combined Ej MD Maryland Combined MD 4 MN Minnesota Combined MN a MNMPLS Minneapolis MN Combined MN MNMPLS TX Texas Combined TX TXHOUS Houston TX Combined TX TXHOUS Enter edit l Append Goto group CompanyH 1112772007 Terminal T000 OVR Use the commands to work with a specific tax group e Press Enter to edit the selected tax group The Edit Tax Group screen appears See Adding or Editing Tax Groups on page 5 11 for more information e Press A to add a tax group to the list The Append Tax Group screen appears See Adding or Editing Tax Groups on page 5 11 for more information e Press Gto go to a specific tax group This command i
359. screen flickering that may occur as you navigate around the OSAS menu Enter the title to use for the syswindow Resource Manager Devices Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 SCO Open If graphics do not display correctly on your SCO Open Server 5 system it may Server Errors be because Open Server 5 sets console devices to be IBM terminals instead of ANSI terminals To fix the problem enter mapchan n into the profile file Devices Printers Screen The Printers screen appears when you add or edit a printer line MW Devices Print E teJ e Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help Device Name P001 A System Device Name Device Type vs Default Printer Laser 4 Device Mode Value Lines Per Page Standard Cols 80 ISSUE Compress Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin Right Margin Bottom Margin Font Setup Dialog Legacy Margins Server E Client 5 Enter edit Header Done Company H 11 27 2007 Termina T000 OVR Enter or edit this information in the header section Enter the Device Name For printers this name must begin with the letter P or the letter L and follow the format Pxxx P99 for example name of the device whose settings you want to copy or skip this field Enter a System Device Name This name tells OSAS what system device to use when the device name is selected Inquiry e The
360. screen such as on order Header Information screens If the screen contains only one address the second button is not available Note Before you can view maps you must set up information about the mapping websites you use in the Address Mapping function enter the path to your web browser in the Preferences function and specify the Map Lookup ID to use in the Company Information function See page 2 65 page 4 7 and page 3 3 for information Browse If you use BBj in graphical mode you can use the Browse button when it appears next to fields to navigate to directories and files and automatically enter file paths into that field Click the Browse button to open the Select Directory File screen then navigate to the directory or file and click Open to automatically enter the file path in the field Inquiry The Inquiry command helps you look up and select valid entries for fields that are connected to master file records For example when you use the Inquiry command in a Batch ID field OSAS lists all batches you have set up so that you can select the one you want to enter in that field When the Inquiry button appears next to a field you can either click the button or press F2 to open the Inquiry screen and search for valid entries Resource Manager 1 23 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS Navigating OSAS Maintenance 33 The Maintenance command allows you to enter or edit master file records on the fly from within functions For exa
361. selected characteristic press Enter To return to the header section press H When you finish defining characteristics press D to return to the main Devices screen Depending on terminal you are adding you can define these characteristics Device Mode Driver Name DMA Mode Keystart Keywait Initialization Termination Invisible Title Description If you select doscon as the device type enter the name of the device driver file If you select doscon as the device type select the box or enter Y in text mode for a terminal that supports direct memory addressing DMA Clear the box or enter N in text mode for a terminal that does not support it If you select doscon as the device type refer to the terminal manual for the modes it supports To change the terminal s mode when you start OSAS enter the mode number If your terminal has function keys assigned to entry functions for example the termcap kO entry is assigned to function key 10 select the check box or enter Y in text mode if it does not clear the check box or enter N in text mode Enter the number of seconds the terminal should wait before processing a group of characters Enter an operating system command that the system executes before using the terminal Enter an operating system command to reset the terminal when the job finishes If you use the MDI menu select the check box or enter Y in text mode to eliminate any
362. ses 52 fcbs 100 cibs 100 handles 100 transparentrgb 192 192 192 alias PF SFILE Print File LF 0DOA novell locks alias PSP nspool Dot Matrix Printer CR SP 12 SPCOLS 80 CP 0F CPCOLS 132 LOCAL 1 QUEUE Q NAME 2 SERVER SERVER NAME 2 alias TOO syswindow alias T000 syswindow alias T001 syswindow alias T002 syswindow alias T003 syswindow alias T004 syswindow alias T005 syswindow alias T006 syswindow alias T007 syswindow alias T008 syswindow alias T009 syswindow 4 if Tol alias T01 syswindow alias PF FILE Print File LF 0D0A FILE PRINT 01 alias P1 sysprint Okidata 192 193 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 endif if T010 alias TO10 syswindow alias P1 sysprint Okidata 192 193 SPCOLS 80 CPCOLS 132 10ck LOCK T00 o endif if T011 alias TO11 syswindow alias P1 dev lpti Okidata 192 193 CR SP 1E SPCOLS 80 CP 1D CPCOLS 132 endif If End If loop continues through each of the available 10 session alias X0 sysgui alias X1 sysgui 2 46 Resource Manager Devices Resource Manager Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 This line tells BBx to perform file and record locking in a special way when running on Novell systems It is required for Novell systems This line illustrates the nspool logical print device When you define an nspool print device you must also define these parameters for it e The LOCAL printer is the port to which the output is sent Typically this will be 1
363. suggestions error logs and global inquiry window definitions If you use the OSAS e mail functions you can also print a report listing the e mails sent through OSAS or purge this e mail history You can also view the locations of other OSAS users through the User Login Activity function Master File Lists Use the Master File Lists functions to print lists of information that you set up in other Resource Manager functions These lists are useful if you are planning to make changes want to add information or keep a record of information that is on your system All OSAS applications store information in data files As you enter transactions edit records and post data the system transfers information between data files as needed for correct accounting and to keep all applications current Resource Manager 1 7 CHAPTER 1 Welcome to OSAS About Resource Manager Because Resource Manager is the basis of the OSAS system many of its data files are used in basic processing throughout the system For example the files that store tax information are accessed whenever the system calculates or stores tax amounts for transactions Other files pertain to how the system works in general some control the menu and installation behavior others manage basic function access and data formatting and others store application preferences and related information Refer to File Descriptions on page C 1 for detailed information on the individual file
364. sure to enter the complete version number For example if you are using version 4 06 enter 4 06 not 4 0 Before conversion always back up your OSAS files Note Because tables are also converted when you convert data files any changes made including those in Options and Interfaces since the initial set up may be lost Check table settings and verify your options and interfaces selections after converting all companies If you need to reconvert a company either reset your options after conversion or back up the xxTB files before converting D 1 APPENDIX D Data File Conversion Consider Your Setup Before you convert your version of Resource Manager to the current version consider the exact setup of your system Modifications to your system might be lost if you install a newer version of a program or update a file If you are not sure whether your system is ready for conversion consult your reseller Converting Contractor s Job Cost Files If you use Contractor s Job Cost the APFORMX and CJFORMX where X is a number between 0 and 9 are not considered to be data files and thus are not converted when you use the Data File Conversion function To use these files in the new version you must either set them up again in the new installation or copy the files manually from the old directory to the new sysfil directory Converting from 3 2x 4 0x and 4 1x D 2 Convert your application data files in this order skip the appli
365. t IaxLoc Erst Last Next Prev view Header Goto Class a a Company H 10 04 2007 Terminal T000 OV You can move around the screen in these ways Use the mouse or press Tab to move from field to field Use the scroll buttons to move from line to line in scrolling regions e Ifa screen appears prompting for the kind of information to enter or maintain such as on File Maintenance or Transactions screens select the appropriate option and click OK to continue e Press Page Down if prompted to move to the next section e Click Header when it appears to return to the screen s header section e Press F7 to exit the screen and return to the main menu Resource Manager Navigating OSAS Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Main Menu Drop down Menus Menus Both the graphical main menu and graphical function screens contain drop down and shortcut menus that give you access to additional commands without using the function keys While you can use the function keys to access commands in graphical mode you may find it easier to access commands through these menus To access a drop down menu s commands click a menu title The commands for that menu appear followed by any associated hot key combinations in brackets lt gt To use a command click the command name or press the hot key combination The menu bar for the graphical main menu is shown below A T000 OPEN SYSTEMS R Accounting Software File
366. t are set up with the BBj Enterprise Manager This allows you to keep the BBj User Authentication turned off 2 14 Resource Manager Users Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 3 You will be prompted to enter the BBj Admin Login N Admi og Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2 xe be aid 28 Abandon Admin ID admin Admin Password mmm Enter the Admin ID and the Admin Password and press enter If you have not set up any users the Append User screen appears over the Users screen so that you can enter the first user record Continue to the next step for information on adding a user 4 To add a new user press A The Append User ID screen appears The Edit User ID screen has similar functionality Press Enter to edit the highlighted user ppend User ID belas Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2Xt gt elma 9 0e OK Abandon User ID charlest Name Charles T BBj User ID charlest Password Re enter Password Terminal ID T 010 Archive Control Never Archive Path server archive Archive Share Path server archiveshare E Mail Login ID charlest E Mail Password Company Role ID Description H Data Data Entry Append Go to Header Done Resource Manager 2 15 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Users 2 16 10 11 12 Enter the User ID and Name You may not use special characters in th
367. t necessarily continuous For example line 899 is listed after line 699 Do notchange line numbers that are not listed they either are not used or should not need to be modified when you build a function Resource Manager 9 21 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Function Definitions 9 22 Planning the Function Before you use the GENERIC FNC function to customize a function plan the attributes that you want the function to have What do you want the function to do Which values and how many do you want the function to return e Which files and applications does the function need to access Consult the file descriptions of the applications involved to answer these questions Make a backup copy of GENERIC FNC or any function before you modify it Modifying GENERIC FNC Precoded EIS functions use the following standards Lines 200 299 set these variables VALUES The total number of values returned by the function A value is anything thatthe function returns number date code literal value RTN The ID of the function It must be 8 characters long If it has fewer than 8 characters pad with spaces Lines 300 399 are used to dimension application specific variables used in the function with the DIM verb Check the IOLists used in the function in lines 899 989 for arrays Lines 400 499 set the following variables FILES The total number of application files opened for each company FILENAMES I
368. t to a master file record In order for information to be passed correctly between OSAS and your other software programs to view attached files you must enter the DOC variable after program or script names in the Default Start and Program Name fields on the File Types screen Follow these steps to set up file types Resource Manager 4 17 CHAPTER 4 User Setup File Types 1 Select File Types from the User Setup menu E Fite Types reJrer s Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help xt glan ejlee ok Workstation T000 la Default Start cmd exe c start DOC Ext Program Name C Program Files Microsoft Office Office12 WINW ORD EXE DOC a PDF C Program Files Adobe Reader 9 0 Reader AcroRd32 exe DOC a TXT C Windows notepad exe DOC a Enter edit Append View Workstation ID Header Go to Company H 11 08 2010 Terminal T000 INS Select the workstation ID If you re working on a Windows or Mac OS X workstation OSAS automatically detects the operating system and enters the appropriate start command string in the Default Start box followed by the DOC variables Examples of these command strings are Windows cmd exe c start DOC Mac OS X usr bin open DOC If you re working on a Linux UNIX workstation enter the directory path to the script that launches the appropriate program for a
369. ta files if necessary Because the functions on this menu focus on maintaining your data files there are no setup functions as when you initially set up OSAS Instead use these functions as part of your routine maintenance or when you need to restore data 6 1 View File Contents oo 0 M Use the View File Contents function to display information directly from a data file for a specified range of records The information appears or prints in a raw mode and is not labeled but is divided by field number For details on what each field stores refer to the OSAS file descriptions manuals or print the Data Dictionary from the Report Writer Master File Lists menu if you have the Report Writer application To view the contents of a file select View File Contents from the Database Utilities menu The View File Contents screen appears EN View File Contents tela Es Commands Edit Modes Other Help xe elmo e ee ok Abandon File Name OSAS75B Jata GLJRH Use Te nr ate Description GL Journal File File Type Highly Recoverable Mkeyed Logical Key Size Bytes per record 192 Number of records Active keys 41 5 11 1 2 49 1 12 2 7 1 2 49 1 12 9 1 12 J411 1 2 11 1 6 11 1 2 1 1 6 5 1 1 111 1 2 Keys Key chain 5 Keys From Thru Print Keys Only Keys and Data Enter 99 to display ALL key chains or specify O thru 6 Company 1003 2007 Terminal TODO OVR Enter the File Name t
370. tachment type E Mail Queue Company Setup CHAPTER 3 e Press D when done entering the e mail information to return to the E Mail Queue Edit Append Attachment dialog box The Edit Append Attachment dialog box appears when you press Enter or A in the Attachment File scroll region of the E Mail Information screen EN Append Attachment fo x Commands Edit Modes Other Help xts amp a amp ememu eeoeo ok Abandon File Name C OSAS76 data 0npqq79x005 TXT Enter the File Name of the file you want to attach to the e mail or click the browse button lud to navigate to the file 2 Use the Proceed OK command to add the attachment to the e mail and return to the E Mail Information Screen 3 53 Archive Control oo M The Archive Control function allows you to determine which reports in the system can be archived Set the control tag for archiving to determine if a report will be archived or not Archiving options set at the user level will override these settings Archive Control also allows you to set the output type to either text or if you are running OSAS on BBj PDF You can attach a file prefix to the file so that the file is consistently named Finally you can enter an override path which will replace the path setting you entered in the Directories function To maintain the archive settings for your system s reports select Archive Control from the Company Setup menu Th
371. ted in standard print mode For a standard narrow carriage printer this value defaults the width of the paper to 80 columns wide If you use a wide carriage printer this value defaults to 132 Enter the hexadecimal value for standard print in characters per inch for the font you use OSAS uses a value of 10 for all forms however you can use a different size for reports and logs Enter the commands that reset the printer when print jobs finish Enter the number of seconds the system waits for a device to become available before displaying an error This characteristic is disabled by default as it has little value 2 33 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Devices Device Mode Description Top Margin Enter the amount of offset the top margin For sysprint devices the size appears in decimals If you change the default setting your change overrides the Windows default Sysprint Defaults When you install Resource Manager in a Windows environment OSAS automatically creates these default sysprint devices Device Default Settings Windows Default Lines Per Page 63 Standard Cols 80 Compress Printer Laser LPL Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin blank Font blank Setup blank Dialog blank Print Dialog Laser Lines Per Page 63 Standard Cols 80 Compress PDL Cols 132 Top Margin 5 Left Margin blank Font blank Setup blank Dialog Yes Print Setup Lase
372. tent unless you are sure of what must be done If changed you may not be able to correctly operate that application Only experienced personnel should have access to this function 7 A7 CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities System Messages 7 48 To work with system messages select System Messages from the System File ties menu The System Messages screen appears Utili Line Application IN S Message 1 Thru value must be greater than from value You must use the Append command to enter the first line entry C o or Customer level already exists Use the Edit function to change values Field value already exists Use the Edit function to change values You cannot delete the NONE customer level Unit of measure has previously been entered This alternate item already exists with the same item type This customer already has an alternate item set up for them woo mien This vendor already has an alternate item set up for them o You cannot add a location that already exists for this item You cannot append units here Use File Maintenance Items to add N Use the Lot Information function to change item quantities information n Location does not exist in Location s File x Item entered is not set up for the location entered an No lines exist in the scroll region o Command not available
373. ter a unique ID for the bank account in the Bank Account ID box 2 Choose Bank Account in the Type field In the GL Account Number box enter the number of the general ledger account affected by transactions made to the account The Inquiry F2 and Maintenance F6 commands are available if Bank Reconciliation interfaces with General Ledger Assign a unique account number to each bank account record UJ 4 Select Active or Inactive in the Status field A bank account must have an active status to be used in any transaction 3 10 Bank Accounts 9 Company Setup CHAPTER 3 In the Account Description box enter a description of the bank account for example the name of the bank Enter the Address City State Zip and Country for the Bank Account Enter the bank s phone and fax numbers using the phone mask that appears In the Contact box enter the name of the person you contact when you have questions about the account Enter the E Mail Address for the contact and the Web Site of the bank 10 Proceed to the Account Information screen Account Information B Bank Accounts Commands Edit Modes Other Help Federal Reserve Routing Code 000000000 Company Identifier Type 1 Number Include Company Offset Record in ACH Y 2xXtezl aealmal e OK Abandon Bank Account ID FNB001 1st National Bank Type Bank Account GL Account Number 100000 CASH IN BANK 1st NATIONAL Account Informa
374. ter the Field ID you want to view or edit or enter a new field ID If you entered a new setup ID the Copy From field appears Enter the setup from which to copy information or leave the field blank If you entered an existing field ID edit the Description and Display Mask that appear if necessary If you entered a new field ID enter its description and the mask it should use to display numerical values Enter a negative sign at the end of the mask if negative values can be created and displayed The functions and the corresponding setup IDs assigned to the field appear in the scrolling region Use the commands to work with these IDs Resource Manager EIS Field Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Press Enter to edit the selected function and setup ID The Edit Fields screen appears See Adding or Editing Function and Setup IDs on page 9 5 for more information e Press A to add a new function and setup ID to the end of the list The Append Fields screen appears See Adding or Editing Function and Setup IDs on page 9 5 for more information e Press H to return to the Description field to edit the field s description Press M to add view or edit the math formula used to calculate the value that appears in the field from the values returned by the functions and setups assigned to the field See Working with Formulas on page 9 7 for more information Adding or Editing Function and Setup IDs To add a functi
375. than one screen of entries The bottom of the screen shows the total collected tax the total calculated tax and the difference between the two The Total is the total tax amount that has been collected on each taxable invoice for this location For the Calculated total OSAS multiplies the Taxable Sales value by the appropriate percentage and adds that result to a running total for all tax classes in the tax location Any difference between the Total and the Calculated values appears in the Over Short field These differences are usually the result of rounding To account for this over short amount you may need to create a manual entry in the General Ledger depending on how your accounting department chooses to handle this type of item At the end of the reporting period for each tax authority you need to clear the accumulated tax information for the next reporting period Follow these steps to clear these totals 1 Print the Sales Tax Report page 5 13 for the tax authority This report contains the accumulated tax information for the reporting period and makes up part of your audit trail 2 Use the Clear Sales Tax function page 5 15 to clear the accumulated tax totals to prepare for the next reporting period Resource Manager 5 7 CHAPTER 5 Sales Tax Reporting Tax Locations Editing Tax Class Percentages To edit the sales and purchase tax percentages assigned to a tax class select the line you want to edit in the Tax Loc
376. that have been locked see Accounting Periods on page 3 21 Select No to allow period transactions regardless of period locking status Select Yes to use separate check numbers for Accounts Payable Purchase Order and Payroll accounts Select Yes to use separate voucher numbers for Accounts Payable Purchase Order and Payroll accounts Form Codes OC M Form codes are used primarily to assign copy names to the laser forms that you need to print multiple times for example to provide a file copy a customer copy an accounting copy and so on When you print a form to which you have assigned a form code all the copies you need also print automatically Use the Form Codes function to set up and maintain codes in the OSFRM file for the forms you use in the OSAS applications you have installed You can set up company specific form codes that apply only to the company you select or general form codes that are used by all companies Form codes can also be matched to specific printers using the Form Printers function page 3 37 Follow these steps to work with form codes 1 Select Form Codes from the Company Setup menu The Form Codes screen appears El Form Codes eJ a ee Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt malmal 7 ee ox _ Abandon Company ID Form Type Form Name Number of Copies q ARIN AR Invoices 4 Copy Number Copy Name Prompt to Mount Forms 1 Accounting Copy Prompt v 2 File Copy Prompt 3 Customer Co
377. the Position in Key field Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and continue to the next definition screen you selected If this is the last definition screen you selected the Global Inquiry Definition screen appears Enter another window ID to maintain or press F7 to return to the menu 7 35 State Codes MM Use the State Codes function to assign a three character code to a state province or other region within a country Some state codes are already preassigned Each state code must be unique and must be referenced to an existing country code To work with state codes select State Codes from the System File Utilities menu The State Codes screen appears EN State Codes oJ O E Commands Edit Modes Other Help RX te a RB mal elee OK Abandon State Code MN 4 State Name Minnesota Country us a USA Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal Tooo ovR Inquiry Select or enter the State Code then enter or edit the State Name and the Country Code to which the state code is assigned You can combine numbers and letters in the state code 7 37 Country Codes o M Use the Country Codes function to assign a two character code and a telephone number mask to a country Many country codes are already preassigned but you may want to verify that the phone mask is current To produce a list of the information entered in this function print the Country Codes master list page 7 57 To work w
378. the plug in application the base application s files will also be converted automatically For example enter SO to convert the files for both Sales Order and Accounts Receivable the system converts Accounts Receivable files automatically 7 Use the Proceed OK command to begin the conversion If any errors occur during conversion the system prompts you to print the error log after conversion completes 3 29 Options and Interfaces o M Use the Options and Interfaces function on the Company Setup menu to determine the way the applications function and to set up interfaces between certain applications installed on your system To produce a list of the information entered in the Options and Interfaces function use the Options and Interfaces List function on the Master File Lists menu Select Options and Interfaces from the Company Setup menu The Options and Interfaces selection screen appears TEN Options and Interfaces Ciel Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2xt mealma l 7 ee OK Abandon Company ID H Builders Supply Option Table Type Share T Application ID RM 4 Company H 09 28 2007 Terminal Tooo OVR Select the Option Table Type Share or Own If you have multiple companies and you want them to use the same options and interfaces select Share If you want each company to have unique options and interfaces select Own 3 31 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Options and Interfaces 3 32 For
379. the same terminal To avoid causing errors with files do not rely on capitalization to create unique terminal IDs In the Archive Control drop down choose whether you want the reports produced by this user to Always be archived to Never be archived or to give the user a Prompt to decide at the time of report production Enter the Archive Path and Archive Share Path if you want to use different paths for reports produced by this user Enter the E Mail Login ID and E Mail Password for the user Use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and proceed to the roles section Use the following commands in the Roles section of the screen e Press A to add a role The Append User Role dialog box appears See Append User Role dialog box on page 2 18 e Press G to go to a specific role in the list e Press H to edit the header of the Edit User ID screen e Press D to return to the Users screen When you add a new user the Do you want your config bbx modified automatically message appears after you complete entering information on the Add User ID screen Click Yes or enter Y to add the new terminal information to the config bbx configuration file click No or enter N if you want to manually add this information to the file If you add new terminals you must add these terminal IDs to the config bbx file for OSAS to function correctly Resource Manager Users 12 13 14 Resource Manager Installation an
380. this date and time or enter new values If you enter a later date or time the system waits until that date and time to begin the calculation after you use the Proceed OK command to start the process The values you enter here appear as the last date and time fields were updated when you use the View command on an EIS dashboard If you save updated information to history the date and time you enter here are also saved You can then choose from different dates and times for which to print historical values when you print an EIS Report See EIS Periodic Maintenance on page 11 1 for more information Use the Proceed OK command to begin processing The system returns you to the menu when processing completes Resource Manager Purge Dashboard History MA Use the Purge Dashboard History function to remove historical field information from the EIHIST field history file This function helps you maintain the size of and information available in the EIHIST file As with all OSAS functions that remove information from data files be sure that you back up the EIHIST file before you run this function The backup allows you to restore data if necessary Follow these steps to remove information from the EIHIST file 1 Make a back up copy of the EIHIST file 2 Select Purge Dashboard History from the EIS Periodic Maintenance menu The Purge Dashboard History screen appears EN Purge Dashboard History elle Commands
381. tical The Edit Types screen is shown below EN Edit Types ee Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2x ta mu 20 ok Abandon Type Company ID Zi From Thru Depending on the function ID associated with this setup definition you can add or edit data ranges for these data types e company ID e location ID e item ID e GL accounts Resource Manager Setup Definitions EIS File Maintenance CHAPTER 9 Entering Data Ranges Using Multiple Data Ranges e account types bank accounts The data types that are available for a setup definition are pulled from the function ID assigned to the setup If the type of information you wish to specify 1s not available meaning that the function you are using does not allow that data type associate a different function ID with the setup definition so that you can select the correct type of information for the setup definition To enter a range for the selected data type enter the values to use in the From and Thru fields then use the Proceed OK command to save your changes and return to the Setup screen To select information from only one piece of data for only one company for example enter the same value in both the From and Thru fields When this setup definition is used in a function for a field only data that corresponds to the ranges you entered is used You can assign more than one range of values for the same setup type in the setup definition F
382. tically fill the report the next time the user uses the report Import Definitions o M Use the Import Definitions function to define the layout of a file that you want to import into OSAS Bank Reconciliation General Ledger Transactions General Ledger Budgets or Payroll Time Tickets Select Import Definitions from the System File Utilities menu The Import Definitions screen appears El import Definitions telat Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xu6 na ma 20 06 OK Layout ID TCImport A Description Time Card Import Import Type PA Time Tickets File Type Comma Delimited Record Length 0 File Name Field Name Type Field Start Length Default Force Translate Amount Number 1 0 45 B Compensation Code Text 0 0 0 a Cost Code Text d d 0 a Deduction Code Number 0 0 0 Department ID Text 0 0 0 Earning Code Text 0 0 0 Employee ID Text 0 0 0 A Hourly Rate Number 0 0 0 Hours Number 0 0 0 xj Job ID Text 0 0 0 s Labor Class Text 0 0 o F3 Line No 000001 of 000022 Enter edit Layout ID Delete layout Go to Company H 08 19 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Inquiry 1 Enter or select the Layout ID you want to work with 2 Enter or edit the Description of the import definition CHAPTER 7 System File Utilities Import Definitions 3 Select the
383. ting the alignment mark requires Windows to open and close the printer which automatically triggers a form feed through Windows causing forms to misalign Use the Form Codes function page 3 35 to turn off alignment marks to avoid printing extra form feeds If you want to print directly without the form feed you need to set up a device in OSAS that prints to the local port dev Ipt1 or LPT for example and the Windows print driver needs to print directly to the port Ordering Forms Forms are loaded into printers face up or face down When you order pre numbered forms for a printer that loads face down the order must be reverse collated Request this when ordering 2 38 Resource Manager Devices Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Devices Plotters Screen The Plotters screen appears when you add or edit a plotter line in the devices file E Devices Plotters i ola les Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help xt5 amp a ma e ee o Device Name D001 4 System Device Name o 4 Device Type doscon a Device Mode Value Driver Name E Mode 2 Font 1 a Font 2 Font 3 Slave On Slave Off Initialization Termination E Enter edit l Header Done CompanyH 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 ovR Enter or edit this information in the header section Enter the Device Name e The Copy From
384. tion Account Number 0001658973 Routing Code 000000013 Signature Lines 1 Fraction 47 20 212 Allow ACH Creation vi Positive Pay Format BOA AP s Next AP Check Number 0004013 Next AP Voucher Number 0000006 Next PA Check Number 0000000 Next PA Voucher Number 0000000 Last ACH Posted 12 14 2010 E Batch 0000001 Print Field on ACH File Federal Tax ID r 77777717717 Security Code for File Transfer One Line of 94 Total Characters LOGDX123456 Batch 33112551125 CMPY DOME HOMES Pad Security Code to a Length of 00 Company H 10 25 2010 Terminal T000 INS The next screen contains the account information associated with bank accounts beginning with the account and routing numbers 3 11 CHAPTER 3 Company Setup Bank Accounts 3 12 Enter the number the bank assigned to the account in the Account Number box If you enter a number longer than 15 characters the account number is truncated on deposit slips Enter the Routing Code for your bank Enter the number of Signature Lines to print on plain paper checks in OSAS BBj only Enter the Fraction code for your bank if needed Fraction codes were once used by financial institutions to route checks to the proper bank for payment They are still used by some banks often as a supplement to other routing methods in case part of the check is damaged or unreadable Check the Allow ACH Creation box if this account can be used for ACH electronic payment files if you do
385. to go to a specific line This command is available only if there is more than one screen of form printer lines Adding or Editing a Form Printer 3 38 To add a form printer press A on the Form Printers screen To edit the selected form printer press Enter on the Form Printers screen The Add or Edit Printer screen appears El Edit Printer fo O ES Commands Edit Modes Other Help 2x4 68 m0 70 0608 oc Js Form Type POFORM 4 Company ID H Workstation ID T000 a Printer Device ID LPD a Printer Device Name System Default Printer Dot Matrix Follow these steps to use the screen to add or edit a form printer 1 If you are adding a new printer select the Form Type that you want to print to a specific printer If you are editing an existing printer the form type for the selected line on the Form Printers screen appears 2 To print the selected form for a specific company to the printer you select enter or edit the Company ID for which to print the form type Leave this field blank to print this form for all companies to the printer you select 3 To print forms generated by a specific workstation to the printer you select enter or edit the Workstation ID Otherwise leave this field blank 4 Enter the Printer Device ID to use to print the selected form You can select only from the printers that are set up in the Devices function on the Installation and Configuration menu The printer name appears I
386. to set up critical tax information such as Tax Classes Tax Locations and Tax Groups You can also produce the Sales Tax Report and other File Lists as well as purge sales tax information from tax authorities and locations with the Clear Sales Tax function Database Utilities Use the Database Utilities functions to build application tables change file size and field contents view file contents rebuild and verify files purge data records and set up user defined fields or change field definitions System File Utilities Use the System File Maintenance functions to set up and maintain laser labels system menus application information help screens inquiry and global inquiry window definitions help screen text and system messages You can also use this menu to manage state and country codes and produce file lists Resource Manager About Resource Manager Welcome to OSAS CHAPTER 1 Data Files Executive Information Summary The Executive Information Summary menu allows you to view summarized accounting information on convenient screens called dashboards The dashboards show data from many different applications for one or more companies EIS Setup The EIS Setup allow you to set up various dashboards and fields recalculate results for various dashboards maintain files and print file lists Reports and Inquiry Use the Reports and Inquiry functions to audit the amount of disk space data files occupy and to print product
387. to the Documents screen e Press O to open the attached document in the appropriate software application You may need to edit the Resource Manager File Types function in order to associate files with your preferred applications Note If you have problems opening a document return to the function in which the document was attached and edit the attachment to change the direction of the slashes used in the directory path If the directory path contains backward slashes change them to forward slashes and vice versa e Press Gto go to a specific document line This command is available only when there is more than one screen of line items e Press S to choose a different sorting criteria for the document list You can sort the list by sequence number document description path or file name Use the Exit F7 command to return to the function screen from which you accessed the Documents command when you finish viewing documents APPENDIX B Main Menu Commands B 3 Function Commands B 5 Help Commands B 9 Scroll Region Commands B 11 Field Editing Commands B 13 Resource Manager OSAS Commands Numerous commands are available within OSAS to help you perform various tasks On the main menu these commands allow you to change the system date switch between live and sample data and so on On function screens use the commands to access the online PDF documentation work with the information on the function screen drill down t
388. to the main menu After installing the update you can change this path back to the original if necessary 4 Select Install Applications from the Installation and Configuration menu to install the update A message similar to this one appears i Update Media Commands Edit Modes Other Help me ma This file upgrades OSAS v6 5x with all fixes approved by QA by 5 12 2003 Be sure to back up your system before installing this update For more information visit the support section on our website at http www osas com Prompt for Each Application E 5 When the Install Applications screen appears use the commands to select the applications and components to which to apply the update 6 Press Dto install the update OSAS copies extracts and removes files as necessary and restarts when the update completes Resource Manager 2 7 Users Te The Users function allows you to set up user IDs for the employees that are allowed to use OSAS When you set up user IDs employees are required to log in when they start OSAS enforcing security The OSAS Login screen appears when you start OSAS after you set up at least one user You must set up user IDs Certain OSAS processes such as some posting processes create lock files to prevent data corruption and these lock files are dependent on the terminal ID which is associated with each user If you are in a multi user environment you should ensure the uniqueness of these termina
389. tories e data directories e Report Writer data directory sample data directory e System files directory e utilities directory The OSINFO DOS file is used on Windows systems while the OSINFO UNX file is used on UNIX and Linux systems One or both files may be used depending on the operating systems you use with OSAS In mixed client server environments the UNIX terminals use the OSINFO UNX file for path information and the Windows workstations use the OSINFO DOS file The Workstation Keyboard file stores information about the keyboard values used by each workstation Set up your keyboard through the Keyboard function page 4 23 The User Activity Log file records the log in activity of each user The Menu Bar Return Value file stores keystroke information that is used on graphical screens for keystrokes that are not trapped by standard OSAS input routines Resource Manager OSMN OSMNxxx OSPD OSPH OSPRN OSREF TXT OSRET TXT OSST OSTD OSTM OSVAR RMCDxxx RMDEVDEF File Descriptions APPENDIX C The Other Commands Menu file stores the Other Commands menu for each company To access this menu press F4 twice on the menu or F4 once from a field The Main Menu file stores the menu records that appear on the screen for an application The main menu for a single company is updated when you create data files edit the main menu or remove an application from the system The Reminder Detail file store
390. tory and may be accessed while working with live or sample data This file is a text file that you can edit with any text editor if necessary Keep in mind that OSAS restarts after you save changes to the directories listed in this function Before you change directory paths make sure that the progRM Program Directory path is correct in the Application Information function page 7 15 and that all directory changes you make here are valid To view or change directory information select Directories from the Installation and Configuration menu The Directory screen appears EN Directories Teal Commands Edit Modes Other Scroll Commands Help 2xe ke m 202 amp Ok bandor A Install Directory 76cd 4 Base Directory aJ Prefix Paths Data 1 data Data 2 Data 3 Sample sample Graphics gui System sysfil Report Writer RW data Utilities C OSAS76f bbj utils std Other Paths CplLstDir C OSAS76f bbj bin lum RebuildDir C OSAS76f bbj utils mkrecover Enter edit Goto write Company H 06 08 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Resource Manager 2 51 CHAPTER 2 Installation and Configuration Directories 2 52 The directories OSAS uses appear If you need to install an application or an update from a location other than the one listed change the Install directory path You
391. u use to modify or create dashboards e Use the EIS Dashboard Display command to open any OSAS dashboard e The EIS Reports submenu contains reports that list all information about a dashboard and any historical information 8 1 CHAPTER 8 Executive Information Summary 8 2 The EIS Periodic Maintenance submenu contains the functions you need to recalculate the data on all dashboards or purge dashboard history The EIS File Maintenance submenu houses the functions you use to create a dashboard from scratch or to modify an existing one The EIS Master File Lists submenu contains the reports that list master dashboard information Use these lists as a reference for the fields functions and setups you need to use to build your custom dashboards Resource Manager Working with Dashboards o M You can use the built in dashboards as they are or you can modify them to fit your unique needs You can also create new dashboards from scratch You build dashboards using fields setups and functions Fields are the building blocks of dashboards They display information pulled from your OSAS data or calculated in functions The information that appears in a field is defined by setups and functions Refer to page 9 3 for more information on fields and how to use them Setups define the range of data that is used in a function and that appears in a field For example you use setups to control the range of company
392. ues to the EIHIST file It is important to remember that dashboards use two meanings for global When you use the Global command within a dashboard you recalculate all fields on that dashboard only This updated information is not saved to history When you use the Global Dashboard Update function you recalculate all fields on all dashboards available in OSAS and can save those updated values to history Follow these steps to update all EIS fields and save the updated values to history 1 Select Global Dashboard Update from the EIS Periodic Maintenance submenu The Global Dashboard Update screen appears EN Global Dashboard Update TES Commands Edit Modes Other Help xalaemo l e e OK Abandon Calculate Values for All Dashboards Y Transfer Calculated Values to History Y Start Date 1208007 E Time 18 39 Company H 12 28 2007 Terminal TO00 OVR Resource Manager 11 3 CHAPTER 11 EIS Periodic Maintenance Global Dashboard Update Select the first check box or enter Y in text mode if you want to recalculate and update all field values Select the second check box or enter Y in text mode if you want to save the updated values to the EIHIST file This option is not available if the Keep value files history for EIS option is set to NO in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function page 3 31 The current date and time appear in the Start Date and Time fields Press enter to use
393. uilders Supply 3 47 PM Setup Definitions List Setup ID Description ALLINV All Inventory Items From All Bank Accounts From Company Ranges From Cash Accounts From Thru 1000 00999 Cash Accounts Account Types From Thru 005 010 Resource Manager 12 9 CHAPTER 13 Working with Dashboards 13 3 Company Summary Cash Requirements Forecast Daily Statistics AR Analysis AP Analysis Top 10 Customers Top 10 Items Top 10 Sales Reps Top 10 Vendors Resource Manager 13 5 16 7 13 9 13 11 13 13 13 15 13 17 13 19 13 21 Executive Information Summary OSAS includes several built in Executive Information Summary dashboards that give you instant access to important data consolidated from several OSAS applications The dashboards help you identify top performers determine your company s current position or view current company statistics and requirements without needing to jump between applications These dashboards work seamlessly with the sample data provided with OSAS If your company uses organizational and naming structures similar to that in the sample data you should have few problems using the built in dashboards with your live data However if your company structures differ you may need to modify the dashboards field setup or function definitions before information appears properly See EIS File Maintenance on page 9 1 for more information 13 1 Working with Dashbo
394. ult values work well in the majority of cases and make fields easier to position Saving To save a dashboard select Save from the File EIS menu If you modify an Dashboards existing dashboard it s good practice to save the modifications under a new name to preserve the original dashboard for future use Resource Manager 9 33 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Dashboard Editor Working with Text Dashboards Opening Dashboards Using Commands 9 34 The screen that appears when you select Dashboard Editor from the EIS File Maintenance submenu in text mode is shown below A E osas Tooo ice t eu Settings Edit Print Help Untitled Dashboard ROW 01 COL 01 lt PgDn gt for Commands A new dashboard opens automatically when you enter the function To open an existing dashboard press Page Down to access the command menus then press F to access the File commands Finally press L and enter the dashboard ID that you want to open To open a new dashboard press Page Down to access the command menus press F to access the File commands then press N to open a new dashboard Available commands are listed at the bottom of the screen To access the command menus press Page Down To access the commands on a menu press the highlighted letter These menus are available in text mode e Press F to access the File menu When you are inside this menu press L to load an existing dashboard S to save a dashboar
395. und the screen The buttons are available only in graphical mode Key Button Description Home E Moves to the first line item in the list Page Up A Moves to the previous screen or to the first line item Up 4 Moves up one line item Down E Moves down one line item Page Down z Moves to the next screen or to the last line item End z Moves to the last line item in the list F3 Deletes the selected line item Insert Inserts a line item at the selected line Enter Edits or views the selected line item Resource Manager B 11 Field Editing Commands o M When the cursor is in a field that contains information you can use these commands to work with that information Key Description Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the right Left Arrow Moves the cursor to the left Delete Delete the character the cursor is on Insert Toggles Insert mode on and off When the Insert flag or INS in graphical mode appears at the bottom of the screen the characters you enter push other characters in the field to the right If there is no Insert flag or if OVR appears in graphical mode the characters you enter overwrite other characters in the field Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the field End Moves the cursor to the end of the field F9 or Ctrl Z Undo Restores a field to its original condition before you changed it You can use this command only while you are in the field once you move past it you must use the Aban
396. unts Receivable 4 nclude BK Bills of Materials Kitting ei nclude FA Fixed Assets nclude IN Inventory nclude JO Job Cost nclude PA Payroll Enter toggle All None Report Only l Purge and Report Company H 08 11 2010 Terminal T000 OVR Follow these steps to audit document links 1 Scroll between the applications to choose which files to audit Press Enter to toggle the highlighted application between the Include and Exclude flag 6 15 CHAPTER 6 Database Utilities Audit Document Links 6 16 Press A to include all available applications in the audit or press N to set all applications to be excluded When you ve included the desired applications you can press R to begin the audit and receive a report log without removing the links or press P to begin the audit and remove the broken document links after which a report log is printed When you finish use the Exit F7 command to return to the menu Audit Document Links Database Utilities CHAPTER 6 Sample Audit Document Links Report No missing links in documents for IN Inventory No missing links in documents for Inventory Description JO Job Cost No missing links in documents for Job Cost Document Description Note Document Pa End of Report 6 17 Data File Allocation Report The Data File Allocation Report lists the data files on your system and their sizes Use it to audit the use
397. up definitions to enter a specific range to use You can enter ranges for setup definitions in two ways 1 Enter values directly into the setup definition For example enter H in both the From and Thru values for the COMP setup to return values only for company H Since this change applies instantly to the definitions already set up in the system this method is the fastest way to customize existing dashboards to display information for a specific range for a company or a range of companies for example However when you want to view information for a different range you need to change the setup definition again Use this method if you primarily use the dashboards as they are defined and want to quickly view information for different data ranges For example you can modify a setup to specify company A view the dashboard for company A modify the setup again to specify company B and then view the dashboard for only company B s information and so on Resource Manager 9 11 CHAPTER 9 EIS File Maintenance Setup Definitions 9 12 Create a new setup definition perhaps copied from an existing one to save time and enter the From and Thru values you want to use then pair that setup with functions and field definitions to display the values you want This method gives you the most flexibility when creating and modifying dashboards because you can create setup definitions for each range you use For example you could create the C
398. ves you cannot use mapped drives if you use OSAS on BBj Instead specify the BBj data server in the path name see the example below if you use a separate data server to house your data files Using Data Server Pathing If you use a data server on a separate computer to house your data files and manage access to them you must edit these directories after installation so that OSAS stores and accesses data files in the correct location To change these directory paths to use data server pathing use these conventions BBj Data Server lt tiger gt C osas data or lt tiger ssl gt C osas data if you use secure connections see the RM installation guide PRO 5 Data Server tiger pro5srv gt C osas data Where tiger is the machine name of the computer on which the data server is installed pro5srv is the name of the PRO 5 data service as noted in the services file and C osas data is the directory on that server in which you want to store your OSAS data files 2 56 Resource Manager Directories Installation and Configuration CHAPTER 2 Sharing Document Attachments If all users have access to the DocumentShare directory you can use it to store document attachments so that they are available to all OSAS users and to simplify entering attachment information When you attach a document store the document file in this directory first then enter DOC in the Path field be sure to include the parentheses on the Append Documents scr
399. vorites menu On the Favorites menu this command removes the selected application or function from the menu The Ctrl Z alternate key combination does not work in graphical mode Page Up Moves back one menu level Tab Returns to the main menu from any application menu Enter Selects an application menu or function from a menu Up Down Moves the cursor up or down through the menu selections Arrow B 4 Resource Manager Function Commands o o M Key Alternate Description Enter Accepts the data entered and moves the cursor to the next field or accesses a line for editing Esc Lists available commands for the screen Ins Toggles between insert and overwrite modes for entry When the Insert flag or INS in graphical mode appears the characters you enter push other characters in the field to the right If there is no Insert flag or if OVR appears in graphical mode the characters you enter overwrite other characters in the field Page Up Moves back to the first field on the screen or the first field after the key field without erasing any entries Page Down Approves the data on the screen updates the data file accordingly and proceeds to the next field or section Tab Moves the cursor to the next block or field that requires an entry Up Down Moves the cursor up and down through the fields Arrow F1 Esc H Opens the help description for the current field Shift F1 Esc A Launches your PDF viewer and opens the application
400. want to save original files Answering NO to the Convert zero balance records for ARHS file prompt reduces the size of the ARHSxxx Summary History file Keep Current Download updates from www osas com as often as possible Our website is our best means of providing you with access to the most current versions of our software Resource Manager D 5 APPENDIXE Installing Barcodes Installing the MICR Font Resource Manager E 2 E 4 Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality Several OSAS functions offer optional barcode printing on forms as well as the ability to print MICR codes on checks BBj is required to take advantage of this capability The following steps will prepare your system to print barcodes and MICR coding E 1 APPENDIX E Installing Barcode and MICR Functionality Installing Barcodes Barcode printing requires you to add a Jar file into the BBj path through the BBj Enterprise Manager Follow the steps below to add the Jar file into the BBj path and thereby enable Postnet and barcode printing capability Open and log in to the BBj Enterprise Manager The main BBj Enterprise Manager screen appears a BBj Enterprise Manager e Server Fonts Help 1 amp JOBC ODBC Connections E Triggers 3 BBj File System ij System Logs aa Connection Pools 3rd Party gt Memory Usage i Online Copy Jobs Web Service Configuration INP Configuration DATABASES J AddonDemoData CD St
401. xclusion Mask Begin Length Begin Length Segment 1 1 6 Segment 2 Segment 3 Search Definition Label Invoice No Position 7 Length 8 Company H 11 27 2007 Terminal T000 OVR Global Inquiry Definitions System File Utilities CHAPTER 7 The top section of the screen lists information about the file from which the system pulls information when the global inquiry screen is accessed In the File Name field enter the name of the central file for the window If the file is company specific put a lowercase x after the file name e In the File field enter the file index number used by the data file you specified then enter the number of fields defined for the file in the Flds field e Enter the key number that you want to use to display the records in the data in the Key field then enter the key length in the Key Len field The Record Selection section of the screen determines how and which records are selected in the window Enter the position of the key where the segment of the inclusion or exclusion mask begins Then enter the length of the mask The Search Definition section defines the input you can search for within the record selection you defined above Enter the Label that identifies the key segment to be entered when you use the Search Insert command or leave the field blank to disable the Search command e Enter the Position in the key number where the search label is found Enter the Length
402. you would like to translate in the Data File Value field 2 Enter the value into which you want to translate the original value in the Translated Value field 3 Use the Proceed OK command to save the translation and return to the inquiry translation screen 7 63 Resource Manager Guide Executive Information Summary CHAPTER 8 Working with Dashboards 8 3 Creating Graphical Dashboards from Text Dashboards 11 4 Planning Dashboard Changes 11 5 Common Ratios 8 6 EIS Dashboard Display 8 9 Resource Manager Executive Information Summary Executive Information Summary EIS is a powerful tools that consolidates data from several OSAS applications and displays that information on a digital dashboard This tool gives managers and executives the big picture in one glance the dashboards quickly summarize top producers important company statistics and requirements and key Accounts Payable or Accounts Receivable information to provide snapshots of the company s position and aid in deeper analysis Several dashboards are already built in to OSAS to give you instant access to the information you need to make the best decision for your business You can modify these existing dashboards as necessary or create one from scratch to fill a unique need See Executive Information Summary on page 13 1 for more information on existing OSAS dashboards The Executive Information Summary menu houses the functions and commands yo
403. your changes then press any key to exit from the help screen 7 21 Inquiry Window Definitions MM Use the Inquiry Window Definitions function to maintain the windows that appear when you use the Inquiry F2 command Although the inquiry windows are already set up for you you can change the size of the window modify data and headings or add a window You can also add different sort options based on the alternate keys defined by the system Keep in mind that you will need in depth information about your data files and fields if you choose to create or edit these windows If you want to add the Inquiry F2 command to a field where it is not already available you will need to make modifications to the OSAS source code Follow these steps to work with inquiry window definitions 1 Select Inquiry Window Definitions from the System File Utilities menu The Inquiry Window Definitions screen appears Inquiry 2 Enter the Application and inquiry Window ID you want to view or modify Information for that inquiry window appears The remaining fields on the screen are available only after you enter the Window ID Window IDs are nine characters long When more than one window ID is available for a certain field the first eight characters in the window ID are the same and the ninth differs For example seven variations of the ARACCWI window are available for use with the Customer Inquiry in Accounts Receivable Each variation sorts
404. ysis 13 11 Cash Requirements Forecast 13 7 commands 8 10 13 3 common ratios 8 6 Company Summary 13 5 creating graphical from text 8 4 Daily Statistics 13 9 displaying specific information 13 4 editor 9 29 9 36 EIS Dashboard Display 8 9 fields 9 3 9 9 definitions list 12 5 history report 10 9 properties 9 33 working with 9 32 9 35 files 8 4 formulas 9 7 functions 9 17 9 23 Functions List 12 7 global update 11 3 11 4 graphical 9 31 history report 10 7 modes 8 4 9 29 modifying 13 4 overview 8 3 planning 8 5 9 30 properties 9 32 purging history 11 5 11 6 report 10 5 roles 9 25 9 27 Resource Manager saving 9 33 9 36 Screen Definitions List 12 3 Setup Definitions List 12 9 setup IDs 9 11 9 15 setup ranges 9 11 text 9 34 titles 9 35 Top 10 Customers 13 15 Top 10 Items 13 17 Top 10 Sales Reps 13 19 Top 10 Vendors 13 21 types 8 4 viewing 8 9 Data File Maintenance 6 1 7 45 Application Tables 3 39 3 40 Change Fields 6 11 6 14 Change File Size 6 5 6 6 Field Definitions 7 41 7 45 File Rebuild Verify 6 7 6 8 overview 6 1 Purge Data Records 6 9 6 10 User Defined Field Setup 2 59 2 61 View File Contents 6 3 6 4 data files adding user defined fields to 2 59 allocation report 6 19 changing size of 6 5 CJC file conversion 3 27 D 2 converting from older versions 3 27 creating 3 25 dashboards 8 4 directories 2 51 directory 2 51 in field definitions 7 44

OSAS Resource Manager User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents